SWEDISH GRAMMAR

EDW. J. VICKNER
 A BRIEF

SWEDISH GRAMMAR
BY

EDW. J. VICKNER, M. A., PH. D.

PROFESSOR OP SCANDINAVIAN LANGUAGES,
UNIVERSITY OF WASHINGTON

REVISED EDITION

ROCK ISLAND, ILL.

AUGUSTAN A BOOK CONCERN
1914
 COPYKIGHT, 1912,
BY
AUGUSTANA BOOK CONCERN.

COPYRIGHT, 1914,
BY
AUGUSTANA BOOK CONCERN.

ROCK ISLAND, ILL.

AUOU6TAN4 BOOK CONCERN, PRINTERS AND BINDERS.
 PREFACE.
The cause and aim of this book is to present in a clear
and concise way the commonplace facts and principles of
the Swedish language. It lays no claim to be a compen-
dium of all forms and usages of either the spoken or writ-
ten language.
The introduction of Swedish into numerous high schools
and universities in this country has created a demand for
a book which not only assist the exclusively English-
may
speaking studentsto attain a fair reading and speaking

knowledge of modern Swedish but which may also meet

the demand of American born students of Swedish descent
who more complete knowledge of the lan-
desire to gain a

guage of their fathers. The consideration that the majority

of the students who will use his book are already more or
less conversant with Swedish has led the author to make

the lessons longer and the exercises rather more advanced

than is the case in most beginners' books, to make the
vocabularies unusually voluminous, and to devote consider-
able attention to idiomatic expressions.
The exercises have been made continuous wherever it

was found practicable to do so; and it is to be hoped that

this form of exercise will prove more interesting and less

irksome to the student than the form that consists of de-

tached sentences. The fact that each lesson thus contains
words which are associated with one another in common
use will undoubtedly encourage an acquisition of con-
nected phrases rather than mere words. This form of
exercise, moreover, facilitates a m-ethod which the author
IV

from his experience in the class room has found of great

value for the attainment of a correct pronunciation and

fluency, that of requiring the student to reproduce the

contents of the exercises in his own words. The author
feels confident that his lends itself to conversa-
grammar
tional practice.The vocabulary has been carefully selected
from the language of everyday life and the phrases of the
Swedish exercises are of a colloquial and idiomatic char-
acter.
In the method employed the teacher will naturally be
guided by his own judgment and the character of his class;
the author would, however, suggest that two hours be
devoted to each lesson. During the first hour the gram-
matical part should be thoroughly discussed, the teacher
supplementing the examples given as illustrations, and the
Swedish portion of the exercise thoroughly practiced; the
second hour should be devoted to a rapid review, transla-
tion of the English portion, and to conversation. The*
conversational exercises are not intended to be exliaustive
but suggestive for further drill. The value of the con-
versational method cannot be overestimated.

Unusually ample space has been accorded the treatment

of the prepositions, which in all languages and especially
in Swedish constitute one of the chief difficulties which

confront the learner.

The author's treatment of pronunciation and accent,
especially the musical, which is one of the peculiarities of
Swedish, may perliaps evoke criticism by reason of its
brevity. The limitations of space in an elementary book

forbid entering into minute details. The booJc is chiefly

intended for class use and much is therefore left to the
instructor to supplement. Moreover, a correct Swedish
pronunciation and especially a mastery of the musical
accent, or intonation, can be acquired only by constant
imitation and practice.
In conclusion the author desires to acknowledge his
indebtedness to Professor A. A. Stomberg, University of
Minnesota, for much valuable advice and encouragement;
and to Professor Jules Mauritzson, Augustana College,
Rock Island, for his extremely valuable services in revising
the manuscript.

E. J. VlCKNER.
 CONTENTS.

PART I.
ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION.
PAGE
The Alphabet 1
Pronunciation: Quantity; The Vowels; The Consonants;
Accentuation 1

Capitalization 12
Punctuation 13
Syllabication 14

PART II.
THE PARTS OP SPEECH.
LESSON
I. Genders Articles Verbs 15
II. Definite Articles: Postpositive, Prepositive... 20
III. Inflection of Nouns: First and Second Declen-
sion 25
IV. Third Declension 29
V. The Verb: First Conjugation 33
VI. Second Conjugation 38
VII. Inflection of Nouns: Fourth Declension Ad-
jectives: Indefinite Declension 43
VIII. Nouns: Fifth Declension Adjectives: Definite
Declension Use of Prepositive Definite
Article 49
IX. Nouns: Irregularities in Declension Declen-
sion of Proper Names Genitive Case 55
X. The Verb: Third Conjugation Pronouns:
Personal 62
XI. The Verb: Future and Future Perfect Indica-
tive; Imperative Pronouns: Reflexive.... 67
XII. The Verb: Fourth Conjugation 73
XIII. The Verb: Subjunctive 79
XIV. The Verb: .Irregularities; Unreal Conditions 86
XV. Possessive Pronouns and Adjectives Position
of Adverbs . 92
VIII

LESSON PAGE
XVI. The Verb: Passive Voice 98
XVII. The Verb: Passive with Auxiliaries: Deponents 105
XVIII. Pronouns: Demonstrative Ill
XIX. The Verb: Verb Compounds 117
XX. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives Rela-
tive Pronouns and Adjectives 123
XXI. The Verb: Present and Past Participle 131
XXII. The Verb: Impersonal Verbs; Reflexive Verbs 137
XXIII. The Verb: Modal Auxiliaries 144
XXIV. The Verb: Modal Auxiliaries 150
XXV. Pronouns: Indefinite 157
XXVI. Pronouns: Indefinite 163
XXVII. The Verb: Tenses of Indicative; Uses of In-
finitive 168
XXVIII. Adjectives: Comparison 176
XXIX. Adjectives: Comparison Adverbs: Compari-
son 181
XXX. Numerals: and Ordinals; Expres-
Cardinals
sions of time, measure, and price 186
XXXI. Numeral Formations; Expressions of date and
time 193
XXXII. Prepositions: Uses 201
XXXIII. Prepositions: Uses 208
XXXIV. Prepositions: Uses 214
XXXV. Prepositions: Uses 220
XXXVI. Adverbs: Uses 226
XXXVII. Conjunctions: Coordinating 233
XXXVIII. Conjunctions: Subordinating 239
XXXIX. Interjections 246
Appendix: Use of the Articles Rules of Gender Notes
on Inflection of Nouns Irregularities in Conversational
Pronunciation Irregularities in Conversational Gram-
mar 248 253
Strong and Irregular Verbs: Principal Parts 254
Vocabulary :
Swedish-English 258
English-Swedish 280
Condensed Index of Subjects 301
Swedish National Songs 305
BRIEF SWEDISH GRAMMAR
PART I.

ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION.

The Alphabet.
1. The Swedish alphabet is as follows:
CHARACTERS NAMES CHARACTERS
A a ah
B b
Cc
D d
E e
F f
Gg
H h
I i

J j
K k
L 1

Mm
1SI n
o
2 PRONUNCIATION.

chapter shall be studied in advance. The study of the Gram

mar proper should begin as soon as possible, and constant
reference, supplemented by such help as may be rendered by
the teacher, should be made to the discussion of the sounds
given below.
2. It must be borne in mind that the sounds of any two

languages hardly ever correspond exactly; hence comparisons

between Swedish and English are only approximate.

QUANTITY.
2. The quantity of Swedish sounds is either long
or short. For practical purposes the consonants
offer no peculiar difficulties as regards length. The
following rules will serve as a guide in determining
the quantity of the vowels:
(a) A vowel is long in an accented syllable when
followed by a short consonant sound fara, to travel : :

hdla, cave fel, error grdl, quarrel dra, honor.

; ; ;

(b) A vowel is short in an accented syllable when

followed by a long consonant sound: andas, to
breathe; folia, to fall; allt, everything; fall, hem;
tanda, to kindle; eld, fire; dygd, virtue.
(c) In unaccented syllables both the vowel sound
and the consonant sound are short: si rap, sirup; '

tall'rik, plate; mor'gon, morning.

(d) A final accented vowel is always long.
3. The long and the short vowel sounds are indi-
cated in the same manner in writing. The short
consonant sound is generally indicated by a single
consonant; the long by two or more consonants,
especially a double consonant.
NOTE. Sometimes the long consonant sound in an accented syllable is indi-
m
cated by a single consonant, notably in the case of and n: dom, sentence;
kom, come man, man ; van, friend. With a few exceptions
; m
is not doubled
at the end of a word or syllable.
 PRONUNCIATION. 3

THE VOWELS.
REMARK. The vowels must receive full and distinct utter-
ance in all positions. No vowel is silent; only in the case of e
in unaccented endings such as -en, -el, -er, -et, and -e is there
a tendency towards slurring.

4. a. (1) When
long this sound varies between
the sound of a in far and the sound of o in foreign
when this o-sound is prolonged fader, father grad, :
;

grade; tola, to speak.

NOTE. Avoid a as in fall.

(2) When short like the first a in aha: malm,

ore; salt, salt; tacka, to thank.
5. e. (1) When long this sound is an approxi-
mation to the sound of a in day without the vanish.
The exact sound is that of the German long e in
mehr: ek, oak; fel, error; leda, to lead; ned, down.
(2) When short it is (a) qualitatively the same
as when long: hem, home; vecka, week; eld, fire;
(b) like short a (see 11, 2) den, the, that; mest, :

most; herr, Mister (avoid e as in her).

6. i. (1) When
long like i in machine (avoid
diphthong) mig, me; tid, time; ila, to hurry; fir a,
:

to celebrate; ni, you.

(2) When short it is qualitatively the same as

when long: min, mine; ingen, no one; viska, to
whisper; silver, silver; stirra, to stare; (avoid i as
in stir).
7. o. (1) When
two sounds: (a) ap-
long, o has
proximately The exact sound is
like oo in moon.
formed by the tongue position for the Swedish long
a,with the lips so constricted ("rounded") as to be
nearly closed: olycka, misfortune; sko, shoe; sopa,
4 PRONUNCIATION.

to sweep; ros, rose; (b) like o in hope (avoid diph-

thong). This sound is identical with the Swedish
long a (see 10, 1) hov, court; Robert; kol, coal.
:

(2) When short it has two sounds: (a) like the

first o in oho! or like o in oil: om, if; hopp, hope;

kropp, body; (b) like oo in moon shortened: ost,

cheese blomma, flower moster, aunt.
; ;

8. u. (1) The sound of long u is produced by the

tongue position for Swedish long e (see 5, 1) with
the lips so extremely constricted (rounded) as to
be nearly closed: gul, yellow; ut, out; duka, to set
the table; mjuk, soft.

(2) The sound of short u is more open than that

of long u. It is approximately that of u in value
(without the introductory consonantal ^/-sound) :

under, under; guld, gold; kunna, to be able.

9. y. Y is identical in sound with German u and
French u in une. Round the lips as if to pronounce
u in rude, then pronounce ee in seen. It is either
long or short. Ex. (long) fyra, four; rysa, to :

shudder; ny, new; yr, dizzy; (short) sylt, jam, :

yttra, to utter; fylla, to fill.

10. a. (1) When long like o in hope (avoid the

diphthong) :
ar, year; kal, cabbage; ga, to go; sara,
to wound.
(2) When short like short open o (see 7, 2) :

dllon, acorn; fall, hem; holla, to hold; atta, eight;

manga, many.
11. a. (1) When long approximately like a in
care (avoid the diphthong) : dra, honor; lasa, to
read dta, to eat dven, even, also.
; ;
 PRONUNCIATION. 5

(2) When short like e in met: an, than, yet; man,

men; stalla, to put; angel, angel.
12. 6. d is identical with German 6 and French
eu. Round the lips as if to sound o in so; then
pronounce the Swedish long e (see 5, 1). It is long
or short. Ex. (long) oga, eye; rok, smoke; over,
:

over; (short) foil, fell; oppen, open; backer, books.

:

NOTE. This vowel has a tendency to become more open when short and also
before especially rr ; sot, sweet, long and close ; in soft (the neuter form of
r,

sot) the o is short and slightly open oga, eye, long and close ; hora, to hear,
;

long and quite open ; dorr, door, still more open.

13. The vowels a, o, u, a are called hard vowels,

and e, i, y, d, 6 are called soft vowels.

14. Vowel modification, which in English is very

often referred to under its German name umlaut,
is a process of considerable importance in Swedish

inflection Thus a change from a

and derivation.
and a u to y, occurs in the inflec-
to d, or o to 6, or
tional forms of many words and in derivatives.
Ex.: and, duck, pi. dnder; lang, long, comparative
langre; bok, book, pi. backer; ung, young, comp.
yngre; lang, long, langd, length; ga, to go, gdngse,
current.

GENERAL OBSERVATION.
A vowel is usually pronounced as it is written. There are
a few exceptions in words of foreign origin; thus, ou in a few
French words sounds like u short, journal' (shurnal') eu ;

sounds like oi in the word Preussen, Prussia, and its deriva-

tives; u like y in a few French words: juste (shyst), just,
fair. These exceptions are neither many nor important.
6 PRONUNCIATION.

THE CONSONANTS.
NOTE. Consonants not discussed here have the same sound as in English.

15. c. (1) Like English s before the soft vowels

e, i, and y: cirkel, cylirider, cigarf'.

(2) Before the hard vowels a, o, u, and before

another c or other consonant like English k: Colum-
bus, accent'.
(3) Ch has the sound of sj (26) in a few words
of foreign origin: choklad, chocolate; charmant,
charming.
16. d. Like English d, but is silent before /:
djup, deep; djur, animal.
NOTE. Where d according to the old orthography stands before t in the same
syllable it is either pronounced like t; according to the new
silent or
orthography (officially adopted in 1906) it is either eliminated or changed to t :
gott (new form), neuter of god, good; godt (old form) ont (new form), neuter
;

of ond, evil ; ondt (old form) .

17. f. Is identical in sound with English /: frdga,

to ask kraft, power
; ; folia, to hem ; fotograf, photog-
rapher.
NOTE. In accordance with the old orthography / at the end of a syllable or
word (except foreign words) has the sound of v and is silent before t; in the
middle of a word except where v begins the succeeding member of a compound.
In the new orthography v has supplanted / everywhere in marking the sound of
v: tolv (new), twelve, tolf (old) : silver (new), silfver (old) ; lova (new), to
promise, lofva (old).

18. g. (1) Like English g in go before the hard

vowels a, o, u, a, and the consonants; and also be-
fore the soft vowels e and i in unaccented endings;
and in final positions, except after I and r: gd, to go ;

gata, street; spegel, mirror; tagit, taken; krig, war.

(2) Like English y in year (tongue closer to
the palate) before the soft vowels e, i, y, d, 6 in
accented syllables of native words and after I and
 PRONUNCIATION. 7

r: genom, through; giva, to give; gynna, to favor;

korg, basket; svalg, throat.
(3) Like k before t and occasionally before s:
sagt, said; bragt, brought; krigsman, warrior.
NOTE 1. G is not silent before n: gnaga, gnaw.
2. G before t, which occurred frequently in the old orthography, has now
generally been replaced by k: vikt (new), weight, vigt (old) ; drdkt (new),
dress, dragt (old).

(4) Like sj (see below, 26) in a number of loan

words of French origin: generos', generous; gene'-
ra, to inconvenience; korrige'ra, to correct; gest,
gesture.
19. h. Is strongly aspirated, but is silent before
j: holla, to hold; hel, whole; hjul, wheel; hjdrta,
heart.
NOTE. The silent h before v in the old orthography has been dropped in the
new: hvem, who, now vem; hvar, where, now var.

20. Like g (18, 2) or English consonantal

j.

y: jord, earth; jdmn, even; jag, I; jul, Christmas.

NOTE. In a few French loan words like sj: jasmin' (shasmin'), jessamine;
jalusi' (shalusi'), window shade.

21. k. (1) Like English k before consonants and

hard vowels, also before e and i in unaccented end-
ings, and before soft vowels in words of foreign
origin kalla, to call kula, ball rike, realm rynkig,
: ; ; ;

wrinkled; arkiv', archives.

(2) Like English ch before the soft vowels (e, i,
y, a, 6) except as stated above: kedja, chain; kil,
wedge; kylig, chilly; kar, dear; kott, meat.
(3) Double k is written ck, except in och, and.
NOTE. K is not silent before n: kniv, knife; knd, knee.

22. m. Has the same sound as in English.

NOTE. In some words of French origin em is sounded like the Swedish ang:
cmballe'ra (angballera.), pack, wrap; emblem' (angblame), emblem.
8 PRONUNCIATION.

23. n. Has the same sound as in English.

NOTE 1. In some words of French origin en is sounded like the Swedish
ang, and on like the Swedish ang: entusiasm' (angtusiasm), enthusiasm; pente
(pangsOi pansy; fond (f&ngd), fund, background.
2. If g and n occurring together belong to the same radical syllable, they

are pronounced with an n before, except at the beginning of a word gnista, :

spark; lugn (lungn), calm; vagn (vangn), carriage.

3. Ng sounds like English ng in singer, not like ng in finger: Idng, long
gang, song ; sjunga, to sing.

24. r. Is strongly trilled with the tip of the

tongue: arm, arm; bdra, to carry; dorr, door.
Observe that the vowels are pronounced distinctly
before r not blurred as in English.
NOTE 1. The uvular r which is made with the uvula vibrating against the
back of the tongue is now regarded as permissible.
2. R in the combinations rl, m, rs and especially rd and rt is not pro-
nounced, the /, n, s, d, and t become supradental, that is, pronounced w-ith
the tip of the tongue touching the palate sort, murmur drna, to intend:
; ;

kors, cross ; bord, table ; bort, away.

25. s. Is pronounced like s in so: sol, sun; sys-

ter, sister; resa, to travel.

26. sch, Before a vowel these are

sj, skj, ssj, stj.
all pronounced with a sound that resembles English
sh but is somewhat rougher. It must be carefully
practiced with the teacher schack, chess sjo, lake : ; ;

sju, seven sjdl, soul skjorta, shirt skjuta, to shoot

; ; ; ;

hdssja, hayrack; stjarna, star.

NOTE. In the endings -sion and -ssion the *t and ssi are sounded like sh.

27. sk. (1) Before the soft vowels (e, i, y, d, 6)

sk has the same sound as sch, sj, etc., as described
in the preceding section (26) skena, to run away; :

skilja, to separate; skyla, to cover; skdl, reason;

skold, shield.
(2) Before the hard vowels (a, o, u, a) sk is pro-
nounced like the English sk: skal, shell; sko, shoe;
skuld, guilt; skal, bowl.
 PRONUNCIATION. 9

NOTE 1. Exceptions to this rule are the words marskalk, marshal, and
mdnniska, human being, in which sk is pronounced like sj.
2. Before e and i of an ending sk is pronounced like English sk: disken
(from disk, counter) flasket (from flask, pork).
;

28. t. Like English t in most words.

NOTE 1. In the ending -tion ti is sounded like sj (26) :
action, action :

evolution, evolution.
When -tion is preceded by a, o, and r in dissyllabic words, a t is generally
inserted before the *;'-sound in pronunciation: nation' (natsjoon') ;
motion'
(motsjoon'); portion' (portsjoon').
2. Like ts before t'a and ie in foreign words: aktie (aktsie), share; patient'
(patsient, also pashent') profeti'a (profetsia), prophecy.
;

29. tj. Is pronounced like English ch: tjock,

(chock), thick ;'tjdra (chairah), tar.
30. w. Is always pronounced like English v,
never like English w.
31. x. Is pronounced as in English.
NOTE. In words in -xion it is 1
pronounced like ksj: reflexion (rayflekshoon).

32. z. Always pronounced like s in so: zebra,

(saybrah) .

ACCENTUATION.
33. In Swedish a distinction must be made be-
tween the accent-stress and the musical accent.

ACCENT-STRESS.

34. Simple words. The accent-stress falls on

the root syllable of all simple native words: le'va,
to live; ha'ge, pasture; tan'ke, thought; mo'der,
mother.
35. Compounds. Compound words of native
origin, whether formed of noun-\-noun, prefix -\-
noun, noun-\-suffix, adjective+adjective, or prefix-}-
verb, have the main stress, as a rule, on the first
r
syllable: skol'hus, schoolhouse; av stand, distance;
Swedish Grammar 2
10 PRONUNCIATION.

man'lig, manly; dt'bar, eatable; bla'gul, blue and

yellow till'sta, to admit an' fora, to cite har'komst,
; ; ;

descent; prat'sam, talkative.

36. Exceptions, (a) The prefixes be-, e-, ent-,
and ge- are always unaccented: beha'ga, to please;
entle'diga, to discharge; gemal', consort; ehu'ru, al-
though. So also the prefix for- is unaccented in
most words: forta'la, to slander; forsta', to under-
stand; but fo'r'dom, prejudice (see 211).
(b) The following words have the main stress
on the penult, or next to the last syllable: egent'lig,
real; offent'lig, public; manat'lig, monthly; vasent'-
lig, essential; ordent'lig, orderly; barmhar'tig, char-
itable; fient'lig, hostile.
(c) All words ending in -eri have the main stress
on the ultima, or last syllable: tryckeri', printing
office; fiskeri', fishery; slaveri' slavery. ',

NOTE. Other exceptions will be indicated as they occur.

37. Compound words have

in addition to the
principal accent a strong secondary accent on the
last member of the compound: skol'hus', school-
house; trad'gard', garden.
38. Foreign words. Words of foreign origin
tend to retain their original accent. Words from
the Greek and the Romance languages, especially
those ending in -ant, -ent, -al, -i, -ik, -il, -ist, -ur, -ark,
are generally accented on the last syllable.
NOTE1. Nouns having the endings -tnno, -essa, -aker, -cter, -cum, -ikcl, -ifl,
-itel; adjectives ending in -abel, -ibcl, -isk, and verbs ending- in -era are ac-
cented on the penult.
2. Nouns ending in -turn, -to, and -ic have with a few exceptions the main
stress on the antepenult, or third syllable from the end: privilc' gium, privilege;
nola'rie, notary.
3. Foreign words ending in -or shift the accent when suffixes are added :

dok'tor, dokto'rer, doktor'ska, profes'sor, professo'rer.

 PRONUNCIATION. 11

MUSICAL ACCENT.

39. from the stress accent is the mu-

Different
sical accent. There are two kinds of musical accent
in Swedish employed in single words, the acute and
the grave, or the monosyllabic and the dissyllabic.
The acute, or monosyllabic, accent, which is
approximately identical with the musical accent in
English and German, is used in words which were
originally monosyllables.
NOTE. Many dissyllabic and polysyllabic words have this accent, since
they were formerly monosyllabic or have become dissyllabic or polysyllabic by
the addition of some ending, especially the definite postpositive article.

40. Foreign loan words often receive the acute

accent since this approximately resembles the mu-
sical accent employed by the mcfre important of the

European languages.
41. The grave, or dissyllabic, accent belongs in
most cases to words which were originally dissyllabic
or polysyllabic. This accent is a peculiar feature
of the Swedish (and Norwegian), and constitutes
perhaps the greatest difficulty which confronts the
foreigner wishing to acquire a correct pronuncia-
tion. Although no rules can teach it, the following
remarks may be useful :

42. We maycall the highest pitch to which the

voice rises in unaffected pronunciation the high
tone, and the lowest to which it falls the low tone.
The pitch which is usually employed lies midway
between these two and may be designated as the
normal tone. (Signs: I, low tone; n, normal
tone). A
word with acute accent has the normal
tone on the first syllable and the loiv tone on the
12 CAPITALIZATION.
n i n
following syllable or syllables. Ex.: get'-ter, get'-
i i

ter-na. The word is originally monosyllabic. This

intonation is practically the same as the English.
43. A word with grave accent, if dissyllabic, be-
gins with a tone a little below the normal, which we
may designate as n, the voice then glides down to
the low tone within the same syllable, producing a
slightly broken intonation, and rises to the normal
-nl n
tone on the second syllable. Ex. : ta-la, to speak.
44. A word of more than two syllables taking
the grave accent has the n tone on the first syllable,
the low tone on the second, and the normal tone on
-n I n
the third. Ex.: ta*la-re, speaker.
In the case of words which do not take the stress
accent on the first syllable, regard the stressed syl-
lable as the first in applying these rules. Ex. for- :

-nl n
ta'la.
REMABK. The accent mark used in this book merely indi-
cates the syllable to be stressed.

Capitalization.

45. Capitals are used less frequently in Swedish

than in English. Thus Swedish uses a small initial
letter in the following cases contrary to English
usage :

(a) In the names of the days of the week and

in the names of months: tisdag, Tuesday; april,
April.
(b) In the names of certain festivals, holidays,
and times of the year :
jul, Christmas pask, Easter
; ;

advent, Advent.
 PUNCTUATION. 13

(c) In adjectives and nouns derived from proper

names: svensk, Swedish; engelsk, English; sveden-
borgiansk, Swedenborgian darvinist, Darwinist;
;

stockholmare, inhabitant of Stockholm.

46. In books and headings of chapters

titles of

only the first word, as a rule, is capitalized.

47. In compound names like Forenta staterna,
United States, and Stilla havet, Pacific Ocean, only
the first word is capitalized; so also in expressions
like Karl den store, Charles the Great.
48. Personal titles are generally not capitalized
except in direct address: herr Svensson; professor
Bjorkman; hans majestdt, His Majesty; but, Bdsta
Herr Professor! Dear Professor: Ers Maje-
stat! Your Majesty (capitalization is optional).
49. The pronoun I (second person plural) is
capitalized; ni (second person singular) and its dif-
ferent cases are often capitalized in letters as a sign
of respect.

Punctuation.

50. The rules of punctuation are nearly the

same in both Englishand Swedish. But Swedish
punctuation is perhaps closer than ours, the comma
especially being used more freely. Note examples in
reading.
OBSERVE. The comma is generally used to set off
the different clauses of a sentence, whether inde-
pendent or dependent, provided they contain a sub-
ject and ,
predicate : ringen, som jag hade pa fing-
ret, har kommit bort, the ring that I had on my
14 SYLLABICATION.

finger has been lost; sag mig, vad du har gjort,

tell me what you have done; gossen laser, och flic-
kan syr, the boy reads and the girl sews.

Syllabication.

51. A consonant between two vowels, except x in

simple words of native origin, goes with the follow-
ing vowel a-ra, ce-der, Id-ra-re, re-gel, vax-a.
:

52. When two or more consonants occur between

two vowels, the last consonant usually goes with
the following vowel: fal-la, hop-pas, fladd-ra, myc-
ket.

But sch and sk when used as signs for the

53.
s.?-sound (sh) are not separated but added to the
following vowel mar-schera, mar-skalk; ng is added
:

to the preceding vowel unless n and g belong to

different words: hang-a, sjung-a.

54. Compound words are divided according to

their component parts: trdd-gdrd, garden; kyrk-
torn, steeple; hand-skrift, manuscript; bak-om,
behind.
 PART II.

THE PARTS OF SPEECH.

LESSON I.

Genders.

55. The Swedish language has four genders:

masculine, feminine, common, and neuter.
56. Masculine are generally names of living
beings, especially persons, of the male sex. They
require as pronoun of reference han.
57. Feminine are generally names of living
beings, especially persons, of the female sex. They
require as pronoun of reference hon.
58. Common gender comprises most names of
inanimate objects which are not neuter. The pro-
noun of reference is den.

59. Whether the name of an inanimate object

is common or neuter depends variously on termina-
tion or usage. Afew practical rules for determin-
ing neuter nouns will be given in the Appendix but
;

the best plan for the beginner is to associate the

indefinite article with every noun he learns.

60. The neuter gender requires det as pronoun

of reference.

Formerly the distinction between the mas-

61.
culine and feminine genders of inanimate objects
 16 ARTICLES.

was more strictly observed now it is almost entirely

;

discarded except in some dialects. The distinction

is avoided by employing den as pronoun of reference

for either. The tendency is to extend the province

of the common gender. Thus we find that names
of animals, even the higher, when no reference is
had to sex, are generally regarded as common and
referred to with the pronoun den. On the contrary,
nouns ending in -a with plural in -or are often fem-
inine even when they denote inanimate objects or
living beings of either sex: Var dr klockan? Where
is the clock? Hon hanger pa vdggen i sangkam-
maren. It hangs on the wall in the bedroom.
Vad blev det av den lilla vita duvan? What became
of the little white dove? Hon flog sin vag. It flew
away.
NOTE. Masculine, feminine, and common nouns will be referred to as gender
nouna. It is not deemed necessary to denote whether a noun is masculine,

feminine, or commor ; rules given in 56, 57, and 58 will enable the student to
make such a distinction whenever necessary.

THE ARTICLES.

62. There are three articles: the indefinite

article;the postpositive definite article, which is
appended to the noun, and the independent or pre-
positive definite article, which stands before the
noun and is used only when the noun is qualified by
an adjective.

THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

63. The indefinite article which is equivalent to

the English indefinite article a or an has two forms :

(1) En, which is used before all gender nouns:

 VERBS. 1?

en man, a man; en drottning, a queen; en dngare,

a steamer.
(2) Ett,which is used before all neuter nouns:
ett oga, an eye; ett barn, a child.

RULE OP SYNTAX.
64. The indefinite article corresponds in the
main with that of English, with some important
deviations. It must be omitted :

(a) Before a predicate noun denoting profession

or occupation when not qualified by an adjective.
As: min van dr larare, my friend is a teacher; but
min van dr en begavad larare, my friend is a talent-
ed teacher.
(b) Also in a number of phrases; as, jag har
lust att Idsa, I have a desire to read; jag fick svar,
I received an answer.

65. The verb att hava (short form, att ha), to

have.

PRESENT INDICATIVE.

Sg. jag har, I have PI. vi ha(va), we have

du har, thou hast (you / haven,han, you have
have) ni ha(va), you have
ni har, you have de ha(va), they have
han har, he has
NOTE. The shorter forms of the verb hava have practically supplanted the
longer forms, which are limited to the solemn style.

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
Sg. jag hade, I had, etc. PI. vi hade, we had, etc.
du hade / haden
ni hade ni hade
han hade de hade
18 VEBBS.
(

66. The verb att vara, to be.

PRESENT INDICATIVE.
Sg. jag dr, I am PL vi dro, we are
du ar, thou art (you / dren, you are
are) ni dro, you are
ni dr, you are de dro, they are
han dr, he is

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
Sg. jag var, I was, etc. PI. vi voro, we were, etc.
du var I voren
ni var ni voro
han var de voro
67. REMARKS ON THE VERBS.
(a) The singular du is used in very familiar
address, to relatives, to intimate friends, and to
children. The plural 7 is archaic except in elevated
style.
(b) Ni
used instead of du as the conventional
is

form of address. In the plural it has supplanted 1

both in familiar and polite address (see 142 and
note) .

The singular of the verb regularly takes the

(c)
place of the plural in conversation and has begun
to replace the latter in the written language: thus,
vi har, ni har, vi dr, etc., are permissible.
NOTE. In the beginning only the third person singular of the verbs will be
given in the vocabulary ; this form can be used in all persons and both numbers.

EXERCISE I.

N. B. The student should be required to reproduce the

contents of the exercises, wherever this is practicable, in
his own words.

A. 1. Karl ar en liten gosse, som (wlio) bor i en stor

stad. 2. Han gar i skolan och har en snail liirare. 3. TTaii
 EXERCISE. 19

far ofta en lang laxa, som ar mycket svar. 4. Karl iir

flitig
och kan sin (his) laxa. 5. "Kan du din (your) laxa i
1
dag?" fragar Karls larare. 6. Karl svarar: "Ja, jag kan
min (my) laxa."
a
The predicate precedes the subject if the clause is introduced by a modifier
of the verb, which may be either adverb, phrase, clause, or object.

Answer the following questions in Swedish: 1. Vem

B.
(who) ar Karl? 2. Var (where) bor han? 3. Vad (what)
har han? 4. Ar hans larare snail? 5. Vad ger han Karl
ofta? 6. Ar Karls laxa svar? 7. Vad fragar han Karl

ofta ? 8. Vad svarar Karl sin larare ?

WRITTEN EXERCISE.

N. B. The teacher should read the English sentences, give

the class a few seconds for mental translation, and then put
the question to the individual student. The students should
not be allowed to read the translation from their papers or
to translate from their books.

C. 1. Mary lives in a large and beautiful city. 2. She

is a good girl. She writes a long (langt) letter to a friend.

3.She has a mother, who is very good. 4. Her (hennes)

mother asks her (lienne), "What are 1 you writing?" 5.
Mary answers her (sin) mother, "I am writing
1
a long
letter to a friend who lives in Stockholm."
1
Swedish has no
progressive nor emphatic verb-forms. Use the simple
present. Do and did are not translated in interrogative and negative expres-
sions. Use the simple present or imperfect.

VOCABULARY.
N. B. 1. The indefinite article before nouns shows whether
they are gender nouns or neuter nouns.
2. Only the indefinite gender form of the adjective is given
in the first few lessons.

bor, lives din, thy, your

ett brev, a letter en, a, one, (gender form)
t <lag, to-day ett, a, an (neuter)
20 DEFINITE ARTICLES.

en flicka, a girl en Idxa, a lesson

flitig, diligent min, my
frdgar, asks en moder (mor), a mother
far, gets, receives mycket, much, very (much)
ger, gives och, and
en gosse, a boy ofto, often
gdr, goes sin, his,her (reflexive)
han, he en skola, a school
hans, his i skolan, to (at) school

har, has skriver, writes

/ion, she snail, good, kind
henne, her (objective) som, who, which, that
hennes, her (possessive) en stad, a city
i, in stor, large, great
;o, yes svarar, answers
Jean, can; know svdr, hard, difficult
Ziifen, little, small vacker, beautiful
Idng, long en van, a friend
en Idrare, a teacher
IDIOMS: 1. 0d i skolan, to attend school.
2. kunna (present kan) sin Idxa, to know one's lesson.

LESSON II.

The Definite Articles.

There are two definite

68. articles, the post-
positive and the prepositive.
THE POSTPOSITIVE ARTICLE.
69. The postpositive article consists of a letter
or syllable suffixed to the noun. This article is
always used when the noun is definite in sense.
It has the following forms :

a. For gender nouns:

Singular: -en, or -n.
Plural: -na (rarely -ne).
 DEFINITE ARTICLES. 21

b. For neuter nouns:

Singular :
-et, or -t.

Plural: -na, -a, or -en.

70. The postpositive article with gender nouns.

IN THE SINGULAR.
1. -en is used when the noun ends in a consonant.
Ex. skald-en, the poet
:
; brud-en, the bride sol-en, ;

the sun.
EXCEPTIONS. (1) Gender nouns ending in unaccented el, -er,
or -or and the words konsul, consul, and purpur, purple, take
-n as postpositive article.

Ex.: fdgel-n, the bird; seger-n, the victory; doktor-n, the

doctor; konsul-n, the consul.
(2) Other words ending in -I, or -r take either -en or -n as
postpositive article.
Ex.: fjaril-en or fjaril-n, the butterfly; sommar-en or
sommar-n, the summer.

2. -n is used when the noun ends in a vowel.

Ex. gosse-n, the boy flicka-n, the girl
:
; ; blomma-n,
the flower by-n, the village.
;

EXCEPTIONS. Gender nouns ending in accented -e or -i take

either -en or -n as postpositive article.
Ex.: arme-en orarmen, the army; symmetri-en or symmetri-n,
the symmetry.
N. B. Of gender nouns ending in unaccented -en only the
following four take the postpositive article. In so doing they
drop the e of the ending: Gotten, bottom, bottn-en, the bottom;
socken, parish, sockn-en, the parish; sdgen, legend, sagn-en,
the legend; ofcen, desert, okn-en, the desert.

IN THE PLURAL.
-na (rarely -ne) is used as postpositive article
with gender nouns in the plural.
Ex. skalder-na, the poets brudar-na, the brides
:
; ;
22 DEFINITE ARTICLES.

faglar-na, the birds; flickor-na, the girls; byar-na,

the villages oknar-na, the deserts.
;

EXCEPTIONS, mann-en, the men; gass-en, the geese; loss-en,

the lice; moss-en, the mice.

71. The postpositive article with neuter nouns.

IN THE SINGULAR.
1. -et is used when the noun ends in a consonant
or in an accented vowel.
Ex. :
namn-et, the name ; bo-et, the nest ; parti-et,
the party.
2. - is used when the noun ends in an unaccented
vowel.
Ex.: hjarta-t, the heart; eko-t, the echo.
N. B. Neuter nouns ending in unaccented -el, -en, or -er
drop the e of the ending on taking the postpositive article.
Ex.: segel, sail, segl-et, the sail; vapen, weapon, vapn-et, the
weapon; dunder, thunder, dundr-et, the thunder.
EXCEPTIONS: siden-et, the silk; papper-et, the paper.

IN THE PLURAL.
-na is used as postpositive article in the plural
1.

with neuter nouns of the Third Declension.

Ex.: bryggerier-na, the breweries; kafeer-na, the
cafes.
2. -a is used as postpositive article in the plural
with neuter nouns of the Fourth Declension.
Ex. stdllen-a, the places bon-a, the nests.
:
;

3. -en is used as postpositive article in the plural

with neuter nouns of the Fifth Declension.
Ex. namn-en, the names segl-en, the sails.
:
;

72. Certain nouns do not take the postpositive

article.
1. Abstract nouns ending in -an. Ex. : beund-
ran, admiration.
 EXERCISE. 23

2. Most gender nouns ending

in unaccented -en
(see 70, N. B.). Ex.: froken, miss, young lady;
examen, examination.
3. Foreign nouns ending in -um and -us. Ex.:
datum, date genus, gender.;

But those ending in -eum or -ium drop -um and

add -et. Ex. museum, museum, muse-et, the muse-
:

um privilegium, privilege, privilegi-et, the privilege,

;

73. THE PREPOSITIVE ARTICLE.

SINGULAR PLURAL
Gender Nouns Neuter All Genders
den det de
used together with the postpositive article
It is
when the noun is modified by an adjective. Ex. :

den varma solen, the warm sun. For further dis-

cussion see 126.
RULE OF SYNTAX.
74. Contrary to English usage the definite ar-
ticle in Swedish is used with generic and abstract
nouns, as, guldet, gold; lyckan, happiness; livet dr
kort, men konsten dr Idng, life is short but art is
long.
EXERCISE II.

A. Supply the postpositive article in the following:

1. Ser ni hus , ligger som
dar pa kulle ? 2. Det till-

hor dam ,
som kommer dar. 3. Hon ar mycket rik, sager
man. Tradgard
-i. som ligger bakom hus ,
ar vacker, ,

och frukt , som viixer i den (it), ar fiirtrafflig. 5. Hon

iigcr ocksa ett stort (neut.) 1ms i stad och har pengar i
bank . (5. Hon liar en son, som ar atta ar gammal och
gar i skola . 7. Hans larare sager, att gosse ar snail
och flitig. 8. Nu ar han mycket sjuk, och doktor beso-
ker lionom.
 24 EXERCISE.

B. Answer the following questions in Swedish : 1. Vad

ligger pa kullen? 2. Kan ni se det? 3. Vem tillhbr det?
4. Ax hon fattig eller rik? 5. Vad ligger bakom huset?

6. Vad vaxer i den? 7. Vad ar er (your) tanke (idea) om

frukten? 8. Ager damen nagot mer (anything else)?
9. Beratta vad ni vet om hennes son (Tell what you know
about her son).

C. Translate : 1. Do you know the man who owns the

house on the hill? No, 2. I do not (det gor jag icJce),
but my father knows him. 3. He always salutes me when
I meet him in the street.
1
4. He is a very kind man, and
rich, they say (A, 3). 5. His wife is dead and he has a
little boy, six years
old, who
school attends
(A, 6).
6. Nowhe cannot (Jean haji inte) attend (go) for he ig
sick and is at home. 7. The doctor visits him every day.
*?& gatan.

VOCABULARY.
alltid, always honom, him
ftofcom, behind ett hus,house
en tank, bank en hustru, wife
besoker, visits hdl'sar pd, 1 greets
en dag, day kommer, comes
en dam, lady en kulle, hill
den (pronoun), it kdnner, knows
det (pronoun) it ligger, lies
en doktor, doctor man (indef. pronoun), one,
ddr, there they, people
do'd,dead en man, man
en fader, father moter, meets
frukt (collective), fruit ni, you (formal)
fdrtraff'Ug, excellent nu, now
gammal, old nar, when
en gata, street ocksa, also
hemma, at home pd, on, upon
(with the main stress on pa) signifies to pay a visit: ft halsudt
*halsar pd'
pd' hot honom, we called at his home.
 DECLENSION. 25

pengar (plur.), money ty (conj.), for

rik, rich en tradgdrd, garden
ser, sees varje, each, every
sager, says vaxer, grows
till'hdr (35), belongs to tiger, owns

LESSON III.

Inflection of Nouns.

75. CASE. Nouns are changed for case only in

the genitive, which is formed by adding s to the
nominative of the indefinite or the definite form :

Ex.: En gosses bok, a boy's book; gossens bok

dr hdr, the boy's book is here; flickornas blommor
dro vackra, the girls' flowers are beautiful.
NOTE. For exceptions see 130, a, b, d.

76. NUMBER. There are five declensions, accord-

ing to the manner of forming the nominative plural
of the indefinite form. These are :

First Declension. Plural ending -or.

Second Declension. Plural ending -ar.
Third Declension. Plural ending -er.
Fourth Declension. Plural ending -n.
Fifth Declension. Without plural ending.
In addition there are some irregular nouns which
cannot be classified.

FIRST DECLENSION.
77. This declension forms its plural by dropping
the ending -a of the nominative singular and adding
-or. The postpositive article is -n in the singular
and -no, in the plural.
Swedish Grammar 3
26 DECLENSION.

78. The First Declension comprises all gender

nouns ending in -a; also the nouns ros, rose; vdg,
wave; toff el, slipper; dder, vein; and a few others.
Exceptions: histo'ria {-er), story; kolle'ga (-er), colleague; lusta (-ar), desire.

79. Example of the First Declension: en flicka,

a girl.
INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sing. Plur. Sing. Plur.
Nom. en flicka, flick-or flicka-n, flick-or-na
Gen. en flicka-s, flick-or-s flicka-n-s, flick-or-na-s
REMABK. As the genitive formed regularly by the addi-
is
tion of -s (without the apostrophe), the nominative form only
will be given hereafter.

SECOND DECLENSION.
80. This declension is characterized by the plural
ending -ar. The
postpositive definite article is -en
or -n in the singular (72) -na in the plural. ,

The Second Declension comprises:

81.
(a) Most monosyllabic gender nouns ending in a
consonant and some ending in a vowel.
(b) Gender nouns ending in -dom, -il, -ing, -ling,
-ning, -ung, and unaccented -e, -el, -en, -er.
NOTE 1. Unaccented e in the endings -e, -el, -en, -er is dropped when the
final ending is added.
2. Unaccented a in the ending -ar, and o and u in the words afton, evening ;

djavitl, devil ; morgon, morning, are dropped before the plural ending.

82. Examples of the Second Declension:

en fdgel, a bird; en gosse, a boy; en afton, an
evening.
INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sg. en fdgel fdgel-n (73,1)
PI. fagl-ar (81,1) fdgl-ar-na
 EXERCISE. 27

Sg. en gosse gosse-n (72)

PI. goss-ar (81,1) goss-ar-na(-ne) (73,5)
Sg. en a/ow afton-en
PI. aftn-ar (81, b, 2) aftn-ar-na

EXERCISE III.

4. Supply the postpositive def. article where there is

one dash; the proper plural ending and the postpositive
article where there are two dashes :

1. Herr Brown ar ute och gar 1 . 2. Vadr mycket ar

vackert; sol skiner och luft ar varm. 3. Det ar mycket

folk pa gat , ty det ar helgdag, och man arbetar ej.
4. Nar han blir trott, satter
2
han sig pa en av soff i

parken. 5. Han ser pa goss

- och flick ,
som leka 3

dar, och hb'r pa fagl ,

som sjunga. 6. Sedan gar 2 han
tillen restaurang, ty han ar hungrig. 7. Han satter sig
vid ett bord, ser pa matsedel kallar pa vaktmastar och ,

bestaller. 8. Ibland aro bans tvenne dbttrar med honom.

*Xr ute och gar, is out walking, takes a walk. J See note 1, Exercise I. A.
3
In conversation the singular is used with a plural subject.

B. Answer in Swedish Yad

: heter (is the name of) er
van? 2. Yad gb'r herr Brown? 3. Hurudant ar vadret?
4. Ar herr Brown ensam (alone) ute? 5. Varfor (why) ar
det mycket folk ute och gar? 6. Varfor arbetar man icke?
7. Vad gor herr Brown, nar han blir trott? han 8. Vad ser

pa? 9. Vad hor han pa? 10. Vart gar han, nar han ar
hungrig? 11. Vem kallar han pa? ,
C. 1. I have a friend whose name
(som heter) Brown. is

2. He comes often to me and

I will take a walk 1
asks me if

with him. 3. When the weather is fine (vackert} I answer

2

yes, for he is a kind and interesting man and his company

is always agreeable (angenamt). 4. Sometimes when there
28 VOCABULARY.

arcmany people in the

3
streets we go 2 to a park and sit

down (sdtta oss) on one of the seats. 5. He often tells of

his (sina) travels in different (olika) parts of the world.
6. When we are hungry (kungriga) we eat together in (pa)
a restaurant.
1
fill gd ut och gd.
2
See note 1, Ex. I, A. 3 There is and there are are trans-
lated by det ar, the verb being singular in either case.

VOCABULARY.

arbetar, works med, with (prep.); along

l)erdt'tar (36, a), tells, relates (adv.)
bestal'ler (36, a), orders om, about (prep.) if (conj.) ;

ett bord, table en park, park

en del, -ar, part, share en restaurang' restaurant
,

en dotter, dottrar, daughter en resa, -or, journey

ei, not sedan, thereupon (adv.), after
en flicka, -or, girl (conj.)
folk (collective), people sig (reflexive pronoun), himself
ett folk, a people herself, itself, themselves
en fdgel, fdglar, bird sjunger, sings
en gosse, -ar, boy skiner, shines
en helgdag, -ar, holiday en soffa, -or, sofa, seat, bench
herr, -ar, Mister sdtter, seats, sets
hungrig, hungry ett sdllskap, company
ibland' (adv.), sometimes tillsammans, together
intressant', interesting tro'tt, tired
kallar pd, calls tvenne, two
leker, plays en vakt'mdstare, waiter
luft, air varm, warm
en matsedel (35, 37), -sedlar, vid, at, by
bill of fare (ett) vdder, weather
en vdrld (mute 1), -ar, world

IDIOMS: 1. att gd ut och gd, to take a walk.

2. att sdtta sig, to sit down.
3. Jag Tieter Karl, my name is Carl.
 DECLENSION. 29

LESSON IV.

Inflection of Nouns (Continued).

THIRD DECLENSION.
83.The nouns of this declension take -er in the
plural. The postpositive article is -en or -n for gen-
der nouns and -et or -t for neuter nouns in the
singular; -na for either in the plural.
NOTE. Some nouns ending in unaccented -e, and a few others, take -r in the
plural.

84. This declension contains:

(a) A large number of monosyllabic gender
nouns, especially derivatives ending in -d, -st, -t.
(b) Gender nouns of more than one syllable end-
ing in -ad, -else, -het, -nad, -ndr, -skap.
(c) Most gender nouns of foreign origin.
(d) A
few neuter monosyllables.
(e) Neuter nouns of more than one syllable end-
ing in -eri', -e'um, -e, -i, -ium, -on, -um, almost ex-
clusively of foreign origin.
85. Examples of gender nouns of the Third
Declension: en bild, a picture; en son, a son; en bok,
a book; en byggnad, a building; en hdndelse, an
event; en neger, a negro; en nota'rie, a notary; en
doktor, a doctor en nation, a nation.
;

INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sg. en bild bild-en
PI. bild-er bild-er-na
Sg. en son son-en
PI. son-er son-er-na
Sg. en bok bok-en
PI. bock-er bock-er-na
30 DECLENSION.

Sg. en byggnad byggnad-en

PL byggnad-er byggnad-er-na
Sg. en kandelse hdndelse-n
PL hdndelse-r hdndelse-r-na
Sg. en neger neger-n
PL negr-er negr-er-na
Sg. en nota'rie notarie-n
PL notarie-r notarie-r-na
Sg. en doktor doktor-n
PL doktor'-er doktor' -er-na
Sg. en nation' nation-en
PL nation-er nation-er-na
NOTE. 1. (a) A few monosyllables change the root vowel (14). In addition
to those given in the paradigms we may note: and, duck; hand, hand; natt,
night ; rand, brim, stripe ; strand, shore ; stdng, pole.
(b) In bok, book fot, foot
; rot, root, there is both a change of root vowel
;

and a doubling of the final consonant.

Give the plural of the words enumerated above (according to 14).
(c) In not, nut; get, goat, and a few others the final consonant is doubled.
2. Some monosyllables take the grave accent in the plural while others take
the acute. Ex. (grave accent)
son, soner; bild, bilder; (acute accent) : strand,
:

stranderj stad, stader.

3. Loan words in -or which in the singular have the accent on the syllable
preceding -or shift the accent to the syllable containing -or in the plural: pro-
fes'sor, professo'rer. The def. art. is -n. (73, 1).
4. Gender nouns in unaccented -el and -er drop the e of the ending before
the plural ending: fabel, fabler; fiber, fibre, fibrer.
fable,
5. The ending -us in words of Latin origin is dropped before the plural
ending: dekanus, dean, dekan-er.

Examples of neuter nouns of the Third De-

86.
clension: ett tryckeri', a printing office; ett mu-

se'um, a museum.
INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sg. ett tryckeri' tryckeri-et
PL tryckeri-er tryckeri-er-na
muse'um
Sg. ett muse-et
PL muse-er muse-er-na
NOTE. Foreign words ending in -eum and -turn drp the ending -urn upon
taking the definite article and the plural ending.
 EXEECISE. 31

EXERCISE IV.

A. 1. Decline in the indefinite and definite form, nomi-

native and genitive cases, singular and plural: (like en

doktor) en professor, en pastor, a pastor; en rektor, a col-

lege president. 2. (Like en stad) en and, a duck; en brand,

a firebrand (also conflagration, sing, only) ; en strand, a

shore. 3. (Like en hdndelse) en fo'reteelse, a phenomenon;
en ok' tie, a share. 5. (Like en neger) en muskel, a muscle.
6. (Like ett museum] ett semina'rium, a seminary; (like

ett tryckeri) ett bryggen, a brewery; ett kafe, a cafe.

B. Supply (at the missing ending, the definite post-

)

positive article, or ending of the plural or both

the

(at ); also (at...) the indefinite article en, ett:

1. Ar icke detta (this) . . . vackert landskap? 2.Har kan
man mycket pa en gang.
se Man ser ... flod, som flyter
genom vackra ang , tva stad med gat , park , hus och
kyrk . 3. Omkring stad ligga akr , skog , berg
och dal . Punkt ,
som man ser langt borta pa
slatt ,
aro gard , pa vilka bond bo. 4. Dessa

(these) arbeta hela (the whole) dag pa sina (their) fait

och i sina tradgard 5. Pa hb'jd .
-
pa flod (gen-
itive, def.) vanstra strand ligga tva ruin 6. De aro myc- .

ket intressanta.

C. Answer in Swedish: 1. Hurudant (how) ar land-

skapet? 2. Vad flyter floden igenom (through) ? 3. Hu-

ru manga stader kan ni se? 4. Vad ser ni i dessa (these)
stader? 5. Vad aro punkterna langt borta? 6. Vad gora
bonderna hela dagen? 7. Vad ser ni pa hojderna pa flo-

dens vanstra strand?

D. Translate: 1. From this (denna) hill you can (kan

see a very beautiful 2. On
man) landscape. (vackert)
both sides there (omit) are heights and in the background
32 VOCABULARY.

large (stora) forests. 3. Two rivers flow through the val-

ley and by these (dessa) rivers lie cities. 4. The city to

the left has two museums and a famous (beromt) picture

gallery. 5. I like to see paintings of famous (beromda)

artists. 6. If you wish (vill), we shall visit (besoka vi)
the museum to-morrow. 7. Do you see the smokestacks on
the left side of the river ? 8. They belong to a large factory
where they (man) manufacture steam engines. 9. These
(dessa) steam engines are exported (translate: one ex-
ports) to foreign countries.
VOCABULARY.
av, of, by, from, off en kyrka, -or, church
en bakgrund, background
-er, ett land, lander, country
ett berg, mountain ett landskap, landscape
bor (pi. bo), lives imorgon, to-morrow
borta, away en punkt, -er, point, dot
en bonde, bonder, peasant, en ruin, -er, ruin
farmer en skog, -ar, forest
en by, -ar, village en sliitt, -er, plain
en dag, -ar, day en skorsten, -ar, chimney,
en dal, -ar, valley smokestack
exporte'rar, exports en strand, strdnder, bank,
en fabriJc', -er, factory riverside
en flod, -er, river en tavla, -or, painting, picture
fiyter, flows ett tavelgalleri, -er, picture
frdmmande, foreign gallery
frdn, from tillverkar, manufactures
ett fait, a field tvd, two
genom (igenom) through tycker om'. likes
en gang, one time, once vdnster, left
en gdrd, -ar, yard, farmhouse till vdnster, to the left

hdr, here en dker, dkrar, field

en hojd, -er, height, hill en dngmaskin, -er, steam engine
en konstndr, -er, artist en dng, -ar, meadow
IDIOMS: 1. Jag tycker om att Idsa, I like to read.
2. att se pa, to look at.
3. pd en gdng, at once.
4. i dag, i gar, to-day, yesterday.
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 33

LESSON V.

The Verb.
87. There are four conjugations in Swedish.

88. Verbs belonging to the First, Second, and

Third Conjugations (also called weak verbs) form
their imperfect by adding an ending to the un-
changed root.
89. Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation (also called
strong verbs) form their imperfect by changing
the vowel of the root, without any added ending.
REMARK. A certain number of verbs vacillating between
different conjugations are called irregular verbs.

THE FIRST CONJUGATION.

90. This conjugation ha's the following endings:
-a in the infinitive.
-ar in the singular of the present indicative.
-en in the archaic second person plur. pres. ind.
-a elsewhere in the plur. pres. ind.
-ade in both numbers of the imperf. ind.
-aden in the archaic second pers. plur.
-ande in the pres. participle.
-at in the supine.
-ad in the gender form of the past participle.
-at in the neuter form of the past participle.
91. The supine has been evolved from
SUPINE.
the neuter form of the past participle and is used
together with the auxiliary verb hava to form the
compound perfect tenses.
92. THE PAST PARTICIPLE is a verbal adjective;
it is used as an adjective and also with the auxiliary
34 FIRST CONJUGATION.

verbs bliva and varda, to become, to form the com-

pound passive of transitive verbs (see 188).

93. (a) The simple tense in Swedish expresses

also the progressive and emphatic forms of English ;

thus, jag kallar=I call, am calling, do call; jag kal-

lade=I called, was calling, did call.

(b) Likewise the interrogative and negative uses

of do, do you call ? I do not call, etc., are expressed
in the Swedish by the simple form: as, kallar ni?
jag kallar inte.

94. The verb att kalla, to call.

(a) PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE

Sg. jag] Sg. jag]
du I, du I, ,

ni
kallar
ni
k aUade
\
\
han\ hanj
PL vi kalla PL vi kallade
I kallen I kalladen
ni kalla ni kallade
de kalla de kallade

(b) The perfect indicative is formed by combining

the supine with the present indicative of hava, to
have.
The pluperfect indicative is formed by combining
the supine with the imperfect of hava.

Examples :

PERFECT INDICATIVE PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE

Sg. jag ]
jag ]
du I dit I

.-
tbb
rhar kallat \hade kallat
ft/(/

han} han}
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 35

PI. vi ha kallat 1
vi hade kallat
I han 2 kallat I haden kallat
ni ha kallat ni hade kallat
de ha kallat de hade kallat
J 2
Also hava. Also haven.
\

95. To this conjugation belong:

(a) Almost all weak verbs the stem of which ends

in a consonant and contains one of the hard vowels
a, o, u, a; as skala, to peel; gnola, to hum; skura,
to scrub ; mala, to paint.
Almost all verbs derived from other words
(b)
by means of a consonantal ending as, svartna (from ;

svart) to grow black vidga (from vid) to widen

, ; , ;

gronska (from gron) to grow green. ,

(c) All verbs ending in -e'ra; as, rege'ra, to rule ;

korrige'ra, to correct.

(d) All verbs having a vowel before the infinitive

ending -a; as, skria, to shout; fria, to woo; roa, to
amuse.

96. The present perfect and pluperfect of the

verbs hava (ha), to have; vara, to be.

PRESENT PERFECT
Sg.
du L , ,. du I, .,

m mar haft n ^ mar vant

-

han] han}
PI. vi ha haft ha varit
vi
I han haft I han varit
ni ha haft ni ha varit
de ha haft de ha
36 EXERCISE.

PLUPERFECT
Sg. jag 1 jag 1

du [, j , .. du [, , ..

nj made haft .
n^ made varit

han} han]
PI. vi hade haft vi hade varit
I haden haft I haden varit
ni hade haft ni hade varit
de hade haft de hade varit
EXERCISE V.
A. Supply the proper endings of the verbs as well as
the postpositive definite article and plural ending.

1. I gar hals hos min van Lindgren.

(impf.) jag pa
1

2. Jag knack (impf.) flera (several) ganger pa dorr ,

innan han oppn (impf.) den. 3. Han ursakt (impf.)

sig med att han hade vil (supine) pa soff och in-
somn (supine). 4. Vi samtal (impf.) ett par timm
(plur.) om vara plan (plur.) for framtid , och jag
frag (impf.), om han amn foretaga den resa utrikes,
som han sa lange hade planer (supine). 5. "Ja, om
2
(in} ar", ett han, svar "jag spar (pres.) pengar
mi, ty en resa utrikes kost (pres.) mycket. 6. "Vart
2
amnar du att resa?" frag jag. "Till Frankrike och
2
Tyskland", svar han.
b'nsk 7. "Jag har lange
(supine)
att tillbringa ett dessa (these} land;
par ar for att (in
i

order to} studera tyska och franska." 8. Nar jag var hos
2
honom, borja det att regna, sa att (so that} han maste
(had to} lana mig ett paraply.
1 2
Stress on pa. Notice the inverted order.

B. 1. Vad gjorde (did} ni nyligen (recently} ? 2. Var

han hemma?
Oppnade han genast? 4. Varfor drojde
3.

det sa lange (why did it take sucJi a long time}, innan

han oppnade dorren? 5. Vad samtalade ni om? 6. Nar
 VOCABULARY. 37

amnade ban foretaga sin resa utrikes? 7. Vad gjorde han

for att kimna (be able) resa om ett ar? 8. Hur lang tid
amnade han tillbringa i Frankrike och Tyskland ? 9. Vad
amnade han gora dar?
1
C. Yesterday I telephoned to my friend Lindgren
1.

and asked him if he intended to stay at home all evening

(liela kvdllen}. 2. He answered that he had intended to

attend (att gd pa] a concert, but had changed his mind 2 .

3. "Why?" I asked
1
"I am not quite well," he answered 1
. .

1
4.Yesterday somebody (ndgon) knocked at the door. 5. I
hurried to the door and opened it. 6. It was my cousin

Carl, whom his 3 mother had sent to me with flowers,

for it was my birthday. 7. "It must (matte) be rain-

ing (93, a), Carl," I said

1
"You are wet." 8. "Yes,"
.

he answered , "it began to rain when I was halfway."

1

9. Carl stayed with (hos) me a couple of hours, and when

he went (fjick) home, I lent him my umbrella. 10. Carl is

1

3
a very good and industrious boy and his father intends
to send him to Germany to (for att) study German and
music.
J
Invert. "hade dndrat sig.
3
hans, not sin; sin is used when the subject of
the clause is the possessor: han skickade sin son (174).

VOCABULARY.

N. B. Weak verbs are designated by the number of the

conjugation to which they belong, the infinitive only of the
verb being given.

att (conj. and sign of the in- fo'retaga (sing, foretager), to

finitive), that, to undertake
borja, I, to begin en fodelsedag, -ar, birthday
en dorr, -ar, door hem (adv.), home
en framtid, future halvvags, halfway
fransk, French hos (prep.), at the house of,

f ran ska, French (lartguage) with, at

38 SECOND CONJUGATION.

knacka, I, to knock skynda, I, to hurry

en konsert', -er, concert spara, I, to save
kosta, I, to cost stude'ra, I, to study
en kusin', -er, cousin telefone'ra, I, to telephone

en kvdll, -ar, evening till'bringa, I, (also irr., 169), to

Una, I, to lend; to borrow spend, pass
lange (adv.), long en timme, -ar, hour
(en) musik', music tysk, German
ett par, couple tyska, German (language)
ett par timmar, a couple of ut'rikes,abroad (also used as
hours an indeclinable adjective)
ett paraply', umbrella vart, whither
en plan, -er, plan Vila, I, to rest

plane'ra, I, to plan vat, wet

regna (rengna), to rain timna, I, to intend
resa, II (sg., reser), to travel andra, I, to change
sam'fala, I, to converse onska, I, to wish
skicTca. I, to send oppna, I, to open

IDIOMS.
1. ett par,a couple of; ett par timmar, a couple of hours.
2. om ett ar, om en vecka, in a year, in a week; om mdndag,
next Monday.
3. att ma ~bra, to be well.

LESSON VI.

The Verb (Continued).

THE SECOND CONJUGATION.

97. The verbs belonging to this conjugation are
of two classes.

98. Class 7. To this class belong all verbs of

this conjugation the stem of which ends in -k, -p,
-s, and the verbs begynna, to begin; bryna, to
-t,

whet; krona, to crown; rona, to experience; synas,

to seem.
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 39

99. These verbs take the following endings:

-a in the infinitive.
-er in the singular of the present indicative.
-a in the plural of the present indicative.
-te in the imperfect indicative, both numbers.
-ande in the present participle.
-t in the supine.

-t in the gender and neuter forms of the past

participle.
NOTE. The archaic second plural will hereafter for the sake of convenience
be disregarded in the lists of verbal endings.

100. Class II. To this class belong all other

verbs of the Second Conjugation.

101. These verbs take :

-de in the imperfect indicative, both numbers.

-d in the gender form of the past participle. The
other endings are identical with those of Class I.

102. Examples:
att resa, to travel ; att bdja, to bend.

PRESENT INDICATIVE
Sg. jag] jag]
du du
reser n
n
han} han\
PI. vi resa vi bdja
I resen I bdjen
ni resa ni bdja
de resa de bdja
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE
Sg. jag'} jag]
du du (
reste
ni \
ni
han} han
40 ORDER OF WORDS.

PI. vi reste vi bojde

I resten I bo j den
ni reste ni bojde
de reste de bojde
PERFECT INDICATIVE
jag har rest, etc. jag har bojt, etc.

PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE
jag hade rest, etc. jag hade bojt, etc.

103. To the Second Conjugation belong most

verbs having a soft vowel (e, i, y, a, 6) in the
stem and derived from other words by a change
from hard to soft vowel: lysa (from ljus, light),
to light; fylla (from (from
full, full), to fill; skylla
skuld, guilt), to accuse; krona (from krona, crown),
to crown.
NOTE. 1. If the stem of a verb of this class ends in -r no ending- is added in
the present indicative, singular thus, jag hor, I hear, instead of jag horer; jag
;

gor, instead of jag gorer. Similarly three verbs ending in -I take no ending.
These are tola, endure mala, to grind gala, to crow.
; ;

2. the stem of a verb of this conjugation ends in -nd or -t preceded by a

If

'consonant, the d and the t are dropped before a d and a t of the ending; thus,
sanda, to send, has the imperfect sande, not sdndde; the past participle tand,
not sandd, and, according to the new orthography, the supine sant, not sdndt.
Gifta sig, to get married, has the imperfect ffifte, not giftte; the supine gift,
not giftt; and the past participle gift, not giftt.
3. Verbs in double m or n dron one of these consonants before -de, -d, -le,
and -t, but retain the short sound of the vowel: begynna, to begin, bcgiinte ;
glomma, to forget, gliimde, glijmt.

104.ORDER OF WORDS. Normal and Inverted.

1. Normal order: First the subject with its mod-
ifiers. Second, the verb. Third, the object and
other adjuncts of the verb.
Inverted order: The subject follows the verb.
2.
The inverted order
is required:

(a) In direct questions: Laste han boken i gar?

Did he read the book yesterday?
 EXERCISE. 41

(b) When the object or one of the other adjuncts

of the verb, adverb, phrase or clause, precedes the
verb: i gar Idste han boken, yesterday he read the
book da han kom, talade han
; till mig, when he came
he spoke to me.
OBSERVE. Inversion occasioned by preceding modifiers of
the verb occurs only in principal clauses and in dependent
clauses introduced by att.

(c) In the imperative, if the pronoun is expressed :

Kom du hit bara, (you) just come here.

EXERCISE VI.
A. Supply the proper endings of the verbs; the post-
positive definite articleand the plural endings, or both.
1. Ar herr Quist hemma i dag? Nej, han bar res till

stad for att traffa nagra (some) van 2. Sa trakigt .

(neuter), jag bar sok honom tva gang ,

men bar ej
traff honom annu. 3.Ar det nagot (anything) viktigt?
Ja, jag hb'r for en vecka sedan (a week ago), att ban
amn kopa vagn och nagra par hast Jag tank tala .

med honom om det. 4. Nu behb'v han ej nagra (any),

tyhan bar salt (sold) fabrik , som han ag . 5. Vart
ha goss gatt (gone) ? De ha gatttill muse for att
se pa (look at) de nya (plur.) tavl (del p).), som
man beromm sa mycket. 6. Tror 1 (believe) du, att de
komma hem till middag ? Det 2 tror jag, ty de bruka ej
forsumma nagot (any) mal. 7. Har ni varit i
kyrk i

dag? Nej, vadr var sa vackert, att jag promener ut

pa landet. 8. Jag vandr genom skog , plock blomm

och horde pa fagl (def. gen. plur.) sang. 9. Det var
en harlig predikan, tyck jag. 10. Ni borde (ought) ha
3
varit i kyrkan i dag, ty pastor Strom holl (preached) en
ypperlig predikan.
2
'Observe the Swedish way of 'asking- a question (93, b). Note position of
3
del and inverted order. Impf. of halla, to hold.
Swedish Grammar 4
42 VOCABULARY.

B. Answer in Swedish and supply verbal endings.

1. Vem har ni besok i
dag? 2. Varfor var han ej
hemma? 3. Vad 6'nsk ni tala med honom om? 4. Nar
amna han kopa hastar och vagnar ? 5. Varfor kb'p han
dem ej nu ? 6. Vad har han gjort med fabrikerna, som han
a'gde? 7. Aro Karl och Gustav hemma ? 8. Varfor tror ni,
att de komma hem till middagen? 9. Vem predik i

kyrkan i
dag ? 10. Var det mycket folk i
kyrkan ?

C. 1. I tried to see you yesterday, but you were not at

home. 2. In the afternoon I telephoned twice, but no one
(ingen) answered. 3. Where were you the whole day?

4.In the forenoon I visited the museum in order (A, 5)

to look at the new
which have been praised 1 so
pictures,
highly. 5. In the afternoon I took a walk (A, 7) into the
country. 6. On the way out I met Mr. Quist. He told
me that he had sold his (sina) two factories. 7. I thought
that he owned only one. 8. You ought to have been (A, 10)
in church to-day. Pastor Strom preached (lioll) an ex-
sermon and the church was crowded. 9. I saw (sag)
cellent
Mr. Blomberg there, who seldom attends church 2 10. Mrs. .

Blomberg, on the contrary (ddremot), attends very often.

1
Use man with the active. 2
gar i kyrkan.

VOCABULARY.
N. B. The two subdivisions of the Second Conjugation will
be designated by a and b.
behova, lib, to need pa for'middagen, in the fore-
beromma, lib, to praise noon
bruJca, I, to use forsumma, I, neglect, miss
en ef'termiddag, -ar, afternoon forsoka, I la, to try
pd ef'termiddagen, in the af- magnificent
Jidrlig, glorious,
ternoon en hast, horse
-ar,

full'paclcad, crowded hora, lib, to hear

en for'middag, -ar, forenoon ho'ra pd, to listen to
 INFLECTION OF NOUNS 4,>

kopa, Ha, buy

to en sdng, -er, song
(ut) pa landet, to (into) the siillan, seldom
country soka, Ha, to seek, look for
men, but trdffa, I, to meet, see, speak to
en middag, -ar, noon; dinner trdkig, tedious, sad, unpleasant
pd middagen, at noon sd trdkigt, too bad
mycket, highly tror, believes
ett mdl, meal; goal tvd ganger, twice
mota, Ha, meet tycka, Ha, to think
om'tala, I, tell, relate jag tycker, it seems to me
plocka, I, to pick tdnka, Ha, to think
predi'ka, I, to preach vagn, -ar, wagon, carriage
en predi'kan, sermon vandra, I, to wander, stroll
promene'ra, I, to take a walk viktig, weighty, important
ringa pd' hos, lib, to ring up en vdg, -ar, road, way
sedan (adv., prep, and conj.), ypperlig, excellent
since tiga, lib, to own
for... sedan, ago iinnu, yet
IDIOMS.
1. for tvd ar sedan, two years ago; for Idnge sedan, long ago.
2. Jag ser pd, hor pd, I look at, listen to.
3 att trdffa (rdka) en person, to see (meet) a person.
4. hela dagen, the whole day.

LESSON VII.
Inflection of Nouns (Continued).
FOURTH DECLENSION.
105. The nouns of this declension take -n in
the plural.

106. The postpositive definite article is -t or -ei

in the singular, -a in the plural, also -en for neuter
monosyllables.
107. This declension contains:
(a) A few neuter monosyllables ending in a
vowel.
44 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES.

(b) Most neuter nouns of more than one syllable

ending in an unaccented vowel, generally -e.
108. Examples of nouns belonging to the Fourth
Declension :

ett hjdrta, a heart; ett rike, a realm; ett piano,

a piano ; ett bi, a bee.

INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sg. ett hjarta hjdrta-t
PI. hjarta-n hjarta-n-a
Sg. ett rike rike-t
PI. rike-n rike-n-a
Sg. ett piano piano-t
PI. piano-n piano-n-a
Sg. ett bi bi-et
PI. 5i-n fci-wa (also bi-en)
NOTE. 1. The words oga, eye, and ora, ear, have the plurals, ogon and 6'ron;
def. form, ogonen and oronen.
2. Bf, 60, and similar neuter nouns, may also have the def. sing, form
bi-t, bo-t, etc.

Declension of Adjectives.
The adjectives have an indefinite
109. and a
definite declension.

THE INDEFINITE DECLENSION.

110. The Indefinite Declension has the following
endings :

-tin the neuter singular.

-a (-e, see 112, 1) in the plural for all genders.

111. NOTES ON THE SINGULAR.

1. Adjectives ending in -t preceded by a consonant do not
take the ending -t in the neuter; as, salt, salt, neuter, salt;
likewise foreign adjectives ending in -t: absolut neuter,
absolut; TconTcret, neuter, konkret.
 INDEFINITE DECLENSION. 45
2. Adjectives ending in unaccented -en change n to the
neuter t; as, trogen, faithful, neuter, troget; funnen, found,
neuter, funnet.
3. Adjectives ending in -d preceded by a vowel change d to
t in accented syllables before the neuter t: god, good, neuter,
gott; in unaccented syllables d is dropped: Jcallad, called,
kaUat; bred, broad, brett.

4. If the final d is preceded by a consonant it is eliminated:

ond, evil, neuter, ont; brand, burned, neuter, brant. If
the adjective ends in a double d, one is dropped and the
other changed to t : trodd, believed, neuter, trott.
5. Adjectives ending in an accented vowel add -tt: fri, free,
- neuter, fritt; bid, blue, neuter, bldtt.
6.Adjectives ending in a double n drop one n before the
neuter t: sann, true, neuter, sant.
1. Adjectives ending in -e (especially present participles)
do not change in the neuter: alskande, loving, neuter,
iilskande; ode, desolate, neuter, ode. Some adjectives are
not used in the indef. form of the neuter; as, lat, lazy;
vanster, left, etc.

112. NOTES ON THE PLURAL.

1. The
plural generally takes the ending -a for all genders,
but -ealways used when the adjective ends in -ad (past
is

participles of the First Conjugation) and sometimes, espe-

cially in solemn style, when the adjective modifies a masculine
noun.
2. Adjectives ending in an unaccented -al, -el, -en, -er elimi-
nate the vowel of these endings when the plural ending, -a
or -e, is added: gammal, old, gamla; ddel, noble, ddla;
mogen, ripe, mogna.

USE OF THE INDEFINITE DECLENSION.

113.The adjective is declined in the Indefinite
Declension when used attributively with a noun
in the indefinite sense, and also when it -is used
predicatively: ett sndll-t barn ar sin moders frojd, a
good child is the joy of its mother; barnet ar vac-
46 INDEFINITE DECLENSION

ker-t, the child is pretty;Karl och Robert dro fti-

tig-a gossar, Carl and Robert are industrious boys.

114. Examples of the Indefinite Declension:

M. F. GENDER FORM NEUTER M. F. GENDER FORM NEUTER
Sg. god gott ddel ddelt
PI. goda ddla
Sg. gammal gammalt trogen troget
PI. gamla trogna
Sg. ond ont dlskad dlskat
PL onda dlskade
Sg. absolut absolut trodd trott
PI. absoluta trodda

115. PARADIGMS WITH NOUNS.

Sg. en god gosse en god flicka ett gottbarn
PI. goda gossar goda flickor goda barn
Sg. en ddel konung en ddel kvinna ett ddelt namn
PI. ddla konungar ddla kvinnor ddla namn
Sg. en dlskad man en dlskad moder ett dlskat land
PI. dlskade man dlskade modrar dlskade lander

RULES OF SYNTAX.

116. Adjectives agree with the nouns they quali-

fy in number and gender but not in case: ett sndll-t
barn, a good child; sndll-a barn, good children; ett
sndllt barn-s moder, the mother of a good child;
sndll-a barn-s modrar, the mothers of good children.

117. Most descriptive adjectives can be used in

the indefinite form of the neuter singular as ad-
verbs; thus, ddel, ddelt, noble, ddelt, nobly; tro-
gen, troget, faithful, troget, faithfully.
 EXERCISE. 47

EXERCISE VII.
A. Supply the proper endings : 1. I gar var det mycket
kail men klar och vacker . 2. En haftig
l
nordan
bias ,
och termometer vis atskillig grad under
2
fryspunkt . 3. Hela dag arbet jag trog (adv.),
men pa kvallen ak 2
jag skridskor. 4*. Det gick (went)
ypperlig (adv.), ty is var blank och hard 5. Skrid- .

skoban var illuminerad, en stor musikkar spel . . .

(proper form of munter) styck och glad , mannisk

fram 6. Pa
2
ak hastig (adv.) och tillbaka. is traff

jag en gammal van, som res (went) till Amerika for

tva ar sedan, men nu har kommit (come) tillbaka. 7. Av
alia . . .
(noble) mannisk , som jag kann , ar 2 han den
baste. 8. Han hade mycket att saga om forhallande i

Amerika, som i manga hanseende behag honom. 9. I

min vans tradgard vaxa 2 god apple . I gar var 2 jag

dar och plock nagra. 10. Apple (def. pi.) aro . . .

(red) och ... (yellow) och mycket ... (sweet). 11. Un-
der traden (the trees) aro sate och i gren -
(def. pi.)
bygga fagl (def. pi.) sina bo .

J
In order to test the student's knowledge dashes are put even where no
2
endings are to be supplied. Xote inverted order.

B. Answer in Swedish: 1. Hurudant var vadret i

gar?
2. Var det lugnt (calm) Huru manga (many) grader ? 3.

visade termometern under fryspunkten? 4. Vad gjorde

(did ... do) ni under (during) dagen? 5. Vad gjorde ni

pa kvallen? Beskriv (describe) skridskobanan ? 7. Vem
6.

traffade ni dar? 8. Var hade han varit? 9. Vad talade

han om? 10. Vem tillhor tradgarden, dar ni var i gar?

11. Var aro satena?

C. 1. The weather iscold to-day, but cLar and beautiful.

2. I believe that the thermometer indicates several degrees
48 VOCABULARY

below the freezing point. 3. I am tired because I have

'

worked faithfully all day. 4. If the ice is good I wish

(invert) to skate a couple (of) hours. 5. The ice is ex-

cellent, very hard and r-mooth, and to-night a big baud will

play in the rink. 6. Do you know if the rink is illumi-

1 2

nated to-night? Surely (ja visst). 7. It is a great pleasure

to skate rapidly 8. The band plays merry
back and forth.
pieces. music
9. I like
merry and happy people. 10. There
I see a couple (of) old friends. I wish to speak to (vid)

them. 11. They have been in America and know the con-
ditions there.
2
a
Use present tense and invert (104, 2) ; in, pa. kno\v, vet.

VOCABULARY.

N. B. Two forms are given of the adjective: the gender

and the neuter form; the latter is also the adverb.

behaga, I, to please klar, -t, clear

blank, -t, smooth, shiny munter, -t, merry
bldsa, Ha, to blow en musik'kdr, -er, band
ett 60, -n, nest mdnga, many
bygga, lib, to build manniska (fern.) -or, man,
fryspunkt, -er, freezing point human being
eti forhdllande, -n, condition, ett noje, -n, amusement, pleas-
relation ure, enjoyment
gammal, -t, old plocka, I, to pick
glad glatt, glad, happy rod, rott, red
en grad, -er, degree en skridsko, 1 -r, skate
en gren, -ar, branch en skridskobana, -or, skating
gul, -t, yellow rink
hastig, rapid
-t, spela, I, to play (music)
hard, hart, hard ett stycke, -n, piece
hdftig, -t, violent, vehement ett sate, -n, seat
ett hdnseende, respect sot, soft, sweet
iUumine'rad, -rat, illuminated en termome'ter, -rar. ther-
en is, -ar, ice mometer
kail, -t, cold trogen, troget, faithful
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 49
weather
ett viider, iidel, -t, noble
visa, show, indicate
I, ett apple, -n, apple
uka, Ha, ride, travel

IDIOMS: 1. aka skridsko, to skate.

2. from och tillbaka, back and forth.
'Generally pronounced skrisko.

LESSON VIII.
Inflection of Nouns (Continued).

FIFTH DECLENSION.
118. The nouns belonging to this declension take
no ending in the plural (cf. deer, sheep, swine, in
English).

119. The postpositive article is -n, or -en for

gender nouns and -et for neuter nouns in the sin-
gular and -no, (sometimes -ne for masculines in
-are) for gender nouns and -en for neuter nouns
in the plural.

120. The Fifth Declension includes:

(a) All gender nouns ending in -ande and -are.
NOTE. Kammare, ha.mma.re, and kallare have also the plurals kamr-ar, liamr-
or, and kallr-ar..

(b) Names of peoples and nouns of foreign origin

ending in -er.

(c) Most neuter nouns ending in a consonant,

except those ending in -eum and -ium which belong
to the Third Declension.

(d) The nouns fader, father; broder, brother;

man, man gas, goose lus, louse mus, mouse, which
; ; ;

modify the vowel in the plural; pi. fader, broder,

50 DEFINITE DECLENSION.

man, gdss, loss, moss; and a few common words of

measure as,' fot, foot turn, inch mil, mile.
; ; ;

NOTE. Fot has the plural fatter only when signifying a part of the body.
Klein, gdss, loss, moss have the definite forms mannen, gdssen, lossen, mossen.

121. Examples of nouns of the Fifth Declen-

sion: en bagare, a baker; en ordforande, a chair-
man; en mu'siker, a musician; ett namn, a name;
ett modus, a mode.
INDEFINITE DEFINITE
Sg. en bagare bagare-n
PL bagare bagarna (ne)*
Sg. en ordforande ordforande-n
PL ordforande ordforande-na
Sg. en musiker musiker-n
PL musiker musiker-na
Sg. ett namn namn-et
PL namn namn-en
Sg. ett modus modus 2
PL modus modus
*Observe the elimination of the e of the ending -are. Such forms as doma-
or domrarna from domare, judge, to distinguish its plural from the plural
re.no,

domarna of dom, sentence, are growing obsolete. The def. article is generally
-na even for words like bagare, cf. 73, note 5.
2
Words in -us cannot take the postpositive article. The indef. form is used
for the def. (73, note 4, c).

Declension of Adjectives (Continued).

THE DEFINITE DECLENSION.

122. In the Definite Declension the adjective
has practically only one ending, -a, which is added
to the original form (the indefinite singular of the
gender form) ; sometimes, however, we find -e.
123. The ending -e takes the place of -a in the
following instances:
 DEFINITE DKCLENSIOX. 51

(a) Often in the singular; occasionally in the

plural whenthe adjective modifies a noun denoting
a person of the male sex den god-a (also god-e) gos-
:

sen; den stor-e (never stor-a) Gustav Adolf, the

latter expression is emphatic and formal den stor-e ;

mannen means the great man. Stora would here

because of its greater commonplaceness convey the
sense of physical largeness.
(b) When the adjective is used as a noun to
denote human beings of the male sex; the adjective
then has a genitive in -s: den gamle, the old man;
but den gamla, the old woman; de rike, the rich;
den gamles hus, the house of the old man.
(c) Always when the adjective ends in -ad; as,
den alskade drottningen, the beloved queen.
NOTE. Adjectives ending in -a, -e (se), -om, -s (es) and -tals are indeclinable.

USE OF DEFINITE DECLENSION.

124. The adjective is declined in the Definite
Declension when used:
(1) Before a noun with the postpositive article;
as, den rike mannen, the rich man; svenska sprd-
ket, the Swedish language (69).
(2) After a noun in the genitive; as, min far-
brors vackra hus, the fine house of my uncle; ko-
nungens ddla upptrddande, the noble conduct of
the king.
(3) After the possessive and demonstrative adjec-
tives and pronouns as, mina nya handskar, my new
;

gloves; denne trogne tjdnare, this faithful servant.

(4) In expressions of address and in apposition
with a personal pronoun; as, Kdre van! Dear
friend. Jag olyckliga manniskal I unhappy man.
52 EXERCISE.

125. Examples of the

Definite Declension: ddel,
noble; trogen, faithful; dlskad, loved.
MASC. FEM. NEUTER
Sg. ddl-a(e) ddl-a ddl-a
PI. ddl-a (e) ddl-a ddl-a
Sg. trogn-a(e) trogn-a trogn-a
PI. trogn-a(e) trogn-a trogn-a
Sg. dlskad-e dlskad-e dlskad-e
PI. dlskad-e dlskad-e dlskad-e
NOTE. Adjectives ending in unaccented -al, -el, -en, -er drop the vo\\t-l uf
their last syllable before -a or -e of the def. form.

THE USE OF THE PREPOSITIVE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

126. The prepositive definite article den, det,
pi. de (70) is employed when the noun is qualified
by an adjective or numeral in such a case the post- ;

positive definite article must also be used; thus,

den vackr-a flickan, the beautiful girl; det sndll-a
barn-et, the good child; de tio flitigast-e gossarna,
the ten most industrious boys.
NOTE 1. The prepositive article is generally employed when the adjective is

used as a noun; thus, den gamle, the old man; den lilla, the little girl; del
tkona, the beautiful.
2. It is omitted in a number of set phrases, especially such as serve as
names ;
often before superlatives and adjectives of place ; before hel, whole,
halv, half, sjalv, self ; thus, svemka gpr&ket, the Swedish language ; forsta
dagen, the first day ; vdnstra sidan, the left side ; hela natten, the whole night.

'EXERCISE VIII.
A. Supply the proper form of the Swedish equivalents
of the adjectives given within parenthesis in the following :

den (noble) mannen; min faders (beautiful) hus;

de (faithful) lararna; de (ripe) applena; de
(small) gossarna; ett (free) land; ett (wet) fait;
det (wet) faltet; det (respected) namnet; den
flickan; ett
-- (red) hus; ett (sweet} barn;
(little)
 EXERCISE. 53

(sweet) barn (pi.); ett bad; de - - (noble) (salt)

mannen; (respected) lakare; den (old [one],
-

m. and f.) ; de -- (ripe [ones]); ett -- (small) barn;

de (new) lararna; den (new one) ; den (free one,
m. and f.).

B. 1. I gar vaknade jag med en haftig huvudvark.

2. Jag kladde mig och promenerade i den vackra parken
en timme fore frukosten. 3. Da jag kom (came) tillbaka,
voro min far och mor otaliga, ty de hade vantat lange.
4. Jag madde inte (did not feel) alls bra och kunde (could)

ej ata nagot av den goda maten. 5. Jag forsokte (att)

dricka en kopp av det starka kaffet, men kunde inte. 6. Pa
eftermiddagen gick jag tillden skicklige lakaren dr Buren.
Denne one) ar en gammal van till min
1
7. (he, lit., this
far. 8. Hans mottagningsrum
ar i det nya huset pa hornet
af Kungsgatan och Vasagatan. 9. Jag maste (had to) van-
ta en hel timma, innan jag traffade honom, ty det var

manga patienter fore mig. 10. "Vad fattas er?" fragade

den gamle vanlige lakaren. 11. "Jag har ofta en mycket

haftig hufvudvark", svarade jag. 12. "Ar aptiten god eller

dalig?" 13. "Pa morgonen ar den mycket dalig." 14.

"Hur sover ni?" "Daligt." 15. "Far (may) jag se pa er

tunga?" 16. "Har har ni ett recept, det ar for aptiten."

17. Dessutom ordinerade han rorelse i friska luften
(126, 2).
i
Till is sometimes used to express genitive relation ; translate of.

C. Answer in Swedish : 1. Var ni bra, nar ni vaknade

i
gar ? 2. Vad f attades er ? 3. Vad gjorde ni fore frukos-
ten ? 4. Varfor voro er far och mor otaliga ? 5. Hur lange
hade ni promenerat? 6. manga koppar kaffe drack Hum
(impf.) ni? 7. Kanner er far dr Buren? 8. Var har han
sitt mottagningsrum? 9. Hur lange och varfor maste ni
54 VOCABULARY

vanta? 10. Vad fragade den gamle vanlige lakaren er?

11. Vad ordinerade (prescribed) han?
Z>. 1. My old father woke up to-day with a very violent
headache. 2. He came down for (till) breakfast (def.) but
could not eat anything (ndgot). 3. At (vid) noon (def.)
his appetite was very poor and we had to
1
telephone for
2

the famous old physician, Dr. Buren. 4. Our dear father

and he are old friends. 5. He came soon in the big red

automobile, which he bought last year (i fjol). 6. When

he came in, he asked (104, 2) my father, "What ails you,

old friend?" 7. When he had examined him he wrote

(sJcrev) two prescriptions, one for the violent headache,

the other (andra) for the poor appetite. 8. Besides he

prescribed exercise and fresh air.

1
Have to when it denotes compulsion is expressed by mdste, which is the same
in the present and imperfect.
'For with the verbs like ask, send, write, call, telephone, is rendered efter.

VOCABULARY.
alls, at all eft horn, corner
en aptit (no pi.) appetite inte, not
en automobil', -er, automobile innan (conj.), before
ett bad, bath kldda, lib, to dress
ett barn, child en kopp, -ar, cup
bra, well Kungsgatan, King's street
dessutom, besides, in addition liten, -et (def. lilla, pi. smd),
dricka (strong verb), to drink little, small

ddlig, bad, poor

-t, (en) luft (no pi.) air
fattas (deponent verb), I, to en lakare, physician
lack; to ail (en) mat (no pi.), food
fri, fritt, free mogen, -et, ripe (18, 1)
frisk, -t, fresh; well, healthy ett mottagningsrum, reception
en frukost (pron. fruckost), room, doctor's office
-ar, breakfast ny, nytt, new
and adv.), before
fore (prep, ndgot, anything
en huvudvark (no pi.) head- ordine'ra, I, to prescribe
ache otdlig, -t, impatient
 IRREGULAR DECLENSION. 55

en patient', -er, patient stark, -t, strong

ett recept', prescription telefone'ra,I, to telephone

ansedd, ansett, respected en tunga, -or, tongue

en rorelse, -r, movement; ex- vakna, I, to wake up
ercise Vasagatan, Vasa street
salt, salt vdt, vatt, wet
skicklig, -t, skillful vanlig, -t, friendly, kind
sova (strong verb), to sleep vtinta, I, to wait

IDIOMS: 1. en kopp kaffe, a cup of coffee.

2. inte alls, not at all.

LESSON IX.

Nouns (Continued).
Inflection of

127. IRREGULARITIES IN DECLENSION.

(a) For the syncopation of the vowel of an un-

accented ending before the plural ending, see 81,
notes 1 and 2 and 85, note 4.
;

(b) For the elimination of the endings -us and

-um after e and i before the plural ending, see 86,
note.

(c) A few nouns of the Second, Third, and Fifth

Declensions modify the root vowel in the plural as, ;

bonde, peasant; pi. bonder

broder, brother ; pi. broder
dotter, daughter; pi. dottrar
fader, father; pi. fader
man, man pi. man;

moder, mother; pi. modrar

son, son; pi. so'ner (grave accent), and some
others (see 85, notes 1 and 2).
(d) A
few nouns of the Third Declension double
the last consonant. Often there is also a vowel
modification; as,
56 THE CASES.

bok, book; pi. backer

fot, foot; pi. f otter
get, goat; pi. getter
not, nut; pi. notter
(e) So also,
gas, goose; pi. gdss.
Ins, louse; pi. loss,
mus, mouse; pi. moss.

(f) of the Third Declension take

Some nouns
only -r in the plural; such are, nouns ending in
unaccented -e, a few monosyllabic gender nouns end-
ing in o, a, o, and some others; as,
fi'ende, enemy; pi. fiende-r
hustru, wife; pi. hustri(-r
klo, claw; pi. klo-r
ko, cow; pi. ko-r
sko, shoe; pi. sko-r
td, toe; pi. ta-r

(g) Many loan words retain their foreign plural :

faktum, fact; pi. fakta; examen, examination; pi.

examina.
DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES.
128. Names of persons, countries, cities, rivers,
mountains, and places take an -s in the genitive ex., ;

jag laser Tegners dikter, I am reading the poetry

of Tegner; Sveriges floder dro vackra, the rivers of
Sweden are beautiful. (Exceptions 130, a.)
NOTE. If a title precedes the name, the latter only takes the -* as in Eng-
lish: herr Liners dotter dr hdr, Mr. LineVs daughter is here.

THE CASES.
129. The nominative and the genitive are the
only cases that need to be taken into account in
the declension of nouns, the objective being identical
with the nominative.
 THE GENITIVE. 57

130. The genitive is formed, as has been stated

before, by the addition of an -s to the nominative,
indefinite and definite, singular and plural.

IMPORTANT OBSERVATIONS.
(a) Proper nouns ending in an s-sound (s, x, 2) in the
nominative have their possessive of the same form, adding
only an apostrophe; as, Johannes' evangelium, the Gospel of
St. John.
Cb) In the case of a common noun ending in an s-sound,
-st, or -xt the nominative, the genitive relation is gener-
in
ally expressed by the prepositions pd and till (rarely av) ;

thus, taket p& ett hus, the roof of a house; vdggarna till
ett hus, the walls of a house; sometimes by putting the
noun in the definite form and suffixing an s; as, blixtens
hastighet, the rapidity of a flash of lightning, instead of en
blixts hastighet.
(c) In certain expressions names of localities ending in a
vowel use a nominative in apposition where other words
would require a genitive; as, Uppsala universitet, the univer-
sity of Upsala.
(d) A Latin genitive in -i occurs with nouns in -us; as,
Kristi liv, the life of Christ. Note also the genitive of Jesus,
Jesu.
(e) When several words are used to designate the same
person or object, the last word in the group generally takes
the -s: Karl den stores rike, the realm of Charles the Great;
konungen av Sveriges (also konungens av Sverige) hov, the
court of the king of Sweden.

SYNTAX OF THE CASES.

131. The nominative and the objective need no
illustration since their functions are the same as
in English.

THE GENITIVE.
132. In regard to the genitive it is of prime
importance to notice that the form in -s is employed
much more freely in Swedish than in English. The
Swedish Grammar 5
58 THE GENITIVE.

genitive relation is rarely expressed by the prepo-

sition av, of; thus impersonal nouns, which in Eng-
lish invariably would be construed with of to express
the genitive relation, in Swedish take -s; as, bordets
ben, the legs of the table; vid mdnadens slut, at
the end of the month.

133. The following uses of the genitive should

be noted:
(a) The word modified by the genitive is omit-
ted in expressions like: min klocka dr vackrare an
min brors, my watch is prettier than my brother's;
detta dr min systers hatt, min mors ligger ddr borta,
this is my sister's hat, my mother's lies over there.
(b) Somewhat analogous is the use of the geni-
tive designating the house, family, or business of
somebody: jag bor hos Lindholms, I live at Lind-
holm's; Blombergs dro sjuka, the Blombergs are
sick.

(c) In a few expressions a genitive is used after

the prepositions i and till: gd till sdngs, to go to bed;

till lands, by land till sjoss, by water, to or at sea

; :

gd till bords, to sit down at table; i sondags, last

Sunday ; i hostas, last fall ; i varas, last spring.
A temporal expression with i governing the geni-

tive denotes a past period.

NOTE. This use of t and till is limited to a few phrases, which, however, are
of very common occurrence.

134. After quantitative nouns of measure and

weight, and nouns of value, the nominative is used :

en kopp kaffe, a cup of coffee; tio meter tyg, ten

meters of cloth; ett kilo smo'r, a kilogram of but-
ter; for tio kronor socker, ten crowns' worth of
1

sugar.
 EXERCISE. 59

135. The objective genitive is often expressed

by till, sometimes by av; thus, kdrleken till j osier -
landet, love of country; asynen av land, the sight
of land. The possessive genitive is often expressed
by till (or pa) when the possessor is an inanimate
object: locket till ladan, the cover of the box; kryc-
kan pa kappen, the crutch of the cane (never hatten
till den unge mannen, but den unge mannens hati,

the young man's hat).

EXERCISE IX.
A. Translate the following sentences and expressions.
1. Where is the leg of the table
(in two ways) ? 2. The
roof of the house (in two ways) is poor. 3. The history of
Charles XII. Mr. Lindgren's daughters. 5. The books
4.

of Strindberg, the author (place author first). 6. The

university of Upsala is very old. 7. He is at sea. 8. Plato

was a pupil of Socrates 1 9. I bought the shoes at Lind-
.

holm's. 10. My house and my father's. 11. The literature

of Sweden. 12. The speech of the emperor of Germany.
13. The banks of the Mississippi are beautiful. 14. He
came (kom) last Monda}'. 15. A cup of good coffee.
16. The streets of Berlin. 17. The theaters of Paris.
2
18. The city (of) Berlin .

2
translate: one of Socrates' pupils. Put Berlin in apposition with city.

B. Supply endings where indicated: 1. Kanner ni till

den svensk litteratur val ? 2. Tyvarr icke. Av de klas-

sisk forfatt (pi. def. gen.) arbet har 1 jag last

Tegners Fritiofs saga och Eunebergs episk dikt (pi.

indef.), och av Sveriges modern forfattare kanner jag

till August Strindberg och Selma Lagerlof. 3. Hur tyck
2
ni om Strindberg, ar han ej mycket pessimistisk ? 4. Jo ,

jag tyck mycket battre om Selma Lagerlofs bb'cker.

60 EXERCISE.

5. Var ni ej pa teater i
gar kvall? 6. Nej, men jag hade
amn att ga, ty jag hade hb'r att man skulle (would) ,

spela en' av Strindbergs dramer, men sa borj det att

snb'a, och vi stann hemma. 7. Det var skada, ty fore-
stallning var utmarkt; Blombergs och vi voro dar. 8.

Roll (pi. def. gen.) utfb'rande var mycket gott (also,

utfb'randet av rollerna). 9. Herr Palme, som i
mandags
spelade Fausts roll i Gb'thes dram, spelade nu Gustav
Adolfs. 10. Har ni last i
tidning om kejsarens av Tysk-
land tal? 11.Kan ni saga mig vad Sokrates' berb'md 3

larjunge hette?
*Note the inverted order. -Jo is used in answering a question containing a
negative. *rhe def. form of the adjective is used after a possessive modifier

(124, note 2).

C. Conversation. 1. Vilka av de klassiska fb'rfattarna

har ni last? 2. Vilka moderna fb'rfattare kanner ni till?
3. Varfor tycker ni battre om Selma Lagerlof an om
Strindberg? 4. Hade ni ej amnat att ga pa teatern i
gar?
5. Vad spelade man i
gar kvall? 6. Hurudan var fore-

stallningen? 7. Vem utfb'rde Gustav Adolfs roll?

D. 1. Where are you going

1
to-night, Charles? i am
going to Sandell's. 2. What do you wish, sir (min her re) ?

I wish to buy the works of Topelius (130, d). 3. Does the

green house belong to Mr. Williams' mother? No, it is

his brother's, I believe. 4. Where do you pass your win-

ters? Sometimes in Italy and sometimes in one of the
towns of southern (def.) Prance (128). 5. I like the

climate of Italy better than that of southern France (than

southern France's). 6. Where is to-day's paper (the day's
2
paper ) ? I wish to read the latest (senaste) speech of
the king of England. 7. Are you acquainted with Francis'
(130, a) parents? Yes, I met them at Blomberg's last
Monday. 8. Have you read Selma Lagerlof's famous (def.)
 VOCABULARY. 61

book, "Jerusalem" ? 1).

Unfortunately not, but I have heard
that contains an excellent portrayal of the peasants of
it

Sweden. 10. Where have you bought the chickens and the
geese? I have bought them at Lind's. Aren't they fine?
11. What do you wish, sir? I wish a cup of strong coffee,
and (samt 3 ) bread and butter. 12. I believe you are
sleepy, Mr. Brown. Yes, I am very tired. I went to bed
so late last night.
translate: Where do you intend to go to-night f 2 Also tidningen for i dag.
3
Samt
is interchangeable with och to avoid repetition, though rarely used in con-

versation med, with, could be used here.

;

VOCABULARY.
ett arbete, -n, work en Idrjunge, -ar, pupil
ett brod, bread lii-sa, Ila, to read
en dikt, -er, poem modern', -t, modern
en dram, -er, ett drama (no en mdndag, -ar, Monday
plur.), drama pessimis'tisk, -t, pessimistic

episk, -t, epic

en roll, -er, part (acting)
Frankrike (neuter), France sen, -t, late

Frans, Francis skada, -or, damage

en fo'restdllning, -ar, perform- en skildring, -ar, description,
ance portrayal
en forfat'tare, author (ett) smor, butter

fo'rdldrar (plural only), snu'a, I, to snow

stanna, I, to stay, stop
parents
gron, -t, green Sverige (neuter), Sweden
en gas, giiss, goose sitdra (def. only), .southern

heta, Ila, to be called somnig, -t, sleepy

in'nehdlla see Jidlla), en sang, -ar, bed
(st. v.,
to contain ett tal, speech; number
Ilalien ett tak, roof
(neuter), Italy
jo, yes (used in answer to a en teater, -rar, tteater
negative question) en tidning, -ar, newspaper
classic trott, tired
klassisk, -t,

ett klimaf, climate tyvlirr', unfortunately

kiinna know about ett utforande, -n, execution,
till', lib, to
en kyckling, -ar, young chicken performance
62 THIRD CONJUGATION.
IDIOMS.
1. att ga pa, teatern, pd en konsert, to attend the theater, a
concert.
2. det iir skada, it is a pity.

LESSON X.
The Verb (Continued).
THIRD CONJUGATION.
136. To
the Third Conjugation, which may be
considered a slightly modified form of the Second,
belong all weak verbs which end in any other vowel
than -a in the infinitive. This conjugation contains
comparatively few verbs.
137. The Third Conjugation has the following
endings :

stem vowel in the infinitive : e, o, y, a not a.

-r in the singular of the present indicative,

stem vowel in the plural of the present indicative.
-n in the archaic second plural.
-dde in the imperfect indicative, both numbers.
-ende in the present participle (111, note 7).
-tt in the supine.
-dd in the gender form of the past participle.
-tt in the neuter form of the past participle

(HI, 4).
138. Examples of verbs of the Third Conjuga-
tion : att tro, to believe att sy, to sew.
;

PRESENT INDICATIVE
Sg. fag] Sg. jag
du [. du
m >tror
I ni
1.
\
syr
han] han]
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 63

PI. vi 1 vi
]
ni nro ni \sy
de\ de\
I iron I syn
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE.
Sg. jag 1
jag }

du {, j, du I

ttrodde \sydde
ni ni
han\ han\
PI. vi ] vi
]
ni ttrodde ni \sydde
de J de J
/ trodden I sydden

PERFECT INDICATIVE.
/tar trott, etc. yagr Tiar ST/if, etc.

PLUPERFECT INDICATIVE.
jag hade trott, etc. jag hade sytt, etc.

Personal Pronouns.
139. DECLENSION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
FIRST PERSON SECOND PERSON THIRD PERSON
Masc. and Fern. Masc. and Fern. Masc. Fern. Neuter
Sg. Nom. jag du han hon det
Gen. (min) (din) hans hennes dess
Obj. mig dig honom henne det

PI.
64 PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

140. REMARKS ON THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

(a) The personal pronouns with the exception
of the third person lack genitive forms these forms
;

are supplied by the possessive adjectives. But a

genitive form for the second person occurs in a few
titles; as,Ers Majestat, Your Majesty; Ers excel-
lens, Your Excellency.

(b) Mig and dig are colloquially pronounced mdj

and daj.
(c) In conversational language 'en or 'n is some-
times appended to the verb or to the pronoun subject
in a question and used as a sort of enclitic pronoun
for honom or den; likewise also 'et or 't for det and
'no, for henne. Ex. Jag sag 'en i gar. I saw him
yesterday. Pick du't? Did you get it?

141. For the use of du and ni in address, see

67, a, b.

142. It is considered more polite in the singular

to use the title of the person with or without herr or
fru. The definite form of the title is generally used
except when it occurs together with the name or is

used in independent construction.

Ex.: Kommer i kvall? Will you come to-

doktorn
night, Doctor? But Kommer doktor Lind i kvall?
Are you coming to-night, Doctor Lind ? Ndr flyttar
ni ut pa landet, herr doktor? When are you going
to move out into the country, Doctor?
Persons whose titles and names are unknown may
be addressed with herrn, frun, or fro'ken (also da-
men, the lady) it is impolite to omit name or title
;

in speaking to persons we know Vill herrn vara sa

:
 EXERCISE. G5

god och saga mig, var Kungsgatan ar? Will you

kindly tell me, sir, where King's Street is?
NOTE. To combine convenience with politeness one may judiciously intersperse
the pronoun ni with the title. The existing objection to this convenient pronoun
is gradually disappearing.

EXERCISE X.
A. Supply the endings of the verbs and nouns where
indicated.

Var tillbring
1.
(impf.) ni era ferier i somras (133,
c), herr doktor? 2. Vi bo pa landet som vanligt, vid
en harlig liten insjo. 3. Nar sommar komm , forma
jag inte att stanna i staden langre, jag maste fly ut i
naturen for att hamta nya kraft (pi.) till mitt arbete.
4. Ni flytt ut ganska sent i
ar, herr doktor, eller hur?
5. Ja, det bero pa olyckan, som han min hustru. Har
ni ej hb'r om den? 6. Strax innan vi amna (att)
lamna stad , voro
i min
(93, a) vi ute och kb'r nya bil;
vi kollider med en sparvagn, och min hustru blev (was)
skadad. 7. Nu ma hon ypperligt, men jag kan ej forma
henne att aka i automobil mera. 8. Varfb'r besoker (93, b)
ni oss aldrig, herr professor, medan vi bo pa landet? 9. Vi
ha det sa trevligt, var villa ligger vid sjostrand , och
fran dess veranda ha vi en harlig utsikt over sjb'n. 10. Vi
ha bade (both) motorbat och segelbat och naturligtvis
roddbat, om ni tyck om att ro. 11. Vag (pi. def.)
aro fb'rtrafflig och passande for automobilakning.
B. Conversation. 1. Var bodde ni i somras? 2. Varfor
bor ni pa landet? 3. Flyttade ni ut tidigt i ar? 4. Varfor
flyttade ni ut sa sent? 5. 7ad skedde, nar ni voro ute och
akte ? 6. Vad kolliderade ni med ? 7. Varfor vill fru Ed-
strom ej aka i automobil mera? 8. Var ligger er villa?
9. Hur har ni det pa landet? 10. Hum manga slags (kindi
of) batar har ni? 11. Vad passa vagarna for?
66 VOCABULARY

C. 1. Doctor Edstrom and his family lived at a beau-

tiful little lake last summer. 2. Their villa is situated

(Hgger) at (vid) the lake shore, and from the porch they
have a charming view over the lake and its islands. 3. The
doctor does not feel well if he does not spend his (sina) va-
cation in (pa) the country, 4. Last summer they moved
out later than usual, for an accident had occurred to Mrs.
Edstrom. 5. They were out riding in their (sin) large new
automobile and collided with a street car. 6. Mrs. Edstrom
was seriously injured, and now the doctor cannot make her
(Ex. X, A, 7) ride in an automobile. 7. Haven't you

heard of that (ddrom) ? I thought you and the doctor

were very good friends. 8. I have visited them several
times at (i) their home in the country; they have such a

pleasant home. 9. Once I stayed a whole week and was out

rowing and fishing (ute och rodde ocli metade) on the lake
every (varje) day.

VOCABULARY.
aldrig, never kollide'ra, I, to collide

allvarsam, -t, serious en kraft, -er, strength

en automobil'dkning, automo- kora, lib, to drive
bile riding Idmna, I, to leave
bero', III, to depend langre, longer, any longer
en bil, -ar, colloquial abbrev. medan, while
for automobile meta, I, to fish
ferier (always plur.) vacation en motorMt, -ar, motor boat
fly, III, to flee ma, III, to feel (well, ill, etc.)
flytta, I, to move en natur', -er, nature
forma', III, to be able; to in- natur'ligtvis, of course
duce or compel en o'lycka, -or, accident, mis-
ganska (adv.), quite fortune
Jiamta, I, to fetch passande, suitable
handa, lib, to happen, occur ro, III, to row
en hustru, -r, wife en roddbdt, -ar, rowboat
en insjo, -ar, lake en segelbut, -ar, sailboat
 INDICATIVE. 07

en sjostrand, sjiJstriinder, lake som vanligt, as usual

shore en veranda, -or, porch
skadad, -at, injured en villa, -or, villa, cottage
i somras, last summer dka, Ha, to ride
en spdrvagn, -ar, street car en o, -ar, island
strax, soon over (prep, and adv.) over,
trevlig, -t, pleasant, agreeable past

IDIOMS.
1. att vara ute och kora, gd, rida, etc., to be out driving,
walking, riding.
2. att gd ut och gd, to take a walk.
3. att ha det trevligt, to have a pleasant home or time.
4. att md bra, ilia, to feel well, bad, ill.

LESSON XI.
The Verb (Continued).
FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT INDICATIVE.
143. The future indicative is formed by com-
bining the present of the auxiliary skola, shall, which
is skall (in conversation ska), with the present infin-
itive;and the future perfect by combining the
same auxiliary with the perfect infinitive.
FUTURE INDICATIVE FUTURE PERF. INDIC.
Sg. jag] jag]
du , du [skall (ska)
ni
\ i

fskall
7, 7 x

(ska) kalla
T 17
ni h akaUat
han] han]
PI. vi vi 1

m
~\

skola (ska)
\skola (ska) kalla ni I

de de ha kallat
J j
I skolen kalla I skolen ha kallat
NOTE 1. Pure future
generally expressed either by the present or by the
is

infinitive together with the present of the verb komma, to come (296).
2. The double forms of the English future and future perfect, / shall call,
I shall be calling, and / shall have called, I shall have been calling, are to be
rendered by the single forms, jag skall kalla and jag skall ha kallat.
68 IMPERATIVE.

THE IMPERATIVE.
144. The imperative is formed by attaching to
the stem of the verb the following endings:

SINGULAR PLURAL
Second Person -a or First Person -om
Second Person -en or -n
NOTE. Only verbs of the First Conjugation take -a in the second person sin-

gular ; all other verbs use the mere stem.

145. Instead of the form in -om, which is exceed-

ingly rare, the imperative of the verb Idta, let, latom,
generally shortened to lat, is used with the reflex-
ive pronoun first person plural and
oss, us, of the
the infinitive. This form corresponds exactly to
the English imperative with let; thus, Idt(om) oss
kalla, let us call.

146. Instead of the second person plural in -en

or -n the second person singular, with the pronoun
ni understood, is used as an imperative for the
second person plural.
NOTE. The pronouns are generally omitted in the imperative.

147. The conversational language uses a num-

ber of expressions which are more polite than the
imperative the most common is vill ni vara sa god,
;

will you be so kind; thus, vill ni vara sa god och

komma (will you have the kindness to come),
also, var sa god och, etc. or the expression, sa dr ni
;

(du) snail (then you are kind), may be used after

the imperative; as, kom, sa dr ni snail (please
come), or, kan (can) may be used in a question:
kan du komma mi? equivalent to, come now,
please.
 INFINITIVE. 69

148. Examples of the imperative of the verbs

kalla, to call; bdja, to bend; tro, to believe; ga,
to go.

kalla (du, ni), kallom, lat(om) oss kalla, kallen(I)

bd'j (du, ni), bojom, Idt(om) oss bdja, bbjen(I)
tro (du, ni), lat(om) oss tro, iron (I)
ga (du, ni), lat(om) oss ga, gan (I)
NOTE. Verbs the stem of which ends in a vowel lack the form in -07*1, and
take -n in the second person plural.

149. REMARKS ON THE INFINITIVE.

(a) The present active infinitive ends in

-a, but
verbs of the Third Conjugation and a few verbs
of the Fourth Conjugation the stem of which ends
in a vowel take no ending in the infinitive. The
sign of the infinitive i? att, to. Ex.: att kalla, att
tro, att ga.

(b) The perfect infinitive is formed as in Eng-

lish; thus, att ha kallat, to'have called; att ha trott,
to have believed att ha; gdtt, to have gone.
(c) There is also a future infinitive formed by
combining the present infinitive of the auxiliary
verb skola, shall, with the infinitive of the verb;
as, att skola kalla. This is rarely used.
(d) The sign of the infinitive is omitted very much
as in English. (Further particulars will be given
later.)

(e) An infinitive
phrase expressing purpose is
generally introduced by the preposition for, for;
as, jag har rest till Tyskland for att studera tyska
dar, I have gone to Germany in order to study Ger-
man there.
70 EXERCISE.

The Reflexive Pronoun.

150. There
only one distinctively reflexive
is

form, the objective which is used for all genderssig,

and numbers of the third person: himself, herself,
itself, themselves; as, han (hon) sdtter sig, seats
himself (herself) de sdtta sig, they seat themselves.
;

151. Elsewhere the objective case of the personal

pronouns is used as reflexive; as, jag sdtter mig,
I seat myself ; m
sdtta oss, we seat ourselves.
NOTE 1. In English the reflexive -self must be distinguished from the em-
phatic -self. This is expressed in Swedish by sjalv; as, jag sjalv, I myself;
han har gjort det sjalv, he has done it himself.
2. Sjdlva(e) preceding a noun means even ; as, sjdlva konungen kan inte
.gora det, even the king cannot do it.

EXERCISE XI.
A. 1. Om m onska taga en liten tur pa sjon, barn, sa
kom med mig. 2.Ga in till Ostermans pa vagen, Karl, och
sag till dem, att jag b'nsk lana . . .
(Iheir) bat. 3. Hop-
pa nu i bat , goss ,
men forsiktigt, sa att ni ej stjalp
. . .
(it). 4. Vem skall ro? Jasa, du Erik, nej, lat Karl
ro, jag tror ej, att det skall bli tungt for honom, ty sjon
ligger som en Sluta att ro, Karl, och slapp ned
spegel. 5.

ankar Lat oss nu kasta nt rev

. 6. Se bara, hur .

mycket fisk det ar har! Karl har redan ett napp pa sin
krok. 7. Tycker ni inte, att det ar roligt att meta, nar

man far napp? 8. Var nu snail och ro i land, sa satta vi

oss under det stor trad for att ata var middag.

B. 1. Kara barn, oppna lasebockerna pa sidan tjugu,

och lat oss lasa Tegners vackra dikt. 2. Sag mig, Karl,
vad den handlar om, ar du snail. 3. Det var alldeles rik-
tigt. Borja nu och las den hogt och val for oss, Maria.
4. Yar god och ursakta mig, froken Forsell, jag kan ej
 EXERCISE. ?'l

lasa hogt; jag ar forkyld och har ont i halscn. 5. Det var

ilia, da skall lilla Klara lasa den. 6. Sna.Ha froken, tillat

mig att lasa den utantill ; jag bar lart hela dikten utantill.
7. Det var bra gjort, Klara. Hor nu pa uppmarksamt
allesammans, medan Klara laser. 8. Sedan skall jag sjalv
deklamera den for or.

C. Conversation. 1. Vad b'nskar ni (att) gora i

dag?
2. Vem ska vi lana baten av? 3. Varfor blir det ej tungt
for Karl att ro? 4. Vad maste man gora, innan man kan
borja (att) meta? 5. Vem av er bar napp
pa sin krok?
6. Nar ar det roligt att meta? 7. Var skola vi ata var

middag? 8. Varfor kan Maria ej lasa hogt? 9. Hur har

Klara visat, att hon ar flitig? 10. Vad amnar froken

Forsell (att) gora, nar Klara har last dikten?

D. 1. The children wished to go out fishing (ut och

meta) yesterday. 2. Since we do not have any boat, we

had to (maste vi) borrow one from Osterman's. 3. The
boys jumped carefully into the boat in order not to upset
1
it. Carl rowed the whole way , and
4. it was not very
difficult, for the lake was like a mirror. Stop rowing, 5.

Carl; and you, Eric, drop the anchor. 6. Let us throw out
our lines here, boys, there is (A, 6) plenty of (much) fish
here, I think. 7. you are tired we shall (invert) row
If
ashore and sit down (A, 8) under the big tree to eat our
breakfast. 8. Please (B, 2) open the books on page ten,
children. 9. Tell me, Carl, who the author of this (denna)
beautiful poem is. 10. Quite right, my dear boy. And
now Clara will recite the poem for us. 11. When she has
done (gjort) myself shall declaim it for you. 12.
this, I

Why don't you begin, Clara ? Have you not learned it by

heart? 13. Please excuse me (var god och ursakta mig},
Miss Forsell. I tried to learn it by heart yesterday, but
 VOCABULARY.

could (kunde) not. I had such a sore throat (sa out i lial-

sen). 14. Please open (var snail och ...) the window.

Carl, I have a headache (huvudvark, or, out i huvudet).

*Hela vagen: the prepositive article is omitted.

VOCABULARY.
alldeles, quite, entirely en lasebok, -bocker, reader
allesammans, all en middag, -ar, noon; dinner
ett ankare, , anchor ett napp, bite
bara, only ndgon, nagot, any
bra, well (often referring to ond, ont, bad, wicked; sore;
health) angry
deklame'ra, I, to declaim redan, already
erne' dan, because, since en rev, -ar, line
en fisk, -ar, fish riktig, -t, right, correct
ett fonster, window rolig, -t, amusing
forkyld' -kylt, having caught en sjo, -ar, lake
a cold sluta, I, to cease
forsik'tig, -t, cautious som pronoun, adv. and
(rel.
handla om, I, to treat about who, like, as
conj.),
hoppa, I, to jump en spegel, -lar, mirror
hog, -t, high (as adv. also stjiilpa, Ha, to upset
aloud) saga, (irr. v.), to say
i gdr, yesterday til'lata (st. v.), to permit
ilia (adv.), bad(ly), too bad tio, ten
jasa', so, is that so tung, -t, heavy
kasta, I,throw to en tur, -er, turn; trip; luck
en krok, -ar, hook uppmarksam, -t, attentive (-ly)
lara, lib, to learn; to teach ur'sakta, I, to excuse
lasa upp', Ha, to recite utantill, by heart

IDIOMS: 1. Det ar roligt, it is fun.

2. Jag ar forkyld, I have caught a cold.
3. Jag har ont i nalsen, I have a sore throat.
Note that long m can be written double only when it is intervocalic. This
principle causes sometimes a dropping of one and m sometimes a doubling :

vppmarksam, becomes vppmarlcsamma in the plural m is here intervocalic;

nummer becomes num-ret in the def. form m is no longer intervocalic.
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 73

LESSON XII.
The Verb (Continued).

THE FOURTH CONJUGATION.

152. This conjugation contains all verbs that
form their imperfect by means of a change of the
vowel of the root without any added tense sign.
There is frequently also a change of vowel in the
supine and past participle. These verbs are called
strong verbs.
The verbs belonging to this conjugation are
divided into two classes.

153. The first class contains verbs the root of

which undergoes but one vowel change. In these
verbs the vowel of the supine and past participle is
the same as that of the infinitive and the vowel of
the plural of the imperfect the same as that of the
singular.

Examples :

INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE

SO. PL.

hdlla, to hold holl hollo hallit hallen, -et

gripa, to seize grep grepo gripit gripen, -et

154. The second class contains verbs the root of

which undergoes two vowel changes. In these the
vowel of the supine and the past participle is always
different from that of the infinitive the vowel of the
;

plural of the imperfect is in most cases the same as

that of the supine, in the case of a few verbs like that
of the singular of the imperfect and different from
that of the supine.
Swedish Grammar 6
 FOURTH CONJUGATION.

Example :

INFINITIVE SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE

 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 75

classes of the Fourth Conjugation: att gripa, to

seize; att finna, to find.

PRINCIPAL PARTS.
INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE
SG. PL.

I. gripa grep grepo gripit grip en, -et

II. finna fann funno funnit funnen, -et
76 EXERCISE.

FUTURE PERFECT.
Sg. jag skall ha gripit, funnit, etc.
PI. vi skola ha gripit, funnit, etc.

IMPERATIVE.
Sg. grip (du, ni) finn (du, ni)
PI. gripom, lat(om)oss gripa finnom, lat(om) oss
finna
gripen (I) finnen (I)
INFINITIVES.
Present, gripa finna
Perfect, ha gripit ha funnit
Future, skola gripa skola finna

EXERCISE XII.
A. Change the present into imperfect in the following:

1. Min bror skriver ett brev till min far, som har farit
till Amerika. Jag bar brevet pa posten. 3. Han far svar
2.

(64, b) pa det. 4. Jag gar till stationen for att mb'ta min
bror. 5. Han kommer pa besb'k hos oss. 6. Taget ankom-

mer ej forran klockan sex, det ar forsenat. 7. Nar ban ser

mig, stiger ban av taget. 8. Han ger sitt handbagage till
en barare 1 och gar med mig. 9. Vi taga en droska och fara
hem. 10. Den sjuke gossen ligger till sangs. 11. Han
sover ganska gott. 12. Det ger honom krafter. 13. Karl
ater for mycket. 14. Han blir sjuk, och vi maste tillkalla
lakaren. 15. Vi ata frukten, som vi fa av Karl. 16. En

haftig storm ntbryter. 17. Vagorna sla over skeppet.

18. Det sjunker pa oppna sjb'n.
J
In Stockholm called stadsbud (neuter). A porter in a hotel is called
hotellvaktmastare.

B. 1. Vi kommo ej till den lilla staden forran sent pa

kvallen, ty vi voro forsenade. 2. Vart tag gick ej fort, och
dessutom stannade det vid alia stationer. 3. Som (as) vi
 EXERCISE. 77
voro trotta, besago vi ej staden, utan gingo direkt till vart

hotell, som lag nara stationen. 4. Vi sovo utmarkt hela

natten, men maste stiga upp klockan sex for att fara vida-
re. 5.Vi hade bett dem vacka oss i tid, men vaknade sja'l-
va. 6. Nar vi hade atit frukost,
begarde vi var rakning.
7. Den var ganska resonabel; vi betalade den samt gavo
8. Nar ni besb'ker staden
drickspengar. X, bor (ought]
ni ga till detta (this) hotell. Jag kan rekommendera det.
C. Conversation. 1. Nar komma vi till Stockholm?
2. Hur manga minuter ar taget forsenat? 3. Tycker ni,
att taget gar fort? 4. Hur manga minuter
stannar taget
vid Alvesta ? 5. Var ligger hotellet, dar ni brukar taga in?
6. Nar skall man va'cka oss i
morgon? 7. Tror ni, att ni
kan vakna sjalv? 8. Har ni sovit gott i natt, herr Arndt?
9. Ar rakningen for hog?
I.I did not come to Vexio before ten o'clock in (pa)
D.
the evening. 2. The train which I was on did not run

very fast, and I believe it stopped at all stations. 3. A

friend of mine (en of mina vanner) had recommended a

small hotel which lies near the station. 4. I gave my hand
baggage to a porter and asked 1 him to show me the way to
the hotel. In the dining room of the hotel (gen. def.)
5.

I had 2 a good supper. 6. An hour later (scnare) I went

to bed and slept well until six o'clock in (pa) the morning,
when they (man) 3
called me. 7. I asked for the bill and

found it very reasonable. 8. At this hotel one gives (invert)

no tips. 9. It is not large but very good (bra), and I
shall recommend it to all my (mina) friends who go (resa,
fara) to Vexio. 10. Vexio is a pleasant little town. It is
situated by (vid) a lake. 11. I did not have time to view
the town for I arrived late (sent) and had to leave early in
the morning.
2
*To ask a question is fraga, to ask a favor is bedja. Uae iHo, and invert.
'Use vdcka.
 78 VOCABULARY.

VOCABULARY.
N. B. Of the strong verbs the following parts are given:
the infinitive, the singular and plural of the imperfect, the
supine, and the gender and neuter forms of the past par-
ticiple, when found.

ankomma, ankom, ankommo, ett hotell', ,

hotel
ankommit, -en, -et, to ar- ligga, Mg, logo, legat, to lie, to
rive be situated
bedja, bad, bddo, bett, bedd, en matsal, -ar, dining room
bett, to pray, to ask en natt, nutter, night
bega'ra, lib, to demand ntira (adv. and prep.), near
beta'la, I la, to pay en post this sense no
(in
bestf, besdg, besdgo, besett,
pi.), mail, post office
besedd, -sett, to look at,
rekommende'ra, I, to recom-
view
mend
bliva, blev, blevo, blivit, -en,
-et, become; to remain resona'bel, -t, reasonable
to
broder, en rdkning, -ar,
en broder bill
(bror),
brother se s &9, Sa 9> sett - dd ~ ett
< > > >

to see
bdra, bar, buro, burit, -en,
-et, to carry, to bear ett skepp, , ship
en bdrare, , porter skriva, skrev, skrevo, skrivit,
direkt', direct (ly) -en, -et, to write
drickspengar (always pi.), tip, sjunka, sjonk, sjonko, sjunkit,
tips -en, -et, to sink
en droska, -or, cab
sld, slog, slogo, slagit, -en, -et,
fara, for, foro, farit, -en, -et, strike
to travel, to drive, to go
sld over, to wash over
fa, ftck, fingo, fdtt, to get, to
sova, sov, sovo, sovit, to sleep
receive
en station', -er, station
forrdn (adv.), before
stiga, steg, stego, stigit, -en,
forse'nad, -t, belated, late
-et, to step; to rise
(train)
giva (also ge), gav, gdvo, stiga upp', to rise, to get up
givit (gett), -en, -et, to give en supe, supeer, supper
taga, tog, togo, tagit, -en, -et, to
gd, gick, gingo, gdtt, gdngen,
-et, to go (run)
take
ett handbagage (-gash'; no tiU'kalla, I, to call (in)
pi.),hand baggage ett tag, ,
train
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 79

ut'bryta, utbrot, utbroto, utbru-viicka (tr. v.), Ha, to wake

tit, -en, -et, to break out Ufa, dt, dto, iitit, -en, -et, to eat
vidare, further
IDIOMS: 1. att bedja om en sale, to ask for a thing.
2. att Mra (lagga) pd posten, to mail.
3. Har posten Commit? Has the mail come?
4. Vad (ir Jclockan? What time is it? Klockan (ir

sex. It is six o'clock.

5. att visa vagen, to show the way.

LESSON XIII.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
REMARK. Note the
tendency of substituting compound
forms for the simple subjunctive.

PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE.
The simple present subjunctive of all per-
158.
sons, except the archaic second person plural, is
formed by adding -e to the stem. The archaic second
person plural ends in -en. Much more common is
the compound form with ma.
NOTE. Verbs the infinitive of which ends in any other vowel than a lack the
simple present subjunctive. These include all verbs of the Third Conjugation
and a few others as, ga, to go std, to stand le, to smile ; etc.
; ; ;

159. Examples of the present subjunctive: att

vara, to be; att alska, to love; att tro, to believe.
SINGULAR.

^}Imd
r
l
vare,
.
vara, ^ (ma alska,
?*
Han]
matte vara ^
han]
matte alska, f
han
tro

PLURAL.
vi 1vare, vi dlske, v
] tro
ni \ma vara, ni \ ma alska, ni
[T0
de } matte vara de } matte alska de
80 SUBJUNCTIVE.

f varen, f dlsken, f
m&n tro
1 4 man vara, 1 1 man alska, 1 1
matten {ro
[ mdtten vara [ mdtten alska

160. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

In verbs of the Fourth Conjugation the sim-
(1)
ple imperfect subjunctive is formed by changing the
ending -o of the plural of the imperfect indicative
to -e (the archaic second person plural having the
additional ending -n) The vowel of both numbers
.

of the imperfect subjunctive is thus the same as

that of the plural of the imperfect indicative.
NOTE. The singular of the imperfect indicative of the Fourth Conjugation is

often used instead of the impf. subjunctive.

(2) In the First, Second, and Third Conjugations

the simple imperfect subjunctive is identical with
the imperfect indicative.

(3) Compound forms consisting of the imperfect

of skall, skulle, are of very common occurrence.

161. Examples of the imperfect subjunctive of

the verbs binda, to bind vara, to be alska, to love.
; ;

INFINITIVE IMPERFECT SUPINE PAST PARTICIPLE

SO. PL.

binda band bundo bundit bunden, -et

vara var voro varit
alska alskade alskade dlskat dlskad, -at

Sg. jag bunde, skulle binda, etc.

PI. vi bunde, skulle binda, etc.

Sg. jag vore, skulle vara, etc.

PI. vi vore, skulle vara, etc.

Sg. jag alskade, skulle alska, etc.

PI. vi alskade, skulle alska, etc.
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 81

162. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

(a) The perfect subjunctive is formed by com-
bining the present or the imperfect of the auxiliary
md with the perfect infinitive.
(b) The pluperfect subjunctive is either identical
with the indicative or formed by combining the im-
perfect of skall, skulle, with the perfect infinitive.
Examples of the perfect and pluperfect subjunc-
and vara.
tives of the verbs skriva

PERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
Sg. jag ma or matte ha jag ma or matte ha varit,
skrivit, etc. etc.
PL vi ma or matte ha vi ma or matte ha varit,
skrivit, etc. etc.

PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
Sg. jag hade skrivit, or jag hade varit, or
jag skulle ha skrivit jag skulle ha varit
PI. vi hade skrivit, or vi hade varit, or
vi skulle ha skrivit vi skulle ha varit

USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

163. Classification of uses. The subjunctive
which marks in general the absence of direct or
positive assertion is used regularly in statements

of doubtful reality; such as wish, request, purpose,

concession, possibility.

SUBJUNCTIVE OF WISH.
164.
(a) A
realizable wish is expressed by the simple
present subjunctive, or by the compound form with
md and matte, md implying greater and matte less
confidence in the realization of the wish.
82 SUBJUNCTIVE.

Ex. Give Gud dig hdlsa; also, ma or matte Gud

giva dig hdlsa! May God give you health. Matte
han vara hdr! Would he were here! Vi matte vdl
komma i tid till tdget! I do wish we might come
in time for the train.
NOTE. The wish may sometimes have the force of a command : Gud sade :
"Varde Ijus !"God said, "Let there be light."

(b) A
wish which refers to the present and which
is not
at least not immediately realizable is
expressed by the simple imperfect subjunctive; a
similar wish referring to the past, by the pluperfect
subjunctive.

Ex. Ack, om jag vore ung igen! Would I were

young again !
0, att han vore hdr! Would he were
here Hade jag blott vingar! If I only had wings
! !

Hade jag blott haft en enda van! Had I only had

a single friend!
NOTE 1. The simple imperfect subjunctive may also express a very vivid
wish referring to the future: Ack, om del snart vore vdr I O that spring were
here!
2. Note the use of ack, om..., o, aft... with the sense of would (that)

Closely related to the subjunctive of wish are the

subjunctives of purpose and concession.

165. SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE.

The compound subjunctive with ma and matte is

used in clauses expressing purpose with the con-

junctions att, pa det att, sa att, in order that. After
a past tense the subjunctive with skulle may be used.
Bed till Gud, att han ma (matte) beskydda
Ex.
oss, pray to God that he may protect us; han skyn-
dade sig, sa att han skulle vara fdrdig, he hurried
in order that he might be ready.
 EXERCISE. 83

NOTE 1. The compound subjunctive (sometimes the indicative) of fa, may

(permission), and kunna, can (ability, possibilty), are often used in a purpose
clause if permission or ability is implied: han bad barnen vara tysta, sa att
han skulle fa sova, he asked the children to be quiet in order that he might
sleep han studerade svenska flitigt, sa att han skulle kunna tala del flytande,
;

he studied Swedish diligently in order that he might speak it fluently.

If the subject of the purpose clause
2. ia the same as that of the principal
clause the infinitive with for att (149, e) is used: herr Vallner or ej hemma.
han har rest till Stockholm for att besoka sin sjuka bror, Mr. Vallner is not
at home ; he has gone to Stockholm to visit his sick brother.

166. SUBJUNCTIVE OF CONCESSION.

Concession expressed by the subjunctive with
is

ma (not matte) Ex. Det ma sa vara, that may be

. : ;

nu ma fienderna komma, now the enemy may come.

NOTE. Note the concessive subjunctive in vare sig du vill eller ej, whether
you wish or not vi skola ga, vare sig han kommer eller ej, we shall go whether
;

he comes or not. The expression vare fig (let it be for itself) has practically
become a conjunction meaning whether.

167. THE POTENTIAL SUBJUNCTIVE,

or subjunc-
tive of possibility, indicates
merely the possibility
that an action may occur, without any reference to
its probability kanhdnda vore det sa gott att borja
:

arbetet med detsamma, perhaps it would be well to

begin the work immediately med din hjalp formad- ;

de jag nog go'ra det, with your help, I should be

able to do it, no doubt det kunde vara sant, it might
;

be true.
NOTE. Absolute possibility is denoted by kan (sometimes ma). See Senses
of Modals (255, b). Ex.: det kan vara sant, it may possibly be true; a very
vivid probability is denoted by matte: det matte vara mamma, som kommer ;
it must be mother who comes.

EXERCISE XIII.
1
A. Nagon knackar pa db'rren; det matte vara brev-
1.

bararen, ty han kommer alltid vid derma tid. 2. Jag 6ns-

kar, att det vore han och att han hade med sig en postanvis-
ning hemifran, sa att jag kunde betala min inackordering
2
84 EXERCISE.

och min skolavgift. 3. Vore 3 man bara rik och ej en fat-

tig studerande! 4. Nej, det ar inte brevbararen, utan ett

telegrambud. 5. Matte 4 de ej vara sjuka dar hemma!
6. Vem ha trott det! Min bror Kobert, som reste
skulle 5
tillBrasilien for att gb'ra 6 sin lycka, bar kommit tillbaka,
och nu onska mina foraldrar, att jag matte 4 resa hem pa
7. Ack, om jag bara kande
nagon, som
7
ett par dagar.
resa med
2
ville mig hundra
lana kroner, sa. att jag kunde
detsamma. 8. Vore 1
det ej battre, att du sande dem ett
telegram och bade dem- om pengar ? 9. Jag skulle sa garna
vilja lana dig, nien jag bar tyvarr inga. 10. Har kommer
brevbararen med ett rekommenderat brev. Matte 4 det bara
innehalla nog pengar, sa att jag ma 2
kunna betala mina
skulder och resa hem.
! r 4 B T
ne?, note. 165, 1. 164, b, 1. 164, a. 167. 165, 2. 164 b, 2.

B. Conversation. 1. Vem tror ni det ar, som knackar

pa dorren? 2. Varfor formodar (suppose) ni, att det ar
brevbararen? 3. Vad b'nskar ni, att ban medforde (brought

along) ? 4. Varfor ville

1
ni garna ha en postanvisning hem-
if ran ? 5. Vad ville ni hellre vara an en f attig studerande ?
6. Vad nyheter (news) innehb'll telegrammet? 7. Varfor

hade er bror rest till Brasilien ? 8. Vad ville era foraldrar,

att ni skulle gora ? 9. Varfor kunde ni icke resa med det-
samma? 10. Vad tjanst hade er kamrat gjort er, om ban
hade haft pengar?
1
Impf. subjunctive (like the indicative) ; vilja giirna, to like.

C. 1. Somebody must be knocking at the door. Would

you go and open? 2. I wish it were (164, b, 1) the post-

man, for I expect a money order or a registered letter from

home. 3. Only a common letter! I wish that it might
contain 1 money, for I am entirely without (any). 4. If my

parents would only send me some money soon so that I

2

could pay (A, 2) my debts. I owe both for board and

 VOCABULARY. 85

tuition. 5. Who would (skulle) have believed that he

would return so soon. 6. Father (min far) writes that
brother Robert has returned from Brazil in order to cele-
brate (165, 2) Christmas at home. 7. Mother wishes that
I too might come (164, a) home, and they promise that

they will send money in a few days (om ndgra dagar).

Let us study diligently so that our teacher may

D. 1.
3
praise (165) us. 2. Let us hope that it may not rain , for
we have no umbrellas. 3. The old woman asked me to give
her something 4 . 4. I did so and she said, "May God bless
the good gentleman." 5. The children eat breakfast very

early that they may be in school on time (i tid). 6. Be

your poor father may sleep (far
quiet, children, so that
sow, 165, 1). wish 7. We
that he might come (164, a) ;
but whether (166, note) he comes or not, we shall go.
8. If we had only not gone out! But who could believe
that he would (skutte) come. 9. Their father required

(fordrade) that they come 5

home early. But he may (ma,
kan) say what he will, they do not obey. 10. What he says
might (167) be true. Would that what he says were
(164, b, 2) true.
Use the impf. subjunctive of innehalla (164, b, 1). 2 0m minaforaldrar bara
1

ville, etc. *Pres. indie, may be used, translate two ways: literally and "asked
that I", etc. 5
After a verb of command Swedish often uses the modal auxiliary
skola with the pres. inf. (not to be confused with skoltt in its use as an
auxiliary of the future).

VOCABULARY.
alldeles, altogether, entirely en brevbdrare, ,
-arna (def.
bara, only pi.) letter carrier

befal'la, lib, to order, to com- darhemma, at home

mand fattig, -t, poor
beromma, lib, impf. beromde fira, I, to celebrate
(see 103,- note 3), to Jiemifrdn, from home
praise en herre, -ar, gentleman
86 IRREGULAR VERBS.

hoppas, I, (deponent v.), to rekommende'rad, -rat, regis-

hope tered
en in'ackorde'ring, -ar, board
, , en skolavgift, -er, tuition
and room (or board on-
,

, . . , en skuld, -er, debt; guilt

ly)
'
boarder
> -L.31T*. skyldig, -t, in debt; guilty
tn'neMlla, -holl, -hollo, -halht,
, . vara skyldig, to owe
-en, -et, to contain
.
m._t_i
, stackers (indeclinable), poor
en Christmas
jul, -ar,
(in the sense of pitiable)
komma, kom, kommo, kom-
mit, -en, -et, to come. en studerande. , a student
iova, I, to promise ett telegram', , telegram
en lycka (no pi.), fortune, ett telegrambud, , telegraph
happiness messenger
lyda, lib, to obey
med detsamma, immediately
en ^^ ,f
time
ear i y
nog, enough; I am sure; cer-
tjug
certainly
tyst, , quiet, silent
ndgon, some (one), pi. nagra, utan (ady prep ^ and CQnj }>
some, any, a few
butj without
ocksd, also
en postanvisning, -ar, postal vanlig, -t, common, usual
money order valsigna, I, to bless

IDIOM: Det ar nog han som kommer, it is very likely he that

is coming.

LESSON XIV.
The Verb (Continued).

IRREGULARITIES OF VERBS.

168. Some verbs of the second class of the Second

Conjugation which are derived from other words by
means of the suffix -ja drop j in the imperfect,
supine,and past participle in which forms the cor-
responding hard vowel generally reappears. The
most common of these verbs are:
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 8?

INFINITIVE PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PART.

: 2
gladja, to gladden gldder gladde glatt gladd
salja, to sell saljer salde salt said
skilja, to separate skiljer skilde skilt skild
smorja, to grease, oil smorjer smorde smort smord
sporja, to ask, learn sporjer sporde sport spord
vdlja, to choose, elect vdljer valde valt vald
vanja, to accustom vanjer vande vant vand
^lur. gladja. "The neuter is glatt, ST.lt, skilt, etc. (Ill, 3).

169. Such a change of vowel occurs also in the

following very common verbs :

INFINITIVE PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PAET.

bringa, to bring
]

bringar bragte bragt bragt

gb'ra, to do gor gjorde gjort gjord
Idgga, to lay lagger lade lagt lagd
2
saga, to say sdger sade sagt sagd
sdtta, to set, put sdtter satte satt satt
toras, to dare tor(e)s tordes torts
2
1
The neuter is bragt, lagt, satt, etc., (Ill, 3). Commonly pronounced sdja.

170. There are besides a small number of verbs

which are entirely irregular. The most important
of these are:
INFINITIVE PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE P. PART.
su.

bedja, to ask, pray bcder, ber bad

do, to die dor dog
fd, to get, receive far fick
gd, to go gdr gick
komma, to come kommer kom
heta, to be called heter hette
le, smile ler log
leva, to live lever levde
ligga, to lie ligger Idg
se, to see ser sag
sZ<$, to strike sldr slog
88 UNREAL CONDITIONS.
INFINITIVE
 EXERCISE. 81)

EXERCISE XIV.
A.
Complete the following by adding a clause express-
ing condition or conclusion.
1. Hade jag black och penna, sa 2. ban hade . . . Om
tid, sa . . . 3. Om jag inte vore sa trott, sa . . . 4. Om
hon icke vore Det skulle vara mycket
f orkyld, sa . . . 5.

trevligt, om 6. Regnar det i morgon, sa

. . . 7. De . . .

bade garna gatt med oss, om 8. Jag skulle ha rest till . . .

Stockholm, om . . .

B. 1. Skulle ni gora en resa till Sverige, om ni hade

tillfalle? Det skulle jag visst gora! Om min bror ej

2.

hade blivit sjuk sa hastigt, hade jag rest for en manad se-
dan. 3. Om jag visste, att ban snart skulle bli bra, sa

skulle jag losa biljett mi. 4. Senare blir det svart att fa

en, ty batarna aro sa upptagna pa sommaren. 5. Vart liar

Karl gatt? Han bar gatt for att kopa morgontidningen,

som du bad om. 6. Jag bar en nyhet, som sakert skall

gladja dig. Jag sag var gamle van Agrell pa gatan i mor-
se. 7. Han hade just anlant med londonangaren och sade,
ban pa hos dig i dag, om ban finge tid.
1
att skulle balsa
8. Han talade, som om ban hade gjort goda affarer i Eng-

land och fortjant mycket pengar. 9. Vet du om herr An-

derson bar salt sin lilla villa vid Djursholm ? 10. Ja, han
salde den i gar och rick mer, an han hade betalt for den.
11. Om han ej hade salt den, sa skulle jag ha hyrt den
for sommaren. 12. Hade Karl onskat det, sa hade man

sakert valt honom till ordforande i foreningen. 13. Vein

valde man i stallet? Det vet jag ej, men Karl sade, att
2

han skulle fb'resla herr Lindell.

^H'dlsapa with main stress on pa, signifies to pay a visit, with stress on hatsa
it means to greet. 2 Notice word order, det tror jag ej ; det generally comea
first in expressions of this kind.

C. Conversation. 1. Vad skulle ni gora, om ni hade till-

falle? 2. Varfor reste ni ej for en manad sedan? 3. Var-

Swedish Grammar. 7
90 EXERCISE.

for skulle det vara fordelaktigt (advantageous) att losa

biljett nu? 4. Nar

aro batarna mest upptagna? 5. Vad
vill du, att Karl skall gora for dig? 6. Var har du lagt tid-

ningen ? 7. Vad har var van Anderson gjort med sin prak-
tiga (fine) villa vidDjursholm? 8. Bor ban ej pa landet
om somrarna langre? 9. Yad skulle du ha gjort, om ban
ej hade salt den? 10. Varfor valde man ej Karl till ord-
forande i klubben? 11. Hade man valt honom, om ban
hade b'nskat det?

D. I should like 1 to take a trip (B, 1) to Sweden

1.

next summer. 2. If I had money and time I should cer-

tainly go with you. 3. Would it not be fine (trevligt),
if you could accompany me? 4. You could not choose a
better (bdttre) occasion. 5. I should do it if I could only

sell my house. 6. We should also of course visit Germany

and England. 7. I think you would enjoy yourself very
much in Stockholm. 8. My wife does not dare to go along ;
she is afraid of 2 the passage. 9. I never get (bJir) sea-sick;

I have grown accustomed 3 to (vid) the sea. 10. Have you

heard whether Mr. Anderson will go 4 ? 11. He would have
gone a month ago, if he had gotten a ticket. 12. Why did
he not get a ticket? The boats were all full, I think (tror
jag). 13. The news, which you brought me about Agrell
made me very happy. 14. I thought that he had died long
ago. 15. We used to be very good friends and I was sure

(saker pa) that he would have written me, had he been

alive
5
16. He has been in England ever (anda) since he
.

leftStockholm, but now it looks as if he intended to stay in

Sweden. 17. I am glad to hear that. I wish he would call
so that we might have a chat.
*Skvlle garna or skulle tycka om att. *To be afraid of- att vara radd for.
To grow accustomed att vanja sig vid; accustomed to, van vid. 'English go
3

must often be translated by resa, fara, Ska. 5 Use the pluperfect subjunctive of
leva.
 VOCABULARY. 91

VOCABULARY.
en affar, -er, business med (prep, and adv.), with,
arilanda, lib, -nde, -nt, -nd, along
-nt, to arrive en mor'gontid'ning, -ar, a
ett black, , ink morning paper
bruka, I, to use, make use of en mdnad, -er, month
folja, lib, to follow en nyhet, -er, news
folja med', to accompany en ord'forande, chairman ,

en fore'ning, -ar, society en penna, -or, pen

fo'resld, -slog, -slogo, -slagit, rtidd (no neuter), afraid,
-en, -et, to propose timid
fortja'na, I, to earn, make sjosjuk, -t, sea-sick
(money) i stdllet, in the place of
en gata, -or, street svdr, -t, difficult

glcidja (168), to gladden, make sdker, -t, sure, certain

happy helt sdkert, certainly
hastig, -t, rapid, quick, sudden ett tillfdlle, -n, chance, oppor-
hastigt (adv.), rapidly, sud- tunity; occasion
denly trevlig, -t, pleasant, fine
hyra, lib, rent, hire upptagen, -et, occupied, full
i morse, this morning visst (adv.), surely, certainly
just (adv.), just an, yet, than
en londondngare, -arna, Lon- en overresa, -or, voyage, pas-
don steamer sage

IDIOMS: 1. Han har nyss kommit, he has just come

2. ha mycket roligt, to enjoy oneself very much.
att
3. Det gldder mig, I am happy (or pleased)
4. Man har valt honom till president, he has been
elected president
5. Han ar rddd for spoken, he is afraid of ghosts.
 POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.

LESSON XV.
The Possessive Adjectives and Pronouns.

172. The possessive adjectives and pronouns are :

SINGULAR PLURAL
MASC. FEM. NEUTER ALL GENDERS
ram . mitt mina, my
din ditt dina, thy, your
(hans) (hans) (hans) , his
(hennes) (hennes) (hennes), her
(dess) (dess) (dess), its (gen. of den, det)
var vdrt vara, our .

eder (er) edert (ert) edra (era), your

(deras) (deras) (deras), their
sin sitt sina, his, her, its, their

173. The
genitive of the corresponding personal
pronoun used as a possessive in the third person
is

masculine, feminine, and neuter. These forms are

invariable. The other possessives are declined ac-
cording to the Indefinite Declension of adjectives
and agree in gender and number with the noun they
modify. Ex. ram son, my son mitt barn, my child
: ; ;

mina backer, my books; hennes son, her son; hans

backer, his books.

174. The reflexive possessive sin is used, for all

numbers and genders of the third person but must
be used only when the possessor is the subject of
the verb as, Karl tog sin hatt, Carl took his (own)
;

hat; but, Karl tog hans hatt, would mean that he

took somebody else's hat. Gossarna visade sina lek-
saker, the boys showed their (own) toys; gossarna
visade deras leksaker, the boys showed the toys of
some other children.
 POSITIONS OF ADVKKBS. 93

175. The possessives are used also as pronouns;

as,hdr dr ram bok, din ligger ddr, here is my book,
yours lies there; mina ogon tiro bid, era tiro bruna,
my eyes are blue, yours are brown.
FURTHER REMARKS ON THE POSSESSIVE.
176. The possessives are often combined with
the adjective egen, eget, pi. egna, own; as, mina
egna ord, my own words.
177. They are never preceded by the article
except in such expressions as de dina, your family,
:

people; de mina, my family, people; de vdra, our

family or our party.
178. SUBSTITUTE FOR THE POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.
The definite form
often used instead of the pos-
is

sessive adjective, provided there is no ambiguity,

particularly when the thing possessed is a part of
the body or an article of clothing; as, han har fb'r-
lorat hatten, he has lost his hat jag har ont i hjar-
;

tat, 1 have a pain in my heart.

NOTE. The possessor especially in reflexive constructions is often represented
by an object pronoun han brot av sig benet, he broke his leg tag av dig
1

:
;

hatten, take off your hat han foil och slog sig i huvudet, he fell and struck
;

his head.

POSITION OF ADVERBS.
179. The position of the adverb in a sentence
depends largely on its relation to the verb and
also on emphasis. Only a few special rules need be
given.
(a) There are in Swedish a number of adverbs
which are called movable adverbs. In an independ-
ent clause these follow the simple verb and stand
between the auxiliary and infinitive or participle
94 EXERCISI:.

in compound tenses. In a dependent clause these

adverbs precede the simple verb and the auxiliary
of a compound verb. Such movable adverbs are
especially the adverbs of negation: ej, Icke, inte,
not; aldrig, never; certain indefinite temporal ad-
verbs, as, alltid, always; jdmt, continually; snart,
soon; ndgonsin, ever; a number of other non-
descriptive adverbs like vdl, I suppose; nog, possi-
bly, to be sure
tyvtirr, unfortunately.
; Ex. han dr :

icke sjuk, he not sick han sager, att han icke dr

is ;

sjuk, he says he is not sick hans bror reste snart till ;

Amerika, his brother soon went to America; hans

bror, som snart reste till Amerika, his brother, who
soon went to America han kan nog ha rdtt, he may
;

possibly be right; jag medger, att han nog kan ha

rdtt, I admit, that he may possibly be right.

(b) Descriptive adverbs as a rule follow the in-

finitive or the participle when the verb is a com-
pound. No adverbs except those mentioned above
can stand between the verb and the subject: he
often used to come is in Swedish, han brukade ofta
komma.
EXERCISE XV.
A. Turn ihe following sentences into dependent clauses
by prefixing the parenthesized words, noting the change of
position of the adverbs.
1. (Han sager, att . .
.) Han har aldrig satt vete pa sin
aker. 2. (Jag tror, att . . .
)
De amna inte annu plantera
sin potatis. 3. (Lantbrukaren sade, att . . .
) Man maste
forst uppluckra jorden med en harv. innan man kan sa.
4. (Jag ar saker pa att )
. . . Vetet kan aldrig vaxa utan
regn och solsken. 5. (Sager ni, att . . .
?) Ni skola sakert
 EXERCISE, 95

plantera er potatis och er majs nasta vecka. 6. (Vet ni

om ?) De skola snart sa sin havre.

. . . 7. (Jag fruktar,

att )
Det daliga vadret kommer mojligen att forhindra
. . .

arbetet pa falten.

B. Supply the possessive adjectives and pronouns indi-

cated in the following. 1. Har ar (our) hus, dar ar . . .

2. Herr Wallin ar en av ...

... (his). (my) vanner.
3. Fonstren till . . .
(her) rum aro stora. 4. Huru manga
rum har . . .
(your) hus? 5. Karl har givit mig . . .
(his)
1

pengar. 6. Ha barnen fatt 1

(their) laxor an? . . . 7. Pas-
sa (your) skor?
. . . 8. ... (his) rock passar honom.
9. Jag har funnit . . .
(my) bocker. 10. Var aro . . .

(yours, polite). 11. ... (their) faders tradgard ar stor,

men . . .
(his) hus ar mycket litet. 12. Han tycker om
(our) matsal, men ej om De ha
1
. . .
(his own) 13. . . . .

2 1
lagt (my) bocker pa ... (their) bord (sing).
. . .

1 2
174. Supine of lagga, to lay (169).

C. 1. I morgon om vadret ar vackert, skola vi foretaga

var utflykt. 2. Mamma skall packa vara korgar i kvall,

pa det att (3d att and subj. or indie.) de ma vara fardiga

tidigt i morgon. 3. Hennes syster, som ar pa besb'k i vart
1

hem med dotter, skall folja med oss. 4. Vi tycka

2
sin lilla

mycket om
deras sallskap och onska, att de matte stanna

lange hos oss. 5. Vi skola stiga upp mycket tidigt och fara
med den elektriska sparvagnen till jarnvagsstationen.
6. komma dit, gar en av oss till biljettkontoret och
Na'r vi

koper vara jarnvagsbiljetter, och sedan stiga vi pa taget.

7. Efter en halv timmes resa stiga vi av och ga till en

vacker plats i
skogen. Var och en bar
sitt paket eller sin

korg. 8. Dar packa upp vara korgar ochviduka pa graset,

medan en av edra systrar kokar kaffet. 9. Nar vi atit och
druckit, springa vi omkring och leka. 10. Flickorna ploc-
96 EXERCISE.

ka blommor och pry da med dem sina3 hattar. 11. Pa kval-

len taga vi taget tillbaka till staden. 12. Matte det bara
ej regna i
morgon! 13. Min bror Erik klader (klar) sig.
14. Han tvattar sig om handerna 4 och i ansiktet, borstar
tanderna samt kammar haret. 15. Sedan tar ban pa sig
rocken, satter pa sig batten och ar fardig att ga ut.
2
*Is visiting. Plural and definite form of liten. 'Express the possessive idea
4
in a different way (178). Also, tvattar handerna och ansiktet.

D. Conversation. 1. Nar gora ni er utflykt ? 2. Varfor

packade er mor edra korgar pa kvallen? 3. Vem var pa
besb'k hos er? 4. Behagar deras sallskap er? 5. Hur

komma ni till stationen? 6. Ar det en hastsparvagn eller

en elektrisk sparvagn? 7. Varfor gar ni till biljettkonto-
ret? 8. Hur lange racker resan? 9. Tad gora ni med

korgarna? 10. Vad gora ni efter maten? 11. Varmed

pryda flickorna sina hattar?

E. I.I wish that

all our picnics might be as (sd) agree-

able as (som) ours was yesterday. 2. The weather was not

1
very pleasant when we woke up, but the sun soon began
to shine. 3. Mother had packed our baskets 'in (pa) the

evening in order that they might be ready early in the

4. Her sister who is on a visit with (hos) us
2
morning .

likes to go on (med pa) excursions. 5. We took the street

we had much to carry. 6. When we
car to the station since
had bought our tickets we boarded (invert) the train and
rode (for) half an hour (en lialv timma). 7. We un-

packed our baskets in the woods and set the table in the

grass. 8. Who made the coffee? My sister Mary. She

makes (kokar) very good coffee. 9. When we had eaten we
had a great deal of fun (mycket roligt), we played games
and sang. 10. In the evening we returned to the city by
train. 11. I wish that you had been with us.
 VOCABULARY.

F. 1. Wash 3 your hands and brush your teeth, Eric.

2. Put on your coat and ^at. Carl, and let us go out.
3. Where do you have your hat? 4. Does he have his own

(176) hat or mine? 5. Take off your (178, note) hat

when you come into the room. 6. Eric struck Carl in the
head. 7. Carl struck his head while ( medan) he was
skating.
J
In English adverbs may often precede the simple form of a verb, in Swedish
z
never, except as stated in 179, a. lidigt pa morgonen; sent pa kvdllen, late
in the evening. 3
Tviitta dig om handerna (B, 14).

VOCABULARY.
ett ansikte, -n, face en mamma, -or, mother
ett besok, , visit mamma (in address), mama
en biljett', -er, ticket omkring (adv. and prep.) about,
ett biljett'kontor', , ticket around
office packa, I, to pack
borsta, I, to brush packa upp', to unpack
driclca, dracJc, drucJco, druc- en plats, -er, place
kit, -en, -et, to drink passa, I, to fit, to suit
dnka, I, to set the table pryda, lib, to adorn
elektrisk, -t, electric en rock, -ar, coat
fara tillbaka, to return ett rum, , room
finna, fann, funno, funnit, -en, sedan, thereupon, then
-et, to find sjunga, sjo'ng, sjo'ngo, sjungit,
fardig, -t, ready -en, -et, to sing
folja, lib, to follow sld, slog, slogo, slagit, -en, -et,

folia med', to accompany to strike

(ett) gras, grass , snart, soon

en hand, hander, hand en skog, -ar, forest, woods
en hatt, -ar, hat springa, sprang, sprungo,
ett hdr, ,
hair sprungit, -en, -et, to run
(ett) kaffe (generally no pi.) ett sallskap, , company
coffee satta, satte, satte, satt, satt, to
kamma, I, to comb put
koka, I, to cook (to make), en tand, tander, tooth
to boil tidig, -t, early
en korg, -ar, basket tvatta, I, to wash
leka, I la, to play en utflykt, -er, excursion
98 PASSIVE.

IDIOMS: 1. Vi hade mycket roligt, we enjoyed ourselves very

much.
2. att tvatta sig om hdnderna, i ansiktet to wash
one's hands, face.
3. att stiga pa (av) tdget, to get on (off) the train.
5. att koka kaffe, to mafce coffee.

LESSON XVI.
The Verb (Continued).

THE PASSIVE.

The passive is formed from the active

180.
either by adding s to the corresponding form of the
active, or by combining the corresponding tense of
the auxiliary bliva (sometimes vara and varda)
with the perfect participle of the verb.

THE PASSIVE IN -S.

181. This passive

is less in conversationcommon
than that formed by means of the auxiliary verb
bliva, for which see 188. This -s is a remnant of
the reflexive pronoun sig (old form sik) extended
by analogy to the first and second persons.
NOTE 1. The r in the present indicative singular endings -or, -er, -r is al-

ways eliminated and quite often the e in the ending -er ; as, active jag kailar,
1

passive jag kallas, I am called ; active jag griper, passive jag gripes, I am
seized ; del finnes or del finns, there is found or there is.

2. The pres. ind. pi. (with the exception of the arnhaic second person in
-en*) of the Second and Fourth Conjugations ends in -as (.s is added" to the
corresponding active form) and not in -es, an error to which beginners are
liable: mdnniskor finnas, there are. (are found) men.

3. In the compound forms s is added to the supine or infinitive: han har

dodats, he has been killed
rdgen skall sas (from *d) t morgon, the rye will be
;

sown to-morrow.

182. Examples of the passive of the verbs att

kalla, to call ; att gripa, to seize ; att binda, to bind.
 PASSIVE. 99

(I) kallas, to be called.

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT

Sg. jag kallas, etc. jag kalles or ma kallas, etc.

PL vi kallas, etc. vi kalles or ma kallas, etc.
IMPERFECT

Sg. jag kallades, etc. jag kallades or matte,

skulle kallas, etc.
PI. vi kallades, etc. vi kallades or matte, skulle
kallas, etc.
FUTURE
Sg. jag skall kallas
PL vi skola kallas

Sg. jag har kallats, etc. jag ma ha kallats, etc.

PI. vi ha kallats, etc. vi ma ha kallats, etc.
PLUPERFECT

Sg. jag hade kallats, etc. jag hade kallats or matte

ha kallats, etc.
PI. vi hade kallats, etc. vi hade kallats, or matte
ha kallats, etc.
FUTURE PERFECT

Sg. jag skall ha kallats, etc.

PI. vi skola ha kallats, etc.
INFINITIVES

Present, att kallas

Perfect, att ha kallats
Future, att skola kallas

(2) gripas, to be seized bindas, to be bound

PRINCIPAL PARTS

g*-ipa, grep, grepo, gripit, binda, band, bundo,

gripen bun-dit, bunden
100 PASSIVE.

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT

Sg. jag gripes, bindes jag gripes, bindes

PI. vi gripas, bindas vi gripes, bindes
IMPERFECT

Sg. jag greps, bands jag grepes, bundes

PI. vi grepos, bundos vi grepes, bundes
The compound forms are conjugated like kalla;
thus, jag ma bindas, matte bindas; vi matte ha
bundits; vi skola bindas; de ha gripits, etc.
NOTE. In verbs with present in -er e is very often eliminated in conversa-
tion ; thus jag grips, I am seized ; jag hijrs, I am heard.

REMARKS ON THE PASSIVE.

The agent of a passive action is expressed

183.
by the preposition av. The agent may be either
personal or impersonal. Instrument is usually
expressed by med (medelst) : han dodades av sin
fiende med ett svdrd, he was killed by his enemy
with a sword.
184. SUBSTITUTE FOR THE PASSIVE. When some
personal agent is implied but not expressed, Swe-
dish prefers the indefinite pronoun man, one, they,
with the active voice; as, man kallar mig, instead
of jag kallas, I am being called; man sager or det
sages, it is said.
NOTE. Sometimes a reflexive construction is employed ; thus, blyet bojer sig
Idtt (blyet bojes latt), lead is easily bent (can easily be bent). This con-
struction generally conveys an idea of possibility.

185. THE APPARENT OR FALSE PASSIVE.

Since English uses the verb to be and the past
participle to represent the subject both as under-
going the action of the verb, as in the door is shut
 PASSIVE. 101

(is being shut), which is a real passive, and also as

being in the state or condition resulting from the
action, as in the door is shut (has been shut before),
which may be called a false passive, great care must
be taken to distinguish between the true passive and
the apparent or false passive. The latter is expressed
in Swedish by vara, to be, and the past participle
of the verb, which as any other adjective agrees
with the subject in number and gender; as, dorr en
ar stdngd, the door is (in the state of being) shut;
do'rren stdnges, or man stdnger do'rren, the door
is being closed.

186. IDIOMATIC MEANINGS OF THE PASSIVE.

(a) The passive

in -s has very often a reciprocal
meaning. Ex. de motas ofta, they meet one another
:

often (literally, they are met often) barnen klap- ;

pas och kyssas, the children caress and kiss one

another (literally, are caressed, etc.).

(b) Sometimes
used absolutely, denoting
it is

habit, characteristics, etc.Ex.: Hasten bits (pro-

nounced with short i) the horse bites (has the habit
,

of biting) pappa, Karl knuffas, papa, Carl is push-

;

ing me.
XOTE 1. It is best to avoid using the -s form of a verb which is often used
in reciprocal or even absolute sense when it is not accompanied by an
the
agent or other modifier which obviates the ambiguity de knvffades can hardly;

mean anything than they pushed one another, (reciprocal) or, they pushed
else

(absolute); on the contrary, de knuffades. .av honom, or, ...at sidan, they
.

were pushed... by him, or... to the side, have passive force. In the first case
\ve would invariably say, de blevo knuffade. (The teacher should give other
examples.)
2. When used in the absolute sense verbs of the Second and Fourth Conjuga-
tions take -s, not -es (181, 1) there is also a shortening of the vowel: katten
;

rivs (pronounced with short t), the cat scratches ; rives would mean t* being
torn. The passive in its true as well as its reciprocal use generally takes -es

nd there is no shortening of the vowel.

] 02 EXERCISE.

187. IMPERSONAL PASSIVE.

The passive voice, especially the form in -s, is
often used impersonally. Even intransitive verbs
that lack personal passive forms may thus be used:
det tolas for mycket har, there is too much talking
here; det har inte spelats i dag, there has been no
playing to-day; har dies och soves jamt, here they
eat and sleep all the time.
NOTE 1. Man with the active would be less stiff in such cases.
2. Note such impersonal passive expressions as, det har berdttats mig, I have
been told.

EXERCISE XVI.
A. Continue through all persons of the singular and
plural.
I. Man tackar mig, man tackar dig, etc. (I am being
ihanked, etc., pres., impf., and perf.) 2. Man kallar mig,
etc. (I am being called, etc., pres., future, and pluperf.).
Turn the following sentences into the passive form.

3. Har ban salt huset ?

1
4. Den store forfattaren von
Heidenstam boll ett tal den forsta maj. 5. Jag har betalt

rakningen. 6. Yem skall mota honom vid stationen?

7. En hund bet mig i benet. 8. En poliskonstapel skot
hunden med en revolver. 9. Man arresterade agaren till
hunden (also hundens agare). 10. Ratten (the court]
botfallde (fined) honom.

Turn into the active with man as subject :

II. Skall huset

2
saljas? 12. Har ban valts till ordfo-
rande? 13. Dansades det bar i gar?
The subject in the active becomes the agent in the passive (183).
lP *The
subject becomes object for construction with man, see 184.
;

B. 1. Detta ar ett vetebrods historia. 2. Pa bosten

plojer bonden en del av sin aker och sar vetet ; detta kallas
 EXERCISE. 103

vintervete. 3.Medan vadret annu ar varmt, gror vetet.

4. Da vintern kommer med kold och sno, slutar vetet att
vaxa. 5. Om den unga brodden ej tacktes med sno, sa

skulle den frysa bort, men snb'n skyddar den mot kolden.
6. Pa varen, nar snon har smalts av solstralarna, borjar
vetet att vaxa, och pa sommaren mognar det. 7. Da av-

meja bb'nderna det och kora det tilllogen, dar det troskas.
8. Nar vetet har trb'skats, kb'res det till kvarnen, och dar
males det till mjb'l, som sedan av bagaren forvandlas till

brod.

C. 1. Vill du ha en skiva av detta vetebrbd till ditt

kaffe, Erik? 2. Nej, giv mig hellre en skiva av ragbrb'det,

sa ar pappa snail. 3. Det har legat pa bordet sedan i gar

och ar torrt. 4. Brodet ar ej sa gott, som det brukar vara,

denna gang har Anna ej lyckats riktigt.

D. Conversation. 1. Vad gor bonden pa hb'sten? 2. Plo-

jer han hela sin aker? 3. Varfor gror vetet pa hosten?

4. Nar mognar vetet? 5. Vad tjanst (service) gor snon
det unga vetet? Vid vilken arstid borjar brodden ater
6.

att vaxa ? 7. Av vem har vetet avmejats ? 8. Vart forslar

man vetet? 9. Yad gor man med det dar? 10. Till vem
skall vetet saljas? 11. Ar ad gor han med det? 12. Av

vilket brod vill ni ha en skiva ?

E. 1. Thehas been plowed by the farmer.

field 2. I do
not believe that the wheat has been sowed yet. 3. What is

the wheat called that is sowed in the fall? 4. It is called

winter wheat and regarded as (som) the best (Msta).

it is

5. This wheat sprouts in the fall before (innan) the winter

comes. 6. It is protected by the snow, which covers it;

1
otherwise it would be damaged by the frost. 7. It begins
in the spring and ripens in the summer.
2
to grow again
8. The farmer savs that the wheat will be cut to-morrow
104 VOCABULARY.

and he hopes that the weather will be (use pres.) fine.

9. The wheat which was threshed yesterday has been hauled

to the flour mill to-day. 10. It has been bought by the

miller, who will grind it to flour, which he will sell to the

baker.

F. 1. Is there any (nagot) bread in the house? I am

so hungry. 2. Yes, there (har ar) a loaf of white bread
is

here, but it is dry. 3. This (delta) bread is excellent.

Sister Anne has had good luck with (lyckats med) her
bread this (dennd) time.
'Use skullc and invert. "Ater directly after main verb.

NOTE. When the next lesson has been mastered, go back and substitute the
passive with bliva wherever it is possible.

VOCABULARY.
anse, ansdg, -sago -sett, -sedd, en loge -ar, threshing floor,
1
,

-it, to regard granary

annars, otherwise mala, lib, to grind
arreste'ra. I, to arrest (ett) mjol (no pi.), flour
av'meja, I, to cut en mjolnare, miller ,

baka, I, to bake mogna, I, to ripen

ett ben, , bone, leg mot, against
bita, bet, beto, bitit, -en, -et, plo'ja,lib, to plow
to bite en polis'konstapel, -lar, police-
en brodd, sprout man
frysa bort', fros bort, froso , en revolver, -rar, revolver
frusit bortfrusen,
, -et, en skiva, -or, slice
to be killed by frost skjuta, skot, skoto, skjutit,
forste, -a, first skjuten, -et,to shoot
forvandla, I, to transform skydda, I, to protect
gro, III, to sprout sluta, I, to stop, close (also
hellre, rather slot, sloto, slutit)
en hund, -ar, dog (en) sno, snow
en host, -ar, fall smalta. Ha, or IV, to melt
en kvarn, -ar, flour mill en solstrdle, -ar, sunbeam
(en) kold (no pi.) cold, frost sa, III, to sow, to plant
ko'ra, lib, to drive, to haul torr, -t, dry
 PASSIVE. 105

troska, I, to thresh en vAr, -ar, spring

(ett) vete, wheat dter, again
en vinter, -rar, winter en agare, owner
,

1
g is hard in loge (g, k and sk are always hard before a soft vowel in an
unaccented ending .) 1

LESSON XVII.
The Verb (Continued)

PASSIVE WITH AUXILIARIES.

188. The passive voice can
also be formed by
combining the corresponding tense of the auxiliary
verb bliva (bli), to become (also, lo remain), with
the past participle (not the supine) of the verb,
which agrees in number and gender with the sub-
ject. Occasionally the verbs varda, to become, and
vara, to be, are used as auxiliaries.

189. Passive of the verbs tro, to believe; binda,

to bind :

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE
PRESENT

Sg. jag blir trodd, bunden jag blive trodd, bunden

vi bli(va) trodda, vi blive trodda, bundna
bundna
IMPERFECT

Sg. jag blev trodd, bun- jag bleve trodd, bunden

den
PI. vi blevo trodda, vi bleve trodda, bundna
bundna

Sg. jag skall bli(va) trodd, bunden

PI. vi skola bli(va) trodda, bundna
Sicedish Grammar
106 PASSIVE.

PERFECT

Sg. jag har blivit trodd, jag ma ha blivit trodd,

bunden bunden
PI. vi ha blivit trodda, vi ma ha blivit trodda,
bundna bundna
PLUPERFECT

Sg. jag hade blivit trodd, jag hade blivit trodd,

bunden bunden
PI. vi hade blivit trodda, vi hade blivit trodda,
bundna bundna
FUTURE PERFECT

Sg. jag skall ha blivit trodd, bunden

PI. vi skola ha blivit trodda, bundna
PRESENT INFINITIVE
att bli(va) trodd, bunden
PERFECT INFINITIVE
att ha blivit trodd, bunden
_NOTE. The other subjunctives are formed as shown above ; thus, jag ma
bli(va) trodd, vi skulle ha blivit bundna, etc.

190. OTHER AUXILIARIES OF THE PASSIVE.

(1) Varda (vart, vordo, vorden), which is con-
jugated with the verb vara instead of hava in the
perfect tenses. Ex. Jag varder kallad, I am called
: ;

han vart kallad, he was called vi tiro vordna kallade,

;

we have been called; du skall varda kallad, thou

wilt be called. The beginner may disregard this for-
mation of the passive entirely since it is obsolete;
the imperfect tense, however, is of comparatively
frequent occurrence.
(2) Vara is generally used only in the apparent
or false passive (185), that is, to express a condition
or state; as, huset ar brunnet, the house is burnt.
 PASSIVE. 107

Sometimes, however, it comes very near expressing

a true passive: han dr omtyckt av alia, he is liked
by all jag dr plagad av mygg, I am troubled by mos-
;

quitoes.

Too much stress cannot be laid upon the

191.
fact that in the overwhelming majority of cases
passive action is not expressed in Swedish by vara,
to be, and the past participle as in English, but by
bliva and the past participle, or by the passive in -s
(note also construction with man, 184) thus, the ;

house was built in a month, is not huset var byggt

pa en mdnad, but huset byggdes, or huset blev byggt
(also, man byggde huset).
NOTE. But since vara plus the past participle indicates a state or condition
regarded as complete and permanent, and as resulting from the action of the
verb (185) its present plus the past participle is often used as an equivalent
for the English perfect passive and its imperfect plus the past participle as an
equivalent for the English pluperfect passive. As: brevet dr skrivet, the letter
has been written ; poslen var redan utburen, the mail had already been dis-
tributed.

FURTHER REMARKS ON THE PASSIVE.

192. The passive in -s is preferred to the passive
with bliva in expressions denoting a common rule,
a general fact, an injunction or direction; as, sadana
brott straffas med fdngelse, such crimes are pun-
ished with imprisonment flaskan forvaras pa is, the
;

bottle should be kept on ice; de hdr skorna skola

lagas, these shoes. are to be repaired; jag kallas
Johan, I am called John but jag blir kallad feg, om
;

jag ej gor det, I shall be called a coward if I do not

do this on the contrary, han kallas feg av var man,
;

he is called a coward by everybody.

NOTE. The passive with bliva is more common in conversation than the
-* form. These two passives are often interchangeable
; sometimes, however,
108 EXERCISE.
they express different shades of meaning. For instance, when no agent is men-
tioned, the passive with bliva seems to imply a definite agent, ,while the -s form
very often imparts a sense of indefiniteness floden fylldes seems to point to a
:

slow natural process, whereas floden blev fylld would imply action on the part
of some definite agent. If the agent is expressed, both forms may be used
without any difference in meaning.

193. The present

of bliva has generally a future
sense; this is also the case in the passive: frukten
blir skadad av frosten, the fruit will be damaged
by the frost. To express the present, use either
the present of the passive in -s, or man with the
active, or make the agent the subject.

Deponent Verbs.
194. Many verbs have only the passive -s form.
These deponent verbs are active in meaning; many
are even transitive. They are conjugated like the
passive of other verbs except that some have imper-
ative forms, which are wanting in the passive.
Some have a present participle in -s, others one
without. Most deponent verbs lack this form.

Ex.: latas (from lat, lazy), to be lazy; vredgas

(from vred, angry), to be (grow) angry; vdras
(from var, spring) to turn spring brottas, to wres-
, ;

tle; andas, to breathe; lyckas, to succeed; minnas,

to remember.

EXERCISE XVIJ.

A. Conjugate the following both as indicated and with

the -s form of the passive.

1.Jag har blivit beromd av min larare; du har blivit

beromd av din larare, etc. 2. Jag skall icke bli klandrad
av min fader, etc. 3. Jag kom ej ; ty jag hade ej blivit
 EXERCISE. 10H

kallad; du kom ej, ty du, etc. 4. Jag skulle ha blivit

klandrad, om jag ej hade hjiilpt honom; du skulle ha blivit

klandrad, om du ej hade hjalpt honom, etc. 5. Om jag

hade agad mera, nar jag var liten, sa hade jag blivit
blivit
en battre manniska; om du, etc. Use also the active
with man, leaving out "av min Idrare" and "av min fader."

B. 1. Ar 1 hela huset forstb'rt? 1

Ja, allt ar uppbrant.
Utom nagra gamla mobler liar intet blivit
2
ra'ddat. 2. Vet
man hur elden uppstod? Icke sakert, men man tror, att
anlagd. 3. Kan herrn saga mig, om museet
2
den har blivit
ar det inte, men det
1
ar stangt hela sondagen? Nej, det
3
cippnas ej forran pa eftermiddagen. 4. Vill du taga de
har 4 skorna skomakaren, Karl, det har paret skall halv-
till

sulas 3 , och pa det har skola klackarna lagas 3 5. Du ser sa .

trott ut. Har du ej sovit gott? Nej, jag har plagats av

en sa svar tandvark hela natten. 6. Jag brukade ocksa
plagas av tandvark, men nu ha alia mina ihaliga tander
blifvitplomberade
5
. 7. Herr Lind dodades vid jarnvags-
olyckan, som skedde i
gar. 8. Jag skulle ha tagit samina

tag, men man radde mig att ej resa. 9. Har aro vi hos ur-

makaren, han har blivit rekommenderad 2 till mig av en

van, och jag hoppas, att han lyckas laga min klocka. 10.
Vad ar fatt med den? Jag tror att Den har stannat.
1
fjadern ar avbruten, dessutom behover verket nog att ren-
goras. 11. Nu har den blivit rengjord, uppdragen och
6
justerad; den saktar sig ej mer. 12. I dag blev jag vackt

av min van Berggren, innan det dagades. 13. Vi rodde ut

pa sjon, fiskarna nappade bra, och innan klockan sju voro
1
tjugu stora abborrar upptagna .

*See 190, 2, and 185. 2

-s form can be used. 192. 4
De hiir, these; de dar,
5
those. 192, note. 'En klocka fortar sig or saktar sig, gains or loses time.

have heard that Mr. Anderson's house has been

C. I

destroyed by fire. Has nothing been saved ? 2. I do not

 110 VOCABULARY.

believe that they succeeded in saving anything except some

old pieces of furniture. 3. I have seen in the paper that
Mr. Lind was killed in the railroad accident which

happened yesterday. 4. I knew him well, but I was never

introduced to him. Just think (tank bara), I should
5.

have taken the same train if I had not been advised

by a friend not to go. 6. Now I shall not be troubled by 2

3
toothache any longer, for my hollow tooth has been filled .

7. Where does the shoemaker live? I have a pair of shoes

2
that need to be repaired 8. These shoes are to be half-
.

2
soled 9. .
watch, which
My had stopped, has been repaired 3
3
by the watchmaker. 10. It has been cleaned and regulated
4
and I hope that it will keep good time now. Mr. Hall din
to me
3
is an excellent watchmaker; he was recommended

by a friend. He is a man who deserves to be recom-

mended 2 .

2 4
ipresenterad for. Passive in -. 'Passive with bliva. Keep good time,
gu raft.

VOCABULARY.
en ab'borre, -ar, perch fortjd'na, I (sometimes Ha),
arilagga, -lade, -lagt, -lagd, -t, to deserve, earn
to establish; anldggahaWsula, I, to half-sole
eld,
to cause arson hoppas (dep. v.), I, impf. hop-
av'bruten (p. part, of av'bryta pades, to hope
and bryta av', to break i'Jidlig, -t, hollow
off), broken intet, nothing
doda, I, to kill juste'ra (j=sh), I, to adjust,
en eld, -ar, fire, conflagration regulate
fatt, in expressions like taga en jdrn'vdgsolycka, -or, rail-
fatt p&, to lay hold of; way accident
vad ar det fatt? What is en Jclack, -ar, heel
the matter? en klocka, -or, clock, watch; .

en fjdder, -drar, feather, main- bell

spring laga, I, to mend

fo'rrdn (adv.), before en mobel, -ler, piece of fur-
forsto'ra, lib, to destroy niture
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. Ill

nappa, I, to bite (of fish) en land, tunder, tooth

plombe'ra, I, to fill (teeth) (en) tandvdrk, toothache
pldga, I, to pain, torment, upp'brant (p. part, of upp'brdn-
trouble na and branna upp', to burn
presente'ra, I, to introduce up), burnt up
ren'gora, rengjorde, etc., to upp'dragen (p. part, of upp'dra-
clean go, and draga upp', to pull
rdda, lib, to advise up, wind up), wound up,
radda, I, to save pulled up
sakta, I, to reduce speed, slow upp'std, -stod, -stodo, -stdtt, to
up originate; arise
en sko'makare, , shoemaker en ur'makare, , watchmaker
stanga, lib, to close, shut utom, beside
stiker, -t, sure(ly), certain (ly) ett verk, work; ,
movement
en sondag, -ar, Sunday vid, in

LESSON XVIII.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

195. The demonstrative pronouns are: den, det,

this, that; denne(a), detta, this; densamme(a), det-
samma, the same. They are declined as follows :

SINGULAR PLURAL
MASC. & FEM. GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS

Nom. den den det de

Gen. dens dess dess deras
Obj. den den det dem
SINGULAR PLURAL
MASC. FEM. & GENDER F. NEUTER ALL GENDERS
N. denne(a) denna detta dessa
G. dennes dennas deltas dessas
N. densamme(a) densamma detsamma desamma
G. densammes densammas detsammas desammas
NOTE. Dens refers only to persons, dess only to things, except occasionally in

poetry. Det is pronounced da or de in conversation.

112 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

196. These are used also as adjectives, but have

then no genitive. There is besides a demonstrative
adjective samme, same, which is used more fre-
quently than densamme and inflects as follows :

SINGULAR PLURAL
MASC. FEM. & GEND. F. NEUTER ALL GENDERS
samme (a) samma samma samma
197. The following adjectives partake of the
nature of demonstratives and may also be used as
pronouns in the plural and in' the neuter singular :

sddan, sddant, sadana, such; likadan, -t, -a,, like,

alike; dylik, -t, -a, such, similar. Ex.: en sadan
gosse, such a boy; dylikt har jag aldrig sett forr,
I have never seen such a thing (or things) before.

198. Den har, this, and den ddr, that, used orig-
inally only in conversation, are rapidly finding their
way into the written language. They are declined
as follows:
SINGULAR PLURAL
MASC. FEM. GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS

Nom. and Obj.:

den har, ddr det har, ddr de har, ddr
(Genitive lacking.)
Ex. Den har hasten dr vacker, den vill jag ko'pa,
this horse is fine, I wish to buy it; det ddr huset
tillhor visst herr Carlen, I think that house belongs
to Mr. Carlen; de ddr rosorna tiro hdrliga, those
roses are beautiful. (After den har and den ddr,
the noun takes the definite form.)

199. The former and the latter are expressed by

den forre(a) (neut. det forr a, pi. de forr a) and den
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 113

senare (neut. det senare, pi. de senare) Anna och :

Emma systrar; den forra ar ljus, den senare

tiro

mork, Anna and Emma

are sisters; the former is a
blonde, the latter a brunette.
NOTE. When used substantively, these expressions take an -s in the genitive:
den forras (Annas) lynne ar glattigare an den senares, the disposition of the
former is merrier than that of the latter.

200. REMARKS ON THE DEMONSTRATIVES.

(a) The forms in -e must be used when the demon-
strative is used as a pronoun and refers to persons
of masculine gender; they are generally preferred,
at least in the written language, when the demon-
strative is used adjectively before a noun denoting
a person of masculine gender: denne ar min bror,
this one is my brother; det ar samme man jag sag
i gar, it is the same man I saw
yesterday.

(b) After samme a following adjective has always

the definite form but a following noun generally the
indefinite; after denne the adjective is always def-
inite and the noun generally
indefinite in the written
language but very often definite in the spoken jag :

har sett samme (a) lille(a) gosse forr, I have seen

the same little boy before; denna stdtliga kyrka ar
den nya Vasakyrkan, this stately church is the new
Vasa church.
(c) Sadan is regularly preceded by the indefinite
article: en sddan man.
NOTE. In exclamations, however, the order may be reversed in case of
sddan and its equivalents sicken, slik, and tocken; thus, sddant ett elande !
oh, such misery !Sicken en stackare ! Such a miserable creature !
(Never
en sicken stackare /)
114 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.

(d) The demonstrative pronouns den, det, and

denna, delta, referring to things in a general way,
and depending upon a preposition, are sometimes
translated by dar (sometimes hdr) with the prepo- ,

sition added: ddrmed, with that, or those; harmed,

with this, or these jag har talat med honom ddrom,
;

I have talked with him about that thing, or those

things jag litar ddrpd, I rely on that.

;

201. SOME USES OF THE DEMONSTRATIVES.

For they, this, that, these, those, when used as
subjects and referring to a predicate noun, Swedish
uses the neuter singular det, detta, det hdr, det dar,
irrespective of the gender and number of the follow-
ing noun, if the demonstrative idea is not very em-
phatic or if one person or thing is not contrasted
with another; as, detta dr min bror, this is my
brother; detta dr vackra blommor, these are beau-
tiful flowers but denne dr min bror, this one is my
;

brother; de hdr dro -vackra blommor, de dar fula,

these are beautiful flowers, those are homely ones.

202. Den is often used as antecedent to a restric-

tive relative (he who) ; as, den, som
sagt detta, talar
icke sanning, he who said this does not speak the
truth (222, d).
NOTE. De is often used indefinitely ; de darhemma. the people at home.

203. Idiomatic expressions with demonstratives :

En sadan dumbom han dr! (or, sddan en dumbom,

etc.) Whafca stupid fellow he is Det gor detsamma, !

it does not matter med detsamma, immediately.

;
 EXERCISE. 115

EXERCISE XVIII.

A. Fill out the blanks as suggested.

1. Smek ej ... (that)

1
katten, Anna, ... (it) rivs
2
(186, b). 2. ... (it) ar visst (the same) katt , som . . .

rev ... (me) i

gar. 3. Ar ... (this)* ... (your) gosse,
fru Anderson? Ja, och . . .
3
(detta or dessa) ar . . .
(my)
1
flicker. 4. Vilka aro (yours) ? ... (those) i parken.
. . .

5. Aro ej Maria och Elisabet ganska lika? Nej, det ar

.
(such, 200, c) skillnad pa dem, att man ej kan se, att
. .

de aro systrar. 6. ... (the former) ar ljus, ... (the

latter) mork. 7. Ar ... (this)
3
... (your, familiar)
ring? Ja, . . .
(it) ar . . .
(mine). 8. Av vem bar du fatt
2
. . .
(this) vackra ring (def. or indef. ?) ? Jag bar fatt
den av min far till julklapp. ar sa ovanlig; 9. ... (it)

jag tror ej, att jag nagonsin sett en precis likadan. 10. Jag
blev sa glad, nar jag fick (it), jag hade lange b'nskat . . .

mig ... (a similar one, 197). 11. Ar (this, 200, a) . . .

2
Smith, som du talar om, (the same) person , som vi . . .

lardekanna pa ... (that) 1 resa (def. or indef.?) till

Stockholm for ett par ar sedan? Ja, han ar ... (the
same one, 200, a). 12. ... (He who, 202) talade var
(the same) gamle herre (use man), som vi traffade
2
. . .

i
gar kvall pa bjudningen hos Linds. 13. Vad sade han
. . .
(about that, 200, d) ? Han sade, att han var glad
. . .
(because of it, translate, over it).
2 3 201.
'198. 200, b.

B. 1. This 1 is a beautiful flower; where did you find

2
it? I found it in that little flower bed. 2. Please take a
2
seat
3
. That chair 2
comfortable; take this one
is not .

2
3. I believe I shall take that one by (vid) the window,

thank you (tack sa mycket, first). 4. Doesn't that 2 little

4
girl take after her mother? Yes, she has the same eyes ,
116 VOCABULARY.

the same mouth 4 and the same , voice

4
. 5. Have you ever
seen such a (200, c) sturdy old man? 6. He is almost

eighty years old, but it does not matter (203) ; he does the
same heavy work as he used to do. 7. Let us take a walk ;

such a fine autumn day as (som) this is rare. 8. I must

work till six o'clock; after that (sedan) I can take a walk.
9.Which (vilJcen) Mr. Smith do you mean? The one
who (202) lives on King's Street. 10. That is the same
Mr. Smith whom I used to know. He was such a good
man. 11. Are these 1 your sisters? Yes, and those are my
brothers. 12. You have such a beautiful ring, Anna;
where (var. .
.ifrdn?) did you get it? 13. Yes, it is very

pretty. Christmas present from my brother.

I got it as a
14. I wish I had one like it (197). 15. In that (200, d)

you are right, Carl, but please do not talk any more about
it. 16. Our teacher was angry with (ond pa) us yesterday.
17. He told us that he had never seen such compositions
before. 18. Those who (202) had more than ten errors
had to rewrite theirs.

MJOl. *198. *Either var sd god och titt ner, or var sa god och salt er
(also tag plats). 200, b.

VOCABULARY.
bekvam, -t, comfortable ganska, quite, .fairly
en bjudning, -ar, reception, en hostdag, -ar, autumn day
party en julklapp, -ar, Christmas
en Wom'sterrabatt', -er, flower present
bed en katt, -er, cat
brds pd (dep v.) ( III, impf. lik, -t, like, alike
brdddes, supine brdtts), ljus, -t, light, blonde
to take after mena, I (sometimes I la), to
duktig, -t, capable, sturdy mean
ett fel, , error en mun, munnar, mouth
fd, fick, fingo, fdtt (170), to mork, -t, dark, brunette

get; be allowed ndgonsin. ever

 COMPOUND VERBS. 117

niistan, almost en skillnad, -er, difference

o'vanlig, -t, unusual skriva om', to rewrite
en person', -er, person smeka, Ha, caress
precis', exactly en stol, -ar, chair
en ring, -ar, ring sdllsynt, , rar,
riva, rev, revo, rivit, -en, -et, tio, ten
to scratch, tear en tunga, -or, tongue
ratt, right
, en upp'sats, -er, composition
en rost, -er, voice dttio, eighty
IDIOMS: 1. att ha be right.
ratt, to
2. att bras pa ndgon, to take after somebody.
3. det iir visst, I think it is.

LESSON XIX.
The Verb (Continued)
COMPOUND VERBS.

204. There are two kinds of verb compounds in

Swedish: inseparable and separable.

INSEPARABLE VERB COMPOUNDS.

205. The following prefixes always form insepa-
rable verbcompounds that is, compounds of which
;

the component parts are never separated: be-, bi-,

ent-, er-, for-, gen-, har-, miss-, sam-, um-, mid-,
van-, veder-, a-.

206. Noun Prefixes. Verb compounds of which

the first member is a noun are generally inseparable ;

as, kors'fasta, to crucify; impf. korsfaste; supine,

korsfast; past part., korsfast; land'satta, to put
ashore; landsatte, landsatt, landsatt; hals'hugga, to
behead; halshogg, halshuggit, halshuggen.
NOTK. If the noun is compounded with a proposition, this compound prefix

may be separated from the verb. Thus: landsatta, to put ashore, satte f land.
118 COMPOUND VERBS.

etc. ; adagaldgga, to manifest, lade

ddaga; lagt adaga; ddagalagd; the present
and past participles of such verb compounds are always inseparable when used
as attributive adjectives: den landsatte passageraren, the landed passenger; when
equivalent to a clause or when used in the predicate, they are sometimes sepa-
rable: satta i land vid kajen, skyndade m
till tullhuset, landed at the pier, we

hurried to the custom-house; vi ha bh'vit satta i land, we have been landed.

SEPARABLE VERB COMPOUNDS.

207.
Adjective Prefixes. Adjectives used as pre-
fixes generally form separable verb compounds:
fri'kopa or ko'pa fri', to ransom; frikopte or kopte
fri, frikopt or kopt fri; but frikalla, to acquit, not
kalla fri; frikallad, frikallat. For the present and
past participle see 206, note.
NOTE. If the adjective is separated it agrees with the object in gender and

number; as, han vitmalade huset, he painted the house white; but han mdlade
huset vitt. It is best for beginners to regard the adjective prefixes as in-

separable.

208. Adverb and preposition prefixes. Adverbs

and prepositions used as prefixes form both sepa-
rable and inseparable verb compounds. Separable
verb compounds of this class often change their
meaning when the adverb or preposition follows the
verb.

(1) Separable, with no difference of meaning:

u'teldsa or Idsa u'te, to lock out; fo'rega or ga fo're
to precede; ge'nomldsa or Idsa ge'nom, to read
through; fran'taga or taga fran', to take from or
deprive of; av'hugga or hugga av', to cut off, etc.
(2) With difference of meaning: the sense is liter-
al when
the parts of the verb compound are sepa-
rated; figurative when not separated: av'ga, to re-
sign graduate ga av', to break an'lagga, to estab-
; ; ;

lish,organize lagga an', to aim fram'hdlla, to point

; ;

out; holla fram', to stretch forth; un'derhalla, to

 COMPOUND VERBS. 119

entertain; hallo, un'der, to hold beneath; fram'gd,

to appear, become evident; ga fram', to go forth.

209.
Compound verbs are conjugated exactly like
corresponding simple verbs.

210. If the separable affix is an adjective or

phrase (206, 207) the object is placed between the
verb and the affix; if an adverb or a preposition,
often after as, man satte honom i land, they landed
;

him but han hogg av handen, he cut off his hand.

;

211. The stress accent falls always on the prefix,

if a phrase, on the noun, except in the case of be-,
ent-, for- [see 36 (a)], which never take the accent.
The musical accent is grave.
NOTE. Care should be taken not to confuse for-, the inseparable prefix, and
fore-, the separable prefix. The latter takes the accent and imparts an entirely
different meaning to the verb. Thus: fordra' ga, to endure; fo'redraga, to
prefer, present; forsta', to understand; fo'restd, to manage; to impend.

212. When the affix is separated and happens

to stand before a noun, care must be taken not to
confuse it with a preposition introducing a phrase;
the affix is always accented, the preposition rarely.
Ex. han brot' av brodet och at, he broke a piece off
:

the bread and ate, but han brot av' brodet, he broke
the bread in two.

213. Synopsis of the verbs av'bryta, to interrupt,

and stdnga in'ne, to shut in.

ACTIVE
Pres. jag av'bryter jag stdnger in'ne
Impf. jag avbrbt jag stdngde inne
Future jag skall avbryta jag skall stdnga inne
120 EXERCISE.

Perf. jag har avbrutit jag har stdngt inne

Plupf. jag hade avbrutit jag hade stdngt inne
Fut. P. jag skall ha av- jag skall ha stdngt inne
brutit
PASSIVE
Pres. jag avbrytes, or jag stdnges inne, or
blir avbruten blir innestdngd
Impf. jag avbrots, or jag stdngdes inne, or
blev avbruten blev innestdngd
Future jag skall avbry- jag skall stdngas inne,
tas, or or
skall bli(va) av- skall bli innestdngd
bruten
Perf. jag har avbrutits, jag har stdngts inne, or
or har blivit innestdngd
harblivit avbruten
Plupf. jag hade avbru- jag hade innestdngts.
tits, or or
hade blivit av- hade blivit innestdngd
bruten
Fut. P. jag skall ha av- jag skall ha inne-
brutits, or stdngts, or
skall ha blivit skall ha blivit inne-
avbruten stdngd

EXERCISE XIX.
A. Translate. 1. He has interrupted me. 2. I had

broken offa piece. 3. Hold the glass beneath the water.

4. You must entertain your friends. 5. Which do you pre-

fer, to stay 6. He will comply with
here or to go with us ?

my request. 7. He
come will
after. 8. They (man} have

landed the passengers. 9. The landed passengers wished to

view the city. 10. I can't endure that man. 11. Had you
recognized (two ways) him? 12. He was (blev) recog-
nized. 13. They ransomed him. 14. The ransomed one

thanked his friends. Put the verbs in different tenses.

 EXERCISE. 121

B. Nikolaus den forste av Eyssland onskade att iakttaga

sitt folks liv.For att kunna (165, 2) gb'ra detta bmkade
ban foretaga langa spatserturer forkladd i en vanlig offi-
cerskappa, sa att man ej skulle (165) igenkanna honom.
En gang hade han gatt ut till en liten forstad. Nar han
skulle atervanda, varseblev han (blev han varse), att han

ej hittade. Nu aterstod for honom endast att anfb'rtro sig

at en droska. Han
ropade pa en, steg in och befallde kus-
ken att kora honom till slottet. Da de hade anlant dit,
steg tsaren ut. Da han skulle betala, blev han varse, att
han givit ut alia sina pengar. "Var god och vanta", sade
han till kusken och amnade
ga in, "jag skall skicka ut
pengarna genast." "Nej, lille far", avbro't kusken honom,
"sa ha officererna redan ett par ganger bedragit mig, de ha
underlatit att skicka ut pengarna. Kvarlamna din kappa
som (as} pant; om du skickar ut pengarna, sa skickar jag
in den." Kejsaren efterkom kuskens begaran och gav ho-
nom sin kappa som pant.

C. Conversation. 1. Varfor fb'retog kejsaren av Eyss-

land langa spatserturer? 2. Varfor kande man ej igen
honom? Vart begav han sig en gang? 4. Vad varse-
3.

blev han, nar han skulle atervanda? 5. Vad gjorde han?

6. Vad befallde han kusken? 7. Varfor kunde han ej

betala kusken genast? 8. Hur ville han uppgora saken

(settle the matter) ? 9. Av vilka (whom) hade kusken

forut blivit bedragen? 10. Varfor ville han, att kejsaren

skulle kvarlamna kappan? 11. Efterkom kejsaren bans

begaran ?

D. 1. We must disguise ourselves

1
if we do not wish to

be recognized
2
. 2. Have you observed the conduct of this
man? 3. Yes, I have, and I do not understand how people
can entrust money to 3 him; he spends too much for amuse-
4

Su-edish Grammar 9
122 VOCABULARY.

ments. 4. Now we have arrived at (till) the palace.

Please 5 step out of the carriage. 5. Get into the carriage.
I shall order the cabman to drive to the theater. 6. I did

not know that I had lost my money; I became aware (of)

it when I was going (skulle) to pay for the ride (dJctur).
7. How did you settle the matter (C, 8) ? I settled it in
this way, that I asked the cabman to wait and said that I
should send out the money. 8. Did he comply with your

request? In a way (pa satt och vis), but he asked for

(bad om) my watch as security and said he would return
it when he got the money. 9. The man had a good reason

for this request, he had been cheated so often in the same

way (pa samma satt). 10. He interrupted me while I was

speaking and asked for the money which he had entrusted
to me.
2
1
FSrkldda
oss, reflex, verb. Use passive with bliva, also construction with
man; passive with -* would hardly ever be used in such a case. *An indirect
object is often preceded by at or till, which are not always interchangeable:
4
tSga at or till, but skriva till. The separable forms are, as a rule, used more
than the inseparable, at least in the simple tenses: han ger (giver) ut. f Var
sa god och stig vr, or, stig w, car ni matt.

VOCABULARY.
The past participle is practically always inseparable,
N. B.
even when the verb is separable. The supine of a separable
verb is separable. The teacher should point out the differ-
ence in meaning of the two kinds of verbs, if any.

an'fortro (insep.), Ill, to en- bedra'ga (insep.), -drog, -dro-

trust go, -dragit, -dragen, -et, to
an'ldnda (insep.), cheat deceive
lib, impf. -

Defal'la (insep.), lib, to com-

anliinde, to arrive
mand
av'bryta (infep.), -brot, bro-
to, -brulit,
to interrupt
-bruten, -et,
^
efterkomma>

^
ef terTcom, -Jcom-
-kommit,
comply with
to
kommen,
'

bryta av', to break off icomma efter, to come after

fri'Jcppa, kopa fri', Ha,
en bega'ran (no. pi.), request, to

demand ransom
 INTEHROGATIVES. 123

fordra'ga (insep., see bedra- en officers' kappa, -or, officer's

ga), to endure, tolerate. cloak
fo'redraga (insep.), to prefer en orsak, -er, reason, cause
forkld'da (insep.), lib, to dis- en pant, -er, security
guise ropa, I, to shout
en for'stad, -stdder, suburb Ryssland (neuter), Russia
forstd' (insep., see std), to un- ett slott, castle, palace ,

derstand skicka in', ut', I, to send in,

ut'giva, giva ut', utgav, -gdvo, out
-givit, -given, -et, to spend; en spatsertur, -er, walk
publish, edit ett stycke, -n, piece
hitta, I, to find, find one's way un'derhdlla (see hdlla), to
i'akttaga (sep.), -tog, -togo, entertain
tagit, -tagen, -et, to ob- hdlla un'der, to hold beneath
serve un'derldta (insep.), -Idt, -Idto,
igen'kdnna, kdnna igen', lib, -Idtit, -en, -et, to neglect
to recognize var'sebliva, bliva var'se, to be-
kvar'lamna, lamna kvar', I, to come aware of
leave behind d'terldmna, lib, to return
en klocka, -or, clock, watch lamna dter (unusual)
land'sdtta, -satte, -satt, -satt, a'terstd (sep., see std), to re-
to land main
ett Hi, ,
life d'tervdnda(sep.) , lib, to return
en officer', -er, officer vdnda dter (unusual)
IDIOM: att varsebliva en sak, to become aware of a thing.

LESSON XX.
The Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives.
The interrogative pronouns are: vem, who;
214.
vad, what; vilken, which, who; vilkendera, which
one vad for en, what kind of, what.
;

DECLENSION.
SINGULAR

r.-rit?: ?t =
vem vad vilken vilket vilkendera vilketdera
vems vilkens vilkets vilkenderas vilketderas
124 INTERROGATIVES.

PLURAL
Nom. vilka
Gen. vilkas

Vad for en has a neuter vad for ett and a plural

vad for ena, but no genitive.

215. The interrogative adjectives are: vad, vil-

ken, vilkendera, vad for en, and hurudan, of what
nature, how. Their declension is identical with
that of the interrogative pronouns but they lack
the genitive case: hurudan has the neuter form
hurudant and the plural hurudana.
216. REMARKS ON THE INTERROGATIVES.
(a) Vem refers only to persons and is never used
as an adjective. Ex.: Med vem talade du? (or vem
talade du med?) With whom did you speak? Vems
bok ar detta? Whose book is this?
NOTE. When vem is subject in an indirect question it is followed by som :

vet du vem som var hart do you know who was here?

Vad is used both as a pronoun and as an

(b)
adjective when used pronominally it is always neu-
;

ter; adjectively it may be used for all genders like

the English what. This use being rather restrict-
ed, the student should use vilken and vad for en:
Vad talar han om? What is he talking about? Vad
rdtt har du att gora detta? What right have you
to do this?
NOTE. When ichat is subject in an indirect question it is often represented
by vad som in Swedish: jag vet ej vad som ar bast, I do not know what is best ;

but jag vet ej, vad (object) han har sagt.

(c) Vad for en is used both as a pronoun and

as an adjective, the latter use prevailing. As an
adjective it drops ena in the plural. Ex.: Vad for
 RELATIVES.. 125

blommor har du ddr? What kind of flowers have

you there ? Sometimes it has the meaning of vilken :

vad for en konung hade Sverige da? What king

did Sweden have then?
NOTE. For may be separated from vad: vad ar del for en blommaf What
kind of (a) flower is that?

(d) Vilken and vilkendera are used both as adjec-

tives and as pronouns; hurudan (hurdan) only as
an adjective. Ex.: Vilken har varit hdr? Who has
been here? Vilket hus har du hyrt? Which house
have you rented? Vilkendera o'nskar du? Which
one (of several objects) do you wish? Vilketdera
huset ar hans? Which house (of these houses) is
his? Hurudant ar vddret? How is the weather
(of what nature) ?

217. If the interrogative pronoun is governed

by a preposition this may as in English either pre-
cede or stand at the end of the clause: med vem
talade du? or vem talade du med? with whom did
you speak?
218. With prepositions, vad may in certain cases
be replaced by prepositional compounds with var,
where: varav, varmed, vartill, etc.: varmed har
man belonat honom? With what have they rewarded
him? Varav lever han? What does he live on?

Relative Pronouns and Adjectives.

219. The relative pronouns are som, vilken, vad,

den, and the genitive form vars.
220. For inflection of vilken and vad see 214, and
for inflection of den see 195.

221. The relative adjective is vilken.

126 RELATIVES.

222. REMARKS ON THE RELATIVES.

(a) Som
by far the most common of the rela-
is
tive pronouns; it is indeclinable and is used for all
genders and all cases with the exception of the
genitive, which is supplied by vars and vilkens (vil-
kets, vilkas). Ex.: min van, som dr hdr pa besok,
skall resa i morgon, my friend who is here on a
visit will leave to-morrow; mannen, vars barn dro
sjuka, dr mycket fattig, the man whose children are
sick is very poor.

(b) Vilken when used as a pronoun often employs

the genitive form vars instead of vilkens. It is
not used very often in conversation except when
the antecedent is a clause (when it is indispensable)
or when a preposition must stand before the rela-
tive. Ex. han har blivit void, vilket forvanar mig,
:

he has been elected, which fact surprises me (here

som would be incorrect) fyra gossar, av vilka
;

en var min kusin, drunknade i gar, four boys of

whom one was my cousin were drowned yesterday.
(c) Vad is used as a compound neuter relative
including its antecedent, also after the indefinite pro-
noun allt. It has no plural. Ex.: vad han sdger,
dr sant, what he says is true; det dr allt, vad jag
har sett, that is all I have seen (som may be used) .

NOTE. When vad is the subject of the sentence or clause it is generally com-
bined with som; thus, ft skolu saga vad som iir rdtt, we ought to say what
is right.

(d) Den is used as a definite relative only in the

objective case; as* such it is of comparatively rare
occurrence. In the nominative together with som
it corresponds to he who, the one who (which), who-
 EXERCISE. 127

ever. In solemn style it is sometimes combined with

ddr, den ddr, he who, whoever. Ex. dessa dro de :

regler, dem (more common som) ni maste folja,

these are the rules which you must follow; den som
sdger detta, dr dum, whoever says this is stupid den ;

ddr vet det rtitta, han gore det rdtt dr, he that knows
the right, let him do right.

223. The prepositions which govern the rela-

tives are generally placed at theend of the clause;
when used with som, always. Ex.: damerna, som
du talar om, kdnner jag, I know the ladies that you
speak about; huset, vilket (i vilket) han bor i, dr
gammalt, the house in which he lives is old.
224. In Swedish as in English the relative is
often omitted when objective. Ex.: Vem var det,
du mo'tte i gar? Who was it you met yesterday?
225. When the relative is governed by a prepo-
sition and refers to things, a compound of the rela-
tive adverb var, where, and the preposition may
be used; as, bordet, varpa boken ligger, or bordet,
som boken ligger pa, dr mitt, the table which the
book lies on is mine; huset, som han bor i, or vari
han bor, dr hans fars, the house which he lives in
is his father's.
EXERCISE XX.
A. Translate orally. 1. Who goes there? 2. Who is he?

What do you have in your (178) hand? 4. Of whom

1
3.

areyou speaking? 5. Of what are you speaking? 6. What

book do you mean? 7. What 2 new house is that? 8. Do

you know at (vid) what time the train leaves (gar) ?
9. What sort of a man is he? 10. Do you understand what
he says? 11. I do not know what is best (bast). 12.
128 EXERCISE.

Which drama of Strindberg do you like best 3 ? 13. In

what (218) does the difference consist? 14. Do you know
what kind of teacher he is? 15. How is the weather?
translate in two ways: preposition before and at the end of the clause.
=
what kind of a new house is that? or which is that new house? *To
Transl. :

like best, tycka bast om.

B. Translate orally. 1. He is a man who knows every-

thing. 2. That is the lady who has the pretty daughters.

3. That is not the man I mean. 4. He who (222, d) is

rich is not always happy. 5. That is all
1
I know about the
matter. Whoever (222, d) does such a thing (nagot
6.

sadant) is not a good man. 7. The man whom (224) I

spoke about is a professor at (vid) the University of Up-

2
sala 8. The house in which (225) he lives is his father's.
.

3
9. There is no poet whose life is so interesting.
1
Relative may be omitted ; see 222, c. -Uppsala universitet. *There is,
there are, in a general sense must be rendered by det finnes (/inns), in a limited
sense by det ar.

C. En som 1 hade rakat i tvist med en officer,

apotekare,
blev av denne utmanad till duell. Den sak, om vilken de
voro oense, var en obetydlighet, och apotekaren, som var en
forstandig man, onskade att forhindra duellen. Tidigt pa
morgonen av den dag, pa vilken duellen skulle utkampas,
gjorde apotekaren ett besok i officerens bostad och sade
helt lugnt till denne : "Emedan jag ar den, som liar blivit
2
utmanad, sa tillkommer det mig att valja vapnen. Har
aro tva piller, av vilka det ena 3 ar forgiftat, det andra dar-
emot oskadligt. Var sa god och valj det ena och svalj det ;

jag svaljer det, som aterstar, och en av oss maste do."

Officeren, som blev mycket overraskad av apotekarens for-
slag, vars andamal naturligtvis var att forhindra duellen,
kastade ut pillerna genom fonstret och forsonade sig med
honom.
J
Note the frequent use of som. 2
Note the frequent use of sa to introduce the
principal clause when it follows the dependent. *det ena. . . det andra, one.
. . .

the other.
 EXERCISE. 129

C. Conversation. 1. Med vem hade apotekaren rakat

i tvist? 2. Vartill blev han ntmanad av officeren? 3. Niir

gick apotekaren till officeren? 4. Varfb'r hade apotekaren

beslutat forhindra duellen? 5. Vad tillkom honom och
varfor?. 6. Vad
for vapen foreslog (proposed) apotekaren?
7. Visste apotekaren, vilketdera pillret var forgiftat? 8.
Vad skulle hans motstandare (opponent) gora med det

piller, han valde? 9. Vad var andamalet med detta for-

slag? 10. Vad gjorde officeren med pillerna? 11. Upp-
nadde (attained) apotekaren sitt andamal?

D. 1. Do you know what kind

of a man the druggist is
with whom
the officer got into a quarrel? 2. Yes, I know
him well (ml). He is a man whose friendship I esteem
very highly. 3. I do not know what the quarrel consisted
1

in 1 , but according to what I have heard it was about a

trifling matter. 4. The druggist, who was a very sensible

man, wished prevent the duel.

to 5. By what means
(transl. through what)
: did he succeed in preventing it?
6. He went to the house of the man who had challenged

him and had a talk with him. 7. He reminded him of an

old custom according to which the right of him (C, 5) it is

who has been challenged to choose the weapons. 8. When

the officer asked him what kind of weapons he would choose
he held out a couple of pills. 9. Of these there was one
10. The
2
which was poisoned ;
the other was harmless.

druggist asked the officer which one of the two he would

(ville) take and swallow. 11. He himself would (skulle)

swallow the one that (222, d) remained. 12. The propo-

sition which the druggist made surprised the officer and he
threw the pills out through the window. The druggist,
13.

whose (222, a) purpose it was to prevent the duel, suc-

ceeded in this (200, d).
2
translate in two ways (218). True or apparent passive?
130 VOCABULARY.

VOCABULARY.
en apotekare, , druggist lycklig, -t, happy
bestd' (insep., see std), to con- mena, I, to mean
sist; endure; treat en o'betydlighet, -er, insignifi-

en bostad, bostdder, dwelling, cance, trifle

home o'ense (indecl.), at variance

en duel o'skadlig, -t, harmless

duell', -er,
ett piller, pill
ddr'emot, on the contrary
,

to die rdka, I, come or get (into),

to
do, dog, dogo, dott, ,

to meet (with), to meet

emedan, because
ett samtal, conversation
enligt, according to
,

en sed, -er, custom, usage

er'inra (insep.), remind I, to
svdlja, lib, to swallow
fram'rdcka, rdckd frarn', Ha,
to reach or hold out
till'komma see kom-
(insep.,
ma), to befit, be the right
forgif'ta (insep.), I, to poison
of somebody
forhind'ra (insep.), I, to pre-
en tvist, -er, quarrel
vent
upp'skatta (insep.), I, to esteem
ett forslag', proposition,
,
ut'mana (insep.), I, to. chal-
proposal .

lenge
forso'na, I, to reconcile ut'kdmpa, I, to fight out
forstdn'dig, -t, sensible, intel- kdmpa ut', to cease fighting
ligent (i. e. die)
hog, -t, high ett vapen, , weapon
kasta ut' (rarely utkasta), en vdnskap, friendship
(sep.), I, to throw out o'verras'ka (insep.), I, to sur-
lugn, -t, calm(ly) prise
IDIOMS: 1. att rdka i grill, svdrigneter, to get into a quarrel,
difficulties.
2. att bliva overrasTcad av nagot, to become astonished
at something.
3. Det tillkommer mig, I havr a right to it, or it is

my privilege.
 LESSON XXL
The Verb (Continued).
PRESENT PARTICIPLE.
226. The present participle is formed by adding
-ande to the stem of the verb if the infinitive ends
in -a, otherwise -ende. Ex.: kallande, from kalla,
to call; leende, from le, to smile; syende, from sy,
to sew.
NOTK 1. The present participle is indeclinable, but if used as a noun, it
takes -s in the genitive: en doendes anger, the repentance of a dying person.

2. Deponent verbs form their present participle either with or without the
-3j as, minnandes, remembering; aldrande, aging, from minnas and aldras,
many lack a present participle.

227. The present participle is used:

(1) as an adjective: ett sovande barn, a sleeping
child;

(2) as an adverb: han talte flytande, he spoke flu-

ently ;

(3) as an adverbial predicative: hon gick tiggan-

de fran hus till hus, she went begging from house

to house.
NOTE. The conversational language often prefers a finite verb to the present
participle used as an adverbial predicative. Ex. : hon yick frdn hus till hus
och tiggde, instead of hon gick tiggande, etc.

228. The present participle is not used in Swe-

dish to form a progressive tense as in English. When
the idea of continued action especially prominent, is

it isexpressed by means of the verb hdlla pa', to

keep on, continue, and the infinitive preceded by att :

han hbll pa att skriva, da jag kom in, he was writ-

ing when I entered. Sometimes the preposition mea,
132 PARTICIPLES.

with, is inserted before the infinitive: han holl pa

med att lasa.
NOTE. Sitta, to sit ;ga, go ; sla, stand ligga, lie, and similar verbs are
;

used with a finite form of some other verb to express progression: jag sitter
och skrifver, I am
writing ligga och lata sig, lounging about, idling
;
1

aid;

och hanga, hanging around (idly). Note the following use of halla pa: jag
holl pa att falla, I came near falling.

229. The English present participle very often

must be rendered by a subordinate clause either
temporal, causal, or relative, according to the sense :

the boy, hearing us come, ran away, gossen sprang

sin vag, ndr han horde oss komma; being sick he
had to go home, emedan han var sjuk, mdste han
ga hem.
230. The English verbal in -ing is often equiva-
lent to the running is a useful exer-
infinitive:
cise, att
springa ar en nyttig o'vning; he went away
without seeing me, han gick bort utan att se mig.
NOTE. When the verbal is modified by a possessive adjective, Swedish uses a
noun clause with att instead of att with the infinitive: He came without my
seeing him, han kom utan att jag sag honom; their having come home was a
surprise, att de hade kommit hem var en ofverraskning.

231. Nouns in -ning and -ande (added to the

verbal stem) correspond to the English verbals and
abstract nouns an -ing. Ex.: allt detta talande ar
onodigt, all this talking is unnecessary; mycken
skrivning ar trottande, much writing is tiresome.

232. After the verbs hora and se Swedish uses

the infinitive, never the present participle, as in
English: jag sag honom komma, I saw him coming.
PAST PARTICIPLE.
233. The past participle is formed in five differ-
ent ways according to the class or conjugation to
which the verb belongs.
 PARTICIPLES. 133

234. In the First Conjugation the ending is -ad.

In the Second Conjugation, Class I, the ending
is -t.

In the Second Conjugation, Class II, the ending

is -d.

In the Third Conjugation the ending is -dd.

In the Fourth Conjugation the ending is -en
(-n, -et).

235. These endings are added to the stem of

the verb. In the Fourth Conjugation there may
or may not be a change of vowel thus, kallad, bojd,
;

kopt, sydd, shriven, funnen.

NOTE 1. Deponent verbs as a rule lack the past participle, so do many in-

transitive verbs.
2. It may be of assistance for the beginner to notice that the past participle
of weak verbs may be found by dropping the e of the imperfect.

236. The past participle is used as an adjective

and agrees in number and gender with the noun or
pronoun which it modifies or of which it is a com-
plement. It is declined in accordance with the rules
governing the declension of adjectives.
237. STRONG DECLENSION.
SINGULAR PLURAL
GENDER FORM NEUTER ALL GENDERS
I. dlskad dlskat dlskade
l
II. Class i. kopt kopt kopta(e )
II. Class ii. bojd bo'jt bojda(e)
III. sydd sytt sydda(e)
IV. skriven 'skrivet skrivna(e)
238. WEAK DECLENSION.
dlskade dlskade dlskade
1
kopta(e^) kopta kopta (e )
bojda(e) bojda bojda(e)
sydda(e) sydda sydda(e)
skrivna(e) skrivna skrivna(e)
'Masculine nouns denoting persons often take the -e form of the adjective.
134 EXERCISE.

239. The past participle is used only adjectively

as an attributive, an appositive, or a predicate modi-
fier. In the last function it is used with bliva (varda)

to form the compound passive and with vara

in the
apparent passive (185) de slagna ryssarna flydde, :

the defeated Russians fled hdren, besegrad och upp- ;

riven, drog sig tillbaka, the army, defeated and

shattered, withdrew; huset har blivit mdlat, the
house has been painted; brevet dr skrivet, the letter
is written; rocken dr lagad, the coat is mended.

240. The past participle should not be confused

with the supine, which is. used only with the auxil-
iary verb hava to form the perfect tenses and is
indeclinable.
NOTE. With some verbs of motion vara may be used with the past participle
to form the perfect tenses as, han dr bortrest, he has left ; han dr anldnd,
;

hi? has arrived.

EXERCISE XXI.

A. Supply the present participle, the past participle, or

the supine of the verbs indicated, according to the context ;
also the definite and plural endings. 1. Den (forlora) . . .

(finna) 2. Barn
1
ring har blifvit stod (grata)
. . . . . .

framfor den . . .
(stanga) dorr . 3. Ester ar en ... (fb'r-

tjusa)
1
liten flicka. 4. ... (sova)
1
hund (pi.) bitas ej.
2
5. Ert . . .
(vanta lange) brev har . . .
(komma). 6. ...

(vanda)
1
mig, bad tiggar
sig om en slant. 7. Jag har
till

... (hitta) alia de (forlora) brev (def. pi.), edert . . .

2
.
(inbegripa)
. .
Express in more idiomatic Swedish by
.

expanding the participles into clauses. 8. I eke havande

erfarenhet nog, vet jag ej vad jag bor gora. 9. Nyheterna
mottagna i
gar ha gjort oss alia glada. 10. Havande last
brevet, kastade jag bort det. Translate: 11. I heard him
 EXERCISE. 135

singing
3
. 12. He came driving. 13. Reading and writing
are taught at school.
1 2
Past part. 'After verbs like se, hora, kanna, Swedish uses the
Pres. part.
infinitive of the
dependent verb, not the pres. part.
Note the inverted order in an independent clause following a dependent.

B. 1. Nar jag gick hem fran kyrkan i gar, traffade jag

froken Lind, dotter till en gammal skolkamrat. 2. Erne-
dan det ar lange sedan jag sag henne, kande jag knappast
igen henne. 3. Hon var fb'rtjusande vacker i sin nya vin-
terhatt, vilken hon sade var en julklapp fran hennes far.

4. Hon
omtalade for mig, att hennes far ofta hade ut-
tryckt en b'nskan att fa traffa mig. 5. Jag svarade, att jag

ej skulle lamna staden utan att ha besokt dem. 6. Det

gladde mig, att han mindes mig. 7. Han ar en mycket in-
tressant man, som talar manga frammande sprak flytande
och .ar val belast. 8. Da vi hollo pa att samtala, kommo
hennes vanner ut ur kyrkan. 9. Nar jag sag dem komma,
sade jag adjo och lamnade henne.

C. 1. Emedan jag ville rbka en cigarr, gick jag in i rok-

kupen. 2. Mannen, som star dar borta, ar konduktb'rn,

fraga honom, nar taget gar. 3. Han kom springande, men

nar han sag mig, stannade han och halsade.

Going home from church last Sunday, I met Miss

1
Z>. 1.

Wallner. 2. Stopping 2 she wished me a merry Christmas

and a happy New Year. 3. She looked 3 charming in her
new winter hat. 4. Seeing
1
me look at it, she told me that
it was a Christmas gift from her father. 5. Her father is
a very learned and cultured man and a celebrated author.

6. He speaks fluently six foreign languages and is very

well-read. 7. Not having 4 seen him for many years, I ex-

2
pressed my desire of calling (inf.)
Smiling on him. 8.

kindly she said that her father would like to see me, hav-
136 VOCABULARY.

ing
5
often talked about me and wondered where I was.
2
9. Thanking her I asked her to greet her parents from
me.

E. 1.
compartment for smokers? No, smoking
Is this a
is prohibited here. 2. How much did you have to (maste

ni) pay for overweight? Nothing; they checked my bag-

1
gage without weighing (230) it. 3. Having asked the
conductor if it was the express train for (till) Stockholm,
we boarded the train. 4. My stopping and talking (230,
note) caused me to (gjorde att jag) come too late to the
1
train. 5. Having bought a time-table, I went into the

waiting room.
translate by a temporal clause. ! Expand into a coordinate clause. *To look
4
(appearance) se ut. Causal clause introduced by en'dr, emedan, or do.
'Clause introduced by ty.

VOCABULARY.
adjo', good-bye en kupe, -er, compartment
belast', -t, well-read (railroad)
oildad, -at, p. p. (bilda), cul- le, log, logo, lett, to smile
tured lange vantad, -at, p. p. (viinta
en er'farenhet, -er, experience lange), long expected
flytande, pres. p. (flyta), fluent lard, lart, p. p. (Idra), learned
frammande, .foreign, strange (e)mot'taga, taga emot' (sep.,
forbjuden, p. p. (forbjuda), see taga), to receive
prohibited om'tala, tola om' (sep.), to tell

fortju'sande, pres. p. (for- polette'ra, I, to check (baggage)

tjusa), charming en ro'kare,smoker ,

foriil'drar, parents en rokkupe, compartment

-er,

for sent', too late for smokers

grata, grdt, grdto, grdtit, to rokning, smoking
weep sju, seven
hitta, I, to find en slant, -ar, coin
hdlsa pa', to call on ett snalltdg, , express train
in'begripa, -grep, -grepo, -gri- ett sprdk, , language
pit, -en, -et, to include stanna, I, to stay, stop

en konduktor', -er, conductor stiga pa', to board, enter

 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 137

i sondags, last Sunday en vinterhatt, -ar, winter hat

en tid'tabell', -er, time table vaga, lib, to weigh
en tiggare, , beggar vanda, lib (vande, vant), to
tit'ta pA, I, to look at turn
undra, I, to wonder en vantsal, -ar, waiting room
ut'trycka (insep.), Ha, to ex- en overvikt, overweight
press en onskan (no pi.), wish

IDIOMS: 1. att onska ndgon en glad jul, to wish somebody

a merry Christmas.
2. att onska ndgon ett gott nytt dr, to wish some-
body a happy New Year.
3. att om'tala, or tala om' ndgot for ndgon, to tell
somebody something.
4. Jag sade adjo till honom, I said good-bye to him.
5. att ha frammande, to have company.

LESSON XXII.
The Verb (Continued).

IMPERSONAL VERBS.
241.The impersonal verb form, like the reflex-
ive, used
is more extensively in Swedish than in
English. The impersonal subject is det, which is
never omitted except in a few archaic expressions.

242. Important impersonals are:

(1) Those referring to processes of nature:
det regnar, it rains det fryser, it freezes
det snoar, it snows det toar, it thaws
det blixtrar, it lightens det dagas, it dawns
(2) Those expressing merely abstract action; as,
det knackar pa dorr en, there is a knock on the door ;

det ror sig i skogen, something moves in the forest ;

det gar i korridoren, somebody is walking in the

hall.
Swedish Grammar 10
138 IMPERSONAL VERBS.

(3) Verbs in many idiomatic phrases, the person

or thing referred to often appearing as object:
det gdller mitt llv, my life is at stake
det gdller honom, it concerns him
det lonar modan, it is worth the while
detgar mig vdl, I am doing well
det gor mig ont om dig, I feel sorry for you
hur star det till med dig? How are you?
243. THE IMPERSONAL PASSIVE. Many verbs,
even intransitives, may form an impersonal passive
either with det as the subject or with the subject
omitted; as, det skrattades och s Jongs, there was
laughing and singing; hdr dies, ser jag, you are
eating, it seems (I see) det frdgas ofta, the ques-
;

tion is often asked.

244. Other uses of det:

Det corresponds in general to the English it, but
has some idiomatic uses, as already shown in part.
(a) Det stands for the introductory there and
serves to bring the verb before the logical subject;
as, det,levde en gang en konung, once there lived a
king; det sprang ett par gossar over fdltet, literally,
there ran a couple of boys across the field.
NOTE. The verb does not as in English agree with the logical subject but is

always in the singular. This form is often resorted to for emphasis.

(b) Det finns, det gives, and det dr:

1. There is, and there are, expressing mere exist-
ence, are rendered by det finns, det gives, and det
dr.

2. Det finns, more seldom det gives, expresses

existence within a space of extended or indefinite
limits, whereas det dr expresses existence within
 REFLEXIVE VERBb. 139

a definite space of relatively small extent det fanns

:

dnnu drliga man, there were still honest men; det

gives intet val, there is no choice det finns, or gives
;

en Gud, there is a God; det dr ett par herrar vid

dorren, there are a couple of gentlemen at the door.
Note the singular of the verb, irrespective of the
number of the following noun.
(c) Det is used expletively to represent another
word, phrase, or clause already used, and of which
the repetition is avoided (it is then rendered by so
or not translated) .Ex. han var rik, nu dr han det
:

ej Idngre, he was rich, now he is so no longer; vet

du vad han sade? Ja, det gor jag; do you know
what he said? Yes, I do; dr han hdr? Ja, det tror
fag; is he here? Yes, I think so.

REFLEXIVE VERBS.
245. Reflexive verbs "reflect" the action upon
the subject. Hence the object is always the pro-
noun corresponding to the subject.

246. A reflexive verb has no peculiarity of con-

jugation. The pronoun object is placed immedi-

ately after the verb.

247. The reflexive form is used much more wide-
ly in Swedish than in English, often giving rise to
secondary significations which require their own
peculiar translations. Examples :

erinra, to remind erinra sig, to remember

inbilla, to make believe inbilla sig, to imagine
uppfora, to perform, erect uppfora sig, to behave
tro, to believe tro sig, to presume, dare
fatta, to seize fat ta sig, to compose one-
self
140 REFLEXIVE VERBS.

Some verbs are used only reflexively ; as,

befinna sig, to be (as to tilldraga sig, to take place

health, condition)
beflita sig, to apply one- begiva sig, to betake one-
self self

248. Conjugation of the reflexive verb: att

inbilla sig, to imagine.

PRESENT INDICATIVE IMPERFECT INDICATIVE

Sg. jag inbillar mig jag inbillade mig, etc.
du inbillar dig
han inbillar sig
ni inbillar er (eder)
PI. vi inbilla oss vi inbillade oss, etc.
I inbillen er (eder)
'

ni inbilla er (eder)
de inbilla sig

PERFECT PLUPERFECT
jag har inbillat mig, etc. jag hade inbillat mig, etc.

FUTURE FUTURE PERFECT

jag skall inbilla mig, etc. jag skall ha inbillat mig,
etc.

IMPERATIVE INFINITIVES
2nd Sg. Present :

inbilla dig (familiar) att inbilla sig

2nd PI. Perfect :

inbillen er (archaic) attha(va) inbillat sig

2nd Sg. and PI. Future Perfect:
inbilla er att skola ha inbillat sig
1st PI.
Idt(om) oss inbilla oss, etc.
NOTE. The reflexives may be intensified by sjiilv: han alskade sig sjdlv och
icke sina medmanniskor : he loved himself and not his fellow men. The student
should, however, avoid the use of sjalv with the reflexives, this construction
being very limited.
 EXERCISE. 141

249. Note such idiomatic reflexive constructions

as: jag skar mig i fingret, I cut my finger; Karl
har brutit av sig benet, Carl has broken his leg;
satt pa dig hatten, put on your hat. The postposi-
tive definite article is often used instead of the pos-
sessive with nouns which denote parts of the body
and articles of clothing. The possessor may be
represented by an object pronoun.

250. THE RECIPROCAL PRONOUN is varandra, each

other, one another, which is indeclinable : vi trdffade
varandra, we met each other; vi dlskade varandra,
we loved one another.
NOTE. The reciprocal idea may, as has been stated before, often be expressed
by the -s form of the verb vi traffas, we meet one another hdstarna bitas,
: ;

the horses bite one another sang och gladje foljas at, song and joy accom-
;

pany one another. When no agent is mentioned the -s form of the passive
must often be avoided since it may give a reciprocal meaning to the verb
(186).

EXERCISE XXII.

A. Continue the following: 1. Jag skall klada mig

varmt, sa att jag ej f orkyler mig, du . . .
dig . . .
,
sa att,
etc. 2. Innan jag mottog frammande, maste jag klada om
mig, innan du . .
., maste du. . .
dig, etc. 3. Om jag inte
uppfor mig battre, sa maste jag skammas, om du, etc.
4. Jag hade befunnit mig battre, pm jag hade skyddat mig
mot kolden, du, etc. 5. Om jag ej andrar mig, och det ej

regnar, sa kommer jag, om du, etc.

Translate: 1. I think so. 2. We shall see one another

soon. 3.
Hurry, Carl, we are waiting for (pa) you. 4.

There are two industrious boys in this room. 5. Can you

tell if there is a postoffice in (vid or pa) this street? 6.

Stay at home, boys, it is freezing and snowing.

 142 EXERCISE.

Det gar pa verandan, nu knackar det pa dorren;

B. 1.

skynda dig, Anna, att oppna. 2. Jag inaste ga och klada

om mig; det passar ej att taga emot frarnmande, kladd
som jag ar. 3. Jag tror, att det ar herr Edgren, bed ho-
nom fb'rmaket och satta sig, det drojer endast ett
stiga in i

par minuter, tills jag ar far dig. 4. Jag hoppas ni ursaktar,

att jag bar latit er vanta, herr Edgren. 5. Hur star det

till? S'a trakigt

1
, att min man icke ar hemma, det skulle
ha glatt honom att fa traffa er. 6. Jag mar fortraffligt,
fru Sterner. Men hur befinna ni er nu for tiden (nowa-

days) Jag horde for nagon tid sedan, att Karl hade
? 7.

fb'rkylt sig mycket svart. 8. Vi ma alia bra nu, men vadret

iindrar sig sa hastigt nu for tiden, att det ar omb'jligt att

skydda sig mot forkylning. 9. I gar snoade det, i dag reg-

nar det, nu blixtrade det till och med, tror jag. 10. Sag
till (at) gossarna, att de uppfora sig litet battre, Anna,
Erik skriker ju, som om det gallde livet. 11. De kunna
2
val roa sig utan att vasnas sa; herr Edgren och jag kun-
na knappast hora varandra. 12. Ad jo, fru Sterner; det
var trakigt, att Karl ej var hemma, men vi traffas val
senare.
3 Val
J
It is too bad that, etc. ; boken ar trakig, the book bores me. I

suppose, I should think, very likely, etc.

1
C. 1. I think the weather has changed ; it is becoming
cloudy, it looks as if it would (skulle) rain soon. 2. It is

if we in- and we must dress warmly

quite (ganska) chilly
tend to go out, otherwise (annars) we shall catch cold.
3. Somebody is walking on the porch; now there is a
2

knock 2 . Please look and see (se efter) who it is, Anna.
4. Father, it is Mr. Lind. How are you, Mr. Lind ? I am
very glad
3
to see you. 5. The pleasure mutual, Mr. Len-
is

nart, it is long since we met. 6. Whydo the boys make

such a noise (B, 11), Anna? Tell (B, 10) them to behave
 VOCABULARY. 143

when company. 7. If I am not mistaken

1
better there is ,

yelling ; he ought to be ashamed to behave

1
it is Carl that is

so badly. 8. Who is that lady you greeted ? It is the wife

of Mr. Brown. 9. We do not know one another well, but
we always greet one another when we meet (250). 10. Who
is Mr. Brown ? He is a man who always lacks 3 money and
who wants to borrow from everybody. 11. He used to be
much respected, but he is no longer so (244, c.). 12. There
are not many (manga) in this town who would lend him
4
money. 13. Has he presumed to ask you to lend him?
3
14. No, he knows that it is not worth while 15. Good-bye, .

I must hurry; there is much work for me at home.

1 2 3 4
Use reflex, verb, 242, 2. Use an impersonal construction, 242, 3. Pre-
siime tro sig.

VOCABULARY.
befin'na sig, to feel, to be knappast, hardly
(health) en kold, cold
droja (intr.), lib, to delay, kylig, -t, cool
take time ett liv, ,
life

fattas (dep. v., often impers.) Idta, Idt, Idto, Idtit, to let,

I, to lack allow
frysa, fros, froso, frusit, -en, miss'taga (insep., see taga),
et, to freeze to mistake
ftirdig, -t, ready misstaga sig, to be mistaken
forky'la siff, lib, to catch cold mulna (generally impers.), I,
en forkyl'ning, -ar, cold (health) to become cloudy
ett for'mak, parlor
motas (used reciprocally), to
en glddje, joy
meet one another
giilla, lib, to have a value;
concern passa, I, to fit; be proper
hdl'sa to roa sig, I, to amuse oneself
pa, I, greet
to dress (some- senare, later
kldda, lib,
skrika, skrek, skreko, skri-
body)
Jcltida sia, to dress (oneself) kit, to yell, cry
kldda om' (sig), to change skydda, I, to protect
dress skynda sig, I, to hurry
144 MODAL AUXILIARIES.
sfcummas (dep.), lib, to be trdkig, -t, boring, sad, bad
ashamed uppfo'ra, lib, to erect; to per-
snoa (impers.), I, to snow form
std till', to be (health) uppfora sig, to conduct oneself
1
svdr, -t, difficult, serious fora upp to bring up
,

sd att (conj.), so that ur'sakta, I, to excuse

till och med, even vasnas (dep.), I, to make noise
tills (conj.), until I, to change (something)
dndra,
traffas (used reciprocally), to iindra sig, to change one's mind
meet or see one another omsesidig, -t, mutual
IDIOMS.
1. Varfor drojer han sd lunge?Why does he stay so long?
2. Myntet galler icke Idngre, the coin is no longer current;
han galler icke mycket har, he is of small account here.
3. att skdmmas for ndgot, to be ashamed of something.
4. att ta emot' frdmmande, to receive company.
5. Hur star det till med er Itrorf How is your brother?

LESSON XXIII.

Verbal Auxiliaries.
MODAL AUXILIARIES.
251. The modal auxiliaries are:
INFINITIVE PRESENT IMPERFECT SUPINE
SING. PLUR. SG. AND PL.
kunna, can kan kunna kunde kunnat
ma, may ma ma matte
bora, ought to bor bora borde bort
skola, shall skall (ska) skola(ska) skulle stcolat
vilja, will vill vilja mile velat
maste, must maste maste maste mast
tor, is likely tor tora torde
The modals are conjugated regularly; some of them, how-
ever, are defective. The following remarks will suffice:
(a) The archaic second person has the ending -en: I skolen
(md takes only -n in 2nd pers. pi.: I man).
(~b) The singular form is practically the only one used in
conversation.
 MODAL AUXILIARIES. 145

(c) The compound tenses 'are formed regularly: jag har

skolat, han hade kunnat. Skola, md, tor, mdste, and bora
lack future and future perfect; md and tor lack perfect and
pluperfect.
fd)The subjunctives of the modals except of kunna and
vilja are not formed with md, matte, and skulle. The im-
perfect and pluperfect subjunctives only are in use (except
in the case of vilja and kunna) and they are like the indica-
tive: kunna and vilja may form a present subjunctive with
md or matte and the present infinitive; an imperfect sub-
junctive with skulle and the present infinitive; a perfect sub-
junctive with md or matte and the perfect infinitive; a plu-
perfect subjunctive with skulleand the perfect infinitive.
The imperfect and pluperfect subjunctives generally used are
identical with the imperfect and pluperfect indicative: im-
perfect subjunctive, jag skulle kunna, vilja, or jag kunde,
ville; perfect subjunctive, jag md, mdtte ha kunnat, velat;
pluperfect subjunctive, jag skulle ha kunnat, velat or jag hade
kunnat, velat.

SOME USES OF THE MODAL AUXILIARIES.

The modal auxiliaries have more complete
252.
forms in Swedish than in English. The Swedish
modal must for that reason sometimes be translated
by a paraphrase; as, jag mdste arbeta i gar, I had
to work yesterday; jag har kunnat gora det, I have
been able to do it.

253. The modal auxiliaries govern, as in English,

the simple infinitive: han sdger, att han ej kan
komma, he says that he cannot come; jag maste
ga nu, I must go now.
NOTE.They are generally accompanied by an infinitive, but sometimes a
complementary verb may be implied when an adverb of direction is used a
;

verb of motion may be omitted after skola, vilja, and mdste: jag maste hem,
I must go home ; jag vill in, I want to come in.

254. In the pluperfect subjunctive of skola and

bora, Swedish prefers a construction made up of
146 SENSES OF MODALS.

the imperfect subjunctive of the modal and the

perfect infinitive of the verb to one consisting of
the pluperfect subjunctive of the modal and the
present infinitive, conforming thus with the Eng-
lish usage. The treatment of kunna is identical,
except that when we wish especially to empha-
size the pluperfect time of the ability or possibil-
ity we use the pluperfect subjunctive of kunna.
Ex. han skulle ha gjort det, he should have done it
: ;

ni borde ha kommit, you ought to have come;

jag kunde ha skrivit, I could have written; but
jag hade kunnat skriva, I might have been able
to write.
NOTE. Vilja, on the other hand, would in a similar case always be put in
the pluperf. and the depending verb in the present infinitive: jag hade velat
skriva brevet, and not jag wile ha skrivit; han hade velat ga, om hans mor ej
hade varit sjuk, he would have wished to go, if his mother had not been sick.

SENSES OF MODAL AUXILIARIES.

255. Kunna. Originally it meant to know how, to
be skilled in. This use is still retained in the verb
when used independently han kan svenska, sin liixa;
:

he knows Swedish, his lesson.

(a) Ability : han kan Idsa, men han vill ej, he can
read but he does not want to.

(b) Possibility: det kan nog hdnda, that may

happen; jag kunde nog gora det, I could perhaps
do it.
(c) Permission: ni ga, now you may go.
nu kan
In this sense it is often used as a mild command.
(d) Willingness det kan jag giva (ge) er genast,
:

I can give you that at once.

(e) Habit, custom hon kunde grata i timtal, nar
:
 EXERCISE. 147

hon tdnkte pa sitt doda barn, she would cry for

hours when she thought of her dead child.
NOTE. Habit and custom are more often expressed by the verbs bruka, and
and the infinitive, or by the present or imperfect of the verb: ndr han sag
pliiga
mig, brukade lian jraga, or, frdgade han, whenever he saw me he would ask.

256. Ma.
(a) Auxiliary: the present and imperfect are
used as auxiliaries to form the present subjunctive.
(b) Desire: ma Gud valsigna vart arbete, may
God bless our work; vi matte vdl komma i tid till
taget, may we only come in time to the train (would
that we might etc.).
NOTE 1. Matte expresses a more vivid wish than ma.
Z. From this sense of ma springs its use in purpose clauses and some other
clauses introduced by att: han badj att jag matte stanna (also, bad mig att
stanna) he asked me to remain.

(c) Permission, possibility: ma (not matte) may

be used with the sense of kan: det ma sd vara, that
may be so occasionally in the sense of fa (263, a)
;
:

det ma du ej gora, you may not do that.

NOTE. Here belongs the expression mahdnda, perhaps.

(d) Supposition, expressed by the imperfect of

the modal matte (not ma) det matte ha varit :

hemskt, it must have been uncanny; du matte vara

mycket trott, I dare say, you are very tired.

EXERCISE XXIII.
A. Continue: 1. Jag visste icke, vad jag ville, du visste

icke, vad du ville, etc. Jag hade kunnat gora en resa,

2.

om jag hade velat, du hade, etc. 3. Jag skulle vilja ga ut,

men jag maste stanna hemma, du skulle, etc. 4. Jag skulle
ha spelat tennis, om jag hade kunnat, du, etc. 5. Om jag
148 EXERCISE.

hade velat fara med tiotaget, sa hade jag mast skynda mig;,
om du, Jag horde ha fragat min far forst, om han
etc. 6.

ville lata mig ga med, du horde, etc. 7. Jag ville giirna

veta, om jag skulle kunna gora det, du, etc. 8. Matte jag

ej ha kommit for sent matte du, etc. !

B. Min van Karl fragade mig i gar morse, om jag

1.

ville fara med honom till staden. 2. Jag sade at honom,

att jag hade mycket arbete, som jag horde gora, men att
jag onskade, att han matte fraga min far, om jag kunde
fara med. 3. Matte pappa bara tillata det! tankte jag,
nar Karl avlagsnade sig foi att bedja honom om lov. 4. Vi
skulle kunna ha sa roligt tillsammans. 5. Naturligtvis

skulle vi bevista det stora fotbollspelet, som skulle utkam-

pas mellan tva av de basta fotbollagen i staden. 6. Jag bar
ofta bett pappa, att han matte lata mig spela fotboll, men
jag bar kunnat overtyga honom om att det ar en nyttig
ej
idrott. 7. Jag brukar ofta saga, att om han blott forstodo

spelet, sa maste han finna det intressant. 8. "Det ma sa

vara", sade han en gang, "jag bar blott sett ett enda spel
och kunde alls inte bli pa det klara darmed. 9. Det syntes
mig vara litet for mycket for ett spel och litet for litet for

ett slagsmal." 10. Karl kom tillbaka och sade, att han
hade mast lova, att vi skulle vara tillbaka sa tidigt, att jag
kunde vattna blomsterrabatterna och kiippa grasmattan.
11. Det matte ha varit svart for Karl att fa pappas tilla-
telse.

C. Conversation. 1. Vad fragade Karl er i

gar morse?
2. Varfor trodde ni ej, att ni skulle fa folja med? 3. Vad
onskade ni, att Karl skulle gora? 4. Varfor avlagsnade
Karl sig. 5. Vad skulle ni ga till, om ni finge resa till sta-

den ? 6.Mellan vilka skulle spelet utkampas ? 7. Vad bar

ni ej lyckats overtyga er far om ? 8. Varfor tror ni ej, att
 VOCABULARY. 149

er far finner spelet intressant? 9. Hur

manga fotbollspel
har er far bevistat? 10. Har Karl lyckats att fa er fars
tillatelse till resan? 11. Vad maste ni gora, nar ni kom-
mer hem?
D. 1. I should like to go to town with my friend Carl.
2. A football game will be played between the two best
teams in town and I should like very much 1 to attend it.

3. But do not know whether (om) I

I 2
may go, for my
father has given me much work to do before evening.
4. But it seems to me that he ought to allow me to go this
time (gang). 5. I have had (perf. of maste) to stay at
home all summer 3 in order to take care of the garden,
water the flower beds and cut the lawn. 6. I have always
wished to play football, but my father does not think that
it isa useful sport. 7. If Carl were only here, he would

be able to get my father's permission. 8. I am so glad

that you came, Carl. Would you go and ask father (pappa)
whether I may go?
2
9. You
see, I ought (horde] really
to work to-day. I shouldhave done (254) this work yes-
terday. 10. What did papa say? Did he give his per-
2
mission? you may go with me; but you will have
11. Yes,

(pres. of maste} to be back early. 12. He must be very

rich, for he spends much money. 13. I wish he would come
soon so that we could 4 begin to eat. 14. Now I must say
5
good-bye to you, but we might meet again to-morrow.
l
Skulle mycket garna vilja... 2
Fdr (263). 'After hela, which is not
preceded by the prepositive article, the noun takes the definite form. 'Imper-
5
fect subjunctive of kunna. s-form, 186a.

VOCABULARY.
atttid, always en Worn''sterrabatt' ', -er, flower
av'ldgsna, I, to rerriove bed
avlagsna sig, to go away blott, only
bara, only fara, to travel, go
bevista, I, to attend fara med, to accompany
150 SENSES OF MODALS.

ett fotbollspel, ,
football game naturligtvis, of course
ett fotbollag (lag), , foot- nyttig, -t, useful
ball team ett slagsmdl, , fight
forst, first skota, Ha, take care of
for mycket, too much ett spel, game, play
,

en grasmatta, -or, lawn spela, play

I,

en gang, once tennis, tennis

en i'drott, -er, sport tidigt, early
igen, again tillsammans, together
Tclippa, Ha, to cut, mow en tilldtelse, permission
ett lov, permission
,
tillata (insep.), to permit
lova, I, to promise ett tiotdg, ten o'clock train
mellan, between vattna, I, to water
i gar morse, yesterday morn- verkligen, really
ing o'vertyga ( insep. ) , I, to convince

IDIOMS: 1. att fara till staden, to go to town.

2. Jag vill gdrna fara med, I should like to accompany.
3. Det synes mig, or jag tyclcer, it seems to me.
4. bli pd det Jclara, understand.

< %

LESSON XXIV.
Verbal Auxiliaries (Continued).
SENSES OF MODAL AUXILIARIES (Continued).
257. Bora.
(a) Duty: jag bb'r gb'ra vad som ar rtitt, I ought
to do what is right.
NOTE The imperfect borde is generally used with present meaning and
1.

hag the same signification as bar (ought) if unaccented du borde skammas. :

you ought to be ashamed of yourself. If accented it implies that one does

not do what one ought to, for instance: jag borde ga hem och arbeta, I ought
(that is, if I were to do my duty) to go home and work.
2. In the sense of duty bora is weaker than skola.

(b) Calculation taget bor vara har om tio minu-

:

ter, the train ought to be here in ten minutes.

(c) Fitness : sa bor det vara, thus it ought to be.

258. Skola. Originally it signified duty or obli-

gation.
 SENSES OF MODALS. 151

(a) Auxiliary:
1. The present (skall) is used as an auxiliary
with the infinitive to form the future tense jag skall
:

ga, I shall go jag skall hava gatt, I shall have gone.

;

2. The imperfect (skulle) is used with the in-

finitive as one mode of forming the imperfect and
pluperfect subjunctive.
(b) Condition or contingency: om ni skulle se
honom, sa hdlsa honom frdn mig, give him my greet-
ings, if you should see him han sade, att han skulle
;

komma, he said that he would come.

(c) Duty or necessity, when proceeding from
the speaker :du skulle ha gatt, ndr han bad dig, you
should have gone when he asked you; du skall icke
stjala, thou shalt not steal; om vi ska gora det, sa
lat oss gora det snart, if we are to do it, then let us
do it soon.
(d) Threat or promise: det ska du inte ha gjort
for inte, I will remember you for this (i. e. repay
you in kind).
(e) Intention: han skulle ha kommit i gar, he
intended to come yesterday.

(f) Report: han skall vara kolossalt rik, he is

said to be enormously rich.

(g) Wish: vi skulle allt ha en trddgard, i vilken

alia slags blommor skulle vdxa, I wish we had a gar-
den in which all kinds of flowers might grow.

259. Vilja.
(a) Will, intention, purpose: han ville visst icke
gora dig ond, he did not at a!l intend to make you
152 SENSES OF MODALS.

angry; han vill hem, jag kan ej kvarhdlla honom,

he is determined to go home, I cannot keep him.
(b) Wish, entreaty or request: han ville garna
hjalpa, he was anxious to help v ill ni komma ndr- ;

mare or vill ni vara sd god och komma ndrmare,

please come a little closer (vill is very often used
thus to express a mild command) ; jag ville garna
ha en kopp till, I should like another cup.
NOTE 1. The imperfect subjunctive
of vilja with the adverb garna, willingly,
is generally used to express a request politely as above, sometimes with vdl
and a negative: ni ville vdl inte gora del for migf Would you do that for me'
2. Vilja is often used with an object, especially a pronoun: Vad vill han
dig t does he have to say to you ? han vill mig vdl, he wishes me well,
What
he well disposed toward me.
is Its signification seems to forbid its use with

any other than animate subjects, but it is often used figuratively with inani-
mate: min klocka vill ej ga, my watch does not run (won't run) ; blommor
'vilja ej vaxa i sadan jord, flowers do not grow in such soil.

REMARK.Do not translate will and would by vill, ville,

ifthey are only a sign of the future or the subjunctive. Will
and would denoting habitual action are generally expressed
by the simple tenses, present and past, or by the verbs bruka
and plaga (255, e).

260. Mdste.
(a) Physical necessity: jag mdste ha mat, annars
svdlterjag ihjal, I must have food, or else I shall
starve to death.
(b) Logical necessity: det mdste vara sant, that
must be true.
(c) Moral necessity: barn mdste lyda sina for-
dldrar, children must obey their parents.

261. Tor.
Probability, supposition: the imperfect torde is
used with present sense and is of much more fre-
quent occurrence than the present tor: det torde
 VERBAL AUXILIARIES. 153

vara ganska svdrt, very likely it is quite difficult;

han torde vara sjuk, ty han lovade sdkert att komma,
I suppose that he is sick, for he promised surely to

come.

OTHER VERBAL AUXILIARIES.

262. The causative auxiliary lata, to let, make,
or cause (to do or to be done). It has three main
significations :

(a) to allow, to give permission : han lat pojkarna

leka, he allowed the boys to play.
(b) to havesomebody do a thing: jag har latit
Karl hdmta bro'det, I have had Carl fetch the bread.
When the verb has this signification the subject of
the infinitive is often omitted: jag har Idtit gora en

rock, I have had a coat made.

XOTE. In the latter case it is best to render lata, by have and the infinitive

by the passive participle.

(c) Lata is used to paraphrase the first person

plural of the imperative lat oss ga; also occasionally
:

as a substitute for the passive as, det later sig gora, ;

that can be done; han har latit overtala sig, he has

been persuaded.
NOTE. In this reflexive construction the passive infinitive is also permitted :
the reflexive always precedes the infinitive: han har latit sig ofvertalas, he has
been persuaded.

263. Fa, to get, to receive, is also used as an

auxiliary in a variety of meanings.
(a) Permission : nu far du ga, now you may go.
Tn this sense it is more common than either kunna
255, c) or ma (256, c).
(b) Necessity: som gosse fick han ofta gora en
Swedish Grammar 11
154 EXERCISE.

mans arbete, as a boy he often had to do a man's

work.
NOTE Very often the word lov, permission, is used euphemistically with
1.

fa when denotes necessity: du far lov alt studera nu, you must study now.
it

2. Mdstc has a more general and absolute meaning than fa; thus, we must
all die, must be rendered by, vi mdste alia do.

(c) With the verbs veta, hora, and se, fa is used in

an inchoative sense resembling the English get; as,
hon fick veta det i gar, she received news of it yes-
terday (learned to know) kommer han? du far se, ;

you will see (learn).

NOTE. When used independently fa presents many striking analogies with
gel. Fa tag pa, to get hold of fa igenom en
; sale, get a thing through, etc.

264. Lar
used only in the present indicative
is

to denote a supposition based on report. In this

sense it is more common than skola (258, f ) han :

lar vara sjuk, they say he is sick.

NOTE. The same idea is more commonly expressed by the use of the adverb
visst, certainly, surely ;
han ar visst sjuk. The adverbs allt, nog and vdl ex-
press the idea conveyed by torde (261).

EXERCISE XXIV.
A. Continue: 1. Jag bor vara hemma om en timma,
ty min far har sagt, att jag maste hjalpa honom, du bor
vara, etc. 2. Om jag anda skall gora det, sa borcle jag gora
det strax, etc. 3. Jag skulle garna vilja ha kaffe, om jag
blott finge lov af min lakare att dricka det, du skulle garna,
etc. gosse hade jag nog fatt arbeta tungt, om jag
4. Som
hade kunnat, men jag var sa klen, som gosse hade du, etc.
5. Jag skulle ha latit gora mig en kostym, om min far hade

velat ge mig pengar den med, etc. 6. Om han

att betala
hade velat avlagsna kunde jag ha gatt till sangs
sig, sa

tidigt, etc. 7. Jag lat honom vanta pa svar, ty jag var ej

pa det klara med hvad han ville, du lat honom, etc.

 EXERCISE. 155

B. En bonde hade kommit till en marknad och ville

kopa nagot. Han stod vid ett av marknadsstanden och

sag, hur folk kopte glasbgon. Handlanden gav dem en
bok med fin stil i, sedan satte de pa ett par glasogon och
sago uppmarksamt i boken. "Kan ni lasa den liar sfilen
bra?" fragade handlanden, och nar den andre svarade ja,
sa kopte han Bonden ville ocksa kopa sig ett
glasb'gonen.
par glasogon. Han
steg fram till disken, satte pa sig det

ena paret efter det andra och sag i boken, man lade ater
bort dem. Handlanden ville hjalpa honom och erbjb'd ho-
nom olika glasogon, men bonden sade gang efter aiman:
"Jag kan inte lasa med dem." Till sist fragade honom en
annan bonde, som under tiden hade kommit dit: "Men
sag mig, kan du verkligen lasa?" "En sadan dumbom du
ar", svarade den forsta bonden, "skulle jag. val kopa mig
glasogon, om jag kunde lasa?"

(7. Conversation: 1. Vem hade kommit till markna-

den? 2. Vad han garna gora? 3. Vad gjorde man

ville

vid ett av standen? 4. Vad gjorde handelsmannen for att

kunna se, vad for glasogon han maste ge dem? 5. Av vem
bor man lata undersoka sina ogon, innan man koper glas-
ogon? (ogonlakaren). Yad for stil
6. kunna
de, som ha

svaga ogon, bast lasa? 7. Vad tyckte bonden, att han ocksa
skulle ha? 8. Vad gjorde han alltsa? 9. Vad fick han-

delsmannen lov att ge honom? (one pair after another).

10. Hade bonden velat kopa glasogon, om han hade kunnat

lasa? 11. Vad trodde han, att glasb'gonen skulle satta ho-
nom i stand 1 att gbra.
*Satta i stand, to enable; roro i stand, to be able.

D. 1. A peasant who was unable 1 to read wished to buy

a pair (of) spectacles. 2. He thought (trodde) that all
he had to have in order to be able (165, 2) to read was a
156 VOCABULARY.

pair (of) spectacles. 3.He said to himself: "I ought to

have spectacles, and if I can get a pair that fits me I shall
be able to read." 4. The peasant would not have wished
(254, note) to buy glasses, had he been able to read. 5. A
wise man would (258, b) have had (262, b) his eyes ex-
2
amined by an oculist before buying glasses. 6. The dealer

let him
try one pair after another, thinking
3
that he would
find a pair which would fit him. 7. The young man is not

permitted (263, a) to read because his eyes are weak.

8. The doctor says that he may read a short while to-mor-
row. 9. What do the children wish (to have) for Christ-
mas ? They want many things, but we can't afford to give
them much. 10. Then they will have (use pres. of modal)
to be satisfied with little. 11. Carl asked my father, "May
we go to town?" and my father answered, "You may go,
but you must be back before six o'clock." 12. Your father
must have a great deal to do now. Several times I have
wished to see him, but I have not been able 1 to. 13. Yes,
he is having (262, b) a house built in the country, and
must superintend the work. 14. Where have you had your
suit made? I should like (259, b) to have the address of

your tailor. 15. He can make clothes that fit; he is said

(258, g) to have studied his art in London.

1
Icke kunna in proper tense. : Expand into a temporal clause with innan.
3
Causal clause with emedan, endr or do.

VOCABULARY.
en adress', -er, address flere(a) more, several
en bonde, bonder, peasant forstdn'dig, -t, wise, sensible
bort'laggd (sep.), to put away genom, through
1

bygga, lib, to build glasogon, spectacles

en disk, -ar, counter gdng efter annan, time and
en dumbom*, -mar, fool again
er'bjuda, -bjo'd, -bjodo, -bju- en handlande, merchant
,

dit, -en, ~et, to offer en Jiandelsman, -man, dealer

 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 157

kliider, clothes en skriiddare, , tailor

en konst, -er, art atiga fram', to step forth
kort, , short stil
t -ar, style; print
liten, -et, def. lilla(e), pi. en stund, -er, while
smd, little wag, -t, weak
en marknad, -er, fair under tiden, in the meantime
ettmarknadsstund, booth un'dersoka tinsep.), to examine
mycket, much upp'marksam, -t, attentive
nu, now vilja ha', to want
nijjd, nojt, satisfied en ogonldkare, oculist ,

olik, -t, unlike, different overvaka (insep.), I, to super-

ett rdd, , advice; means intend
sex, six
IDIOMS: 1. Jag har ej rdd, I cannot afford.
2. Vad vill du ha julklappf What do you wish
till

for Christmas (.present)?

3. att luta sy en rock, to have a coat made.
J
More commonly used separably.
2
Note how final m of a word when the preceding vowel is short is doubled on
its becoming intervocalic by the addition of an ending (3).

LESSON XXV.
Indefinite Pronouns.

I. USED AS PRONOUNS ONLY.

265. Man (indeclinable) is used only in the
nominative as an indefinite personal subject and,
lacking an exact equivalent, is variously translated
one, they, you, we, people (cf. German man, French
on} Ex. man sager, att han har skrivit en ny bok,
. :

they say that he has written a new book; man fb'r-

talar mig, people slander me.

(a) In the oblique cases the corresponding forms

of en are used, ens for the genitive, en for the
objective the reflexive is sig. Thus vad man ger,
; :

bringar en lycka, what one gives brings one luck;

158 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

man skulle icke beromma sig sjdlv, one should not

praise oneself. The reflexive possessive is sin, sitt,
otherwise ens usedr ens vdnner dro ofta vdrre
is
an ens fiender, one's friends are often worse than
one's enemies; man bar vorda sina fordldrar, one
ought to honor one's parents.
(b)When man is the subject of a transitive verb
it is usually best to render the sentence by a passive :

man har behandlat honom ilia, he has been badly

treated.

266. Allting (gen. -s; no plur.), everything.

267. Ndgonting (gen. -s; no plur.), something,

anything.

268. Ingenting (gen. -s; no plur.), nothing,

Ingenting as well as ndgonting in a negative sen-
tence are often intensified by a following (sometimes
preceding) alls; as, har du sett nagonting? Ingen-
ting alls, have you seen anything? Nothing at all;
jag sag alls ingenting, I saw nothing whatever.
NOTE 1. Ingenting and ndgonting are followed by an adjective in the indef-
initeform of the neuter: har ni nagonting gott alt ataf do you have anything
good to eat? Likewise nagot and intet.
2. Ingenting is usually placed before the supine of a compound tense, ndgon-

ting, after; likewise intet is placed before and nagot after; Jag har ingenting
(intet) sett, jag har sett ndgonting (nagot). In a dependent clause ingenting and
intet come immediately after the subject: han sager, att han ingenting har sett.

269. Envar (gen. envars; no plur.) ; var och en

(neut. vart och ett, gen. vars och ens; no plur.),
sometimes en och var, everybody, every one var och :

en (envar) har sina fel, everybody has his faults;

envars (vars och ens) rykte bor respekteras, every-
body's reputation should be respected.
NOTE. Var och en is sometimes used adjectively.
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 151)

II. USED AS BOTH PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES.

270. En (neut. ett, only as adj., gen. ens, plur.
ena, def. form ene, ena), one, a, an: man tror ens
egna vdnner bast, one has most confidence in one's
own friends; han dr en av mina bdsta vdnner, he
is one of my best friends. In less elegant conversa-
tion en is used in the nominative with the same
sense as man; in the oblique cases it always takes
the place of man. It is not used after adjectives
like the English one: the red apple and the green
one, det roda applet och det grb'na.

271. Den
ene (-a) (fern, den ena, neut. det ena) ,

the one, often used in correlation with den an-

is
dre (-a), etc., the other: den ene kommer, den
andre gar, one comes, the other goes.

272. En och annan (neut. ett och annat, gen.

en och annans; no plur.), one now and then, one
here and there: en och annan sdger sd, one now
and then says so (some say so).
273. Ende (-a) (plur. and def. enda), only, is
used as an adjective: han var enda sonen, he was
the only son. When used as a pronoun it is always
preceded by the definite or indefinite article and
takes an -s in the genitive dessa voro de enda, som
:

voro ddr, these were the only ones who were there;
jag har ej sett en enda av dem, I have not seen a
single one of them.

274. Nagon (neut. nagot, gen. ndgons, nagots;

plur. nagra; gen. ndgras), some, some one, any,
anyone, a few, something, anything: har du nagra
1 GO EXERCISE.

pengar? have you any money? nagon har frag at

efter dig, some one (has) asked for you; jag har
ho'rt ndgot vackert om dig, I have heard something
nice about you; nagons hatt ligger har, somebody's
hat lies here.
NOTE 1. The words for any and some when used in a partitive sense are
often omitted: har ni tdndstickort do you have any matches?
2. Some when it means a little is translated by litet (lite).

275. Ingen (neut. intet, inget, gen. ingens,

no one, none, nobody,
intets; plur. inga, gen. ingas),
nothing; as adjective, no: jag har inga pengar (also
jag har icke nagra pengar), I have no money;
ingens karaktdr kan vara renare an hans, nobody's
character can be purer than his.
NOTE. The paraphrase icke nagon, nagra is more common than ingen, inga;
at the beginning of a statement ingen is preferred. Inget is becoming more
and more common for intet.

276. All (neut. allt, gen. alias, allts; plur. alia,

gen. alias), all, everything: Gud har skapat allt,
God has created everything; alia hans dottrar voro
vackra, all his daughters were pretty; all j or den
dr Guds verk, all the earth is the work of God.
NOTE 1. When all in English means whole it must be rendered by hela
without the prepositive article jag har arbetat hela doyen, I have worked
:

all day hela Paris,

; all Paris.
2. For the use of alls see 268, for the use of allra see 316.
Observe the following idiomatic uses of hel: som ett hell, as a whole;
3.

helt och hallet, wholly, completely pd del hela taget, taken as a whole, on
;

the whole.

EXERCISE XXV.
A. Supply the missing indefinites: 1. Ar . . .
(anybody}
dar? Jag ser ... (nobody}. 2. Men
jag ser ... (some-
body's) hatt hanga dar. . . .
(nobody) har kommit, sa
1
vitt jag vet. 3. (one) horde lasa dorren, annars kan
...

ju vem som heist komma in, och (one) hb'r det icke. . . .
 EXERCISE. 161

4. (somebody) kunde till och med komma ocli stjala

...

(one's) saker, utan att man visste det.

2
bort . . . 5. Brev-

bararen liar varit bar med ... (a few) brev for dig. 6. ...
(one) var ofrankerat, och jag maste betala fyrtio ore, . . .

(the other) var rekommenderat. 7. Har du (any) fri- . . .

marken att lana mig? Jag bar skrivit brev (all) da- . . .

gen till
(every one) . . . i
familjen, och jag bar inte . . .

(a single) frimarke kvar. 8. Hur skall (one) fa ... . . .

2
(one's) post, nar ... (one) ar ute och reser? 9. Lat

adressera dina brev poste restante till (some) av de sta- . . .

der, du amnar besoka. 10. ... (everybody), som ar ute

och reser, svarighet med posten. 11. Middagen maste
liar

vara fardig nu. Var god och tag plats bredvid mig.
12. ... (no) ceremonier, som ni ser; vi aro blott ...

(some) vanner. 13. Behagar ni ... (some) soppa? Sop-

pan iir utmarkt. Skulle ni vilja ge mig ... (a little more),
li. Behagar ni en kopp kaffe till?
l
Sd vitt (vitt, neuter of vid), as far as; note omission of som (as). *Sin
or ens (265, a).

B. I am at home to no one 1 ;
I wish to rest a little.

2. If anyone asks for me, say that I shall be 2 at home again

at seven o'clock (klockan sju). 3. One (271) of those two
Americans asked for (efter) you; he left no card, and I
cannot recall his name. 4. Have you ever seen anything

soannoying? Here I have waited for (pa) him all week,

and now when I am out (for) a few minutes he comes.
5. Do you have anything good to eat? Yes, this chicken
is excellent. Should you like a wing or a leg? 7. If
6.

me, I shall take a little of this fruit. 8. Take

2
you will allow
what you want without ceremony; here one helps oneself
(248, note). 9. Try this wine; it is ten years old and of
with (till) the fruit. 10. Thank you, not now; I shall

3
the best quality. One generally takes a glass (of) wine
162 VOCABULARY.

taste your wine another time; but I shall take another

11. One single apple like this is worth more to me
4
apple.
than all (the) wine in the world. 12. Now, when we have
eaten, we shall see the sights of (bese) the city. I haven't
seen anything of Stockholm yet. Where shall we go? 13.

Everybody who visits Stockholm must of course visit the

famous Skansen and the Northern Museum. 14. Let us
all go there. What do you prefer, car, cab, or automo-
bile?
translated: not... for anybody. 2 Use the present tense. 'Adverbs cannot
stand between subject and verb except adverbs of negation and a few others
in a dependent clause (179, a). *Translate: one such apple as (som) this.

VOCABULARY.
adresse'ra, I, to address lasa, I la, to lock
en amerikan', -er, American mer, more
behaga, I (often impers.), to minnas (dep.), lib, to remember
please; to desire ofrankerad, -at, without stamp
bredvid, beside poste restante, general delivery
en brevbarare, , letter car- rekommende'rad, -at, regis-
rier tered
bast, best sju, seven
en ceremoni', -er, ceremony smaka, I, to taste
en familj', -er, family stjiila bort', bortstjula (sep.),
ett frimarke, -n, postage stamp -stal, -stulo, -stulit, -en,

fyrtio, forty -et, to steal

furarglig, -t, annoying en svdrignet, -er, difficulty
forsoka, Ila, to try en soppa, -or, soup
Jiiinga, lib, to hang ito.-teo
ett kort (visit'kort) , ,
card Vila sig (refl.), I, to rest
(visiting card) ett vin, -er,wine
en kvalitet', -er, quality en vinge, -ar, wing
kvar, over, left ett ore, -n, ore (coin worth
lamna, I, to leave 14 cent).
IDIOMS: 1. Vad behagar nif What would you like?
2. Var god och tag plats, please sit down.
3. Skulle ni vilja ha en kopp kaffe tillf Would you
like another cup of coffee?
 LESSON XXVI.
Indefinite Pronouns (Continued).
277. Mdngen (neut. mdnget, gen. mangens; pi.
and def manga, gen. mangas) many a in the singu-
.
,

lar and many in the plural. Ex.: manga vackra

blommor vdxa i trddgarden, many beautiful flowers
grow in the garden; mdngen rik dr olycklig, many
a rich person is unhappy.

278. Mycket (indeclinable), much: hur mycket

pengar har du pa dig ? how much money do you have
about you? icke alls mycket, not very much.

279. Annan (neut. annat, gen. annans; pi. and

def. andra, gen. andras), other. Like the English
other it preceded either by the definite or in-
is

definite article in the singular: har ni en annan

bok? Have you another book? Vad go'ra de andra?
What are the others doing?
NOTE 1. ffagon annan, ndgot annat means somebody else, something else.
2. En annan means another, a different one; en till means one more: var
god och giv mig en annan bok, please give me another book jag ville garna
;

ha en kopp till, I should like another cup.

3. Varannan signifies every other varannan dag, every other day.
:

280. Somlig (neut. somligt; pi. somliga, gen.

somligas), some, is used as a pronoun or an adjec-
tive generally only in the neut. sing, and plur. of
all genders: somliga mdnniskor, some people; som-

liga o'nska det har, andra det ddr, some want this
and some that.
NOTE 1. Note the correlatives somliga. .
andra, some.
. . . others.
. .

2. The English some is generally to be rendered by ndgon, nagra, in speak-

ing of individuals or individual things; by litet (lite), in speaking of quantity.

281. Flera(e) (gen. fleras), more, several.

164 INDEFINITES.

282. Flesta(e) (gen. flestas) , most, the majority.

Flera and used as comparative and superlative of
fiesta are
manga. When flera does not express comparison it signifies
several, quite a few; fiesta is always preceded by the article,
but the noun it modifies does not take the postpositive ar-
ticle: flera voro hiir i dag an i gar, more were here to-day
than yesterday; pd fieras begaran sjong han sdngen, at the
request of several he sang the song; de fiesta rosta nog fur
honom, the majority will doubtless vote for him.

283. Fa (gen. fas), few. It is very often pre-

ceded by nagra: ndgra fa voro hdr, a few were here.

284. Varannan (neut. vartannat; no plur.),

every other: varannan dag ha vi tyska, we have
German every other day.
NOTE. Om vartannat, topsy-turvy; var (vart) tredje, var (vart) fjdrde;
every third ; every fourth.

285. Endera (neut. ettdera) , one of two, either;

ndgondera (neut. nagotdera), either;
ingendera (intetdera), neither;
vardera (vartdera), each.
These take an when used pro-
s in the genitive
nominally.- adjectives. Ex.
They are rarely used as :

ingendera av oss fick ndgot, neither of us got any-

thing; han kan komma endera dagen, he may come
one of these days ; hdr ha ni ett apple vardera, here
you have an apple each.
286. Var (neuter vart; no plur.) 1

varje (indeclinable) Veach, every

varenda (neut. vartenda, no pl.)J
Varje only used adjectively. Varenda used as
is

a pronoun followed by en, ett. Ex. varje larjunge

is :

mdste go'ra sin plikt. every pupil must do his duty;

 INDEFINITES. 165

jag har givit bort vartenda ett, I have given away

every one.
NOTE. Varje may sometimes be used with the sense of any: varje penna dr
god nog, any pen will do.

287. Vilken (neut. vilket, plur. vilka) som heist

and vad som heist (neuter) are used pronominally
and adjectively with the sense of whosoever, what-
soever, whichsoever, anyone at all, anything at all,
any at all; vem som heist, whosoever, anyone (at
all), isused only pronominally.
When these words are used as adjectives, som
heist generally follows the noun when used as pro-
;

nouns, som may be dropped before a relative clause.

Ex. vilken penna som heist dr god nog, any pen is
:

good enough; vem som heist kan komma, anyone

at all may come; Ids vad bok som heist, read any
book you please; vid vilken tid som heist, at any
time; vdlj hvad heist, som passar, chose anything
that suits you.
1. Ndgon,
ingen, hurudan, and conjunctive adverbs
like nar,hur, sd, likewise form compounds with som heist
to become especially indefinite; as, dr det ndgon som heist
or sale, varfor du icke kan din Idxa? Nej, ingen som heist,
is there any reason whatsoever why you do not know your
lesson? No, no reason whatever; kom nar som heist, come
at any time; kor sd fort som heist, drive as fast as you
please.
2. The particle an is also used with the relatives and cer-
tain conjunctive adverbs to impart an indefinite force: vem
det an dr, whoever it may be; vad du an gor, gor det veil,
whatever you do, do it well; vad svar han an gav, whatever
answer he gave; hur fort det an gar, sd, hinna vi ej from
i tid, no matter how fast we go, we won't be there in time.

3. Note the difference in meaning between han gjorde

vad som heist, and vad han an gjorde.
166 EXERCISE.

288. Bdda, bdgge (gen. bddas, bdgges), both,

are plural forms. When bada is preceded by the
prepositive article it means two; as, de bdda flic-
korna tiro systrar, the two girls are sisters; but
bada systrarna kommo, both sisters came.
OBSERVE. Vi bdda, ni bada, de bdda, both of us, both of you, both of them.

EXERCISE XXVI.
A. En grosshandlare behovde en gang en springpojke
pa sitt kontor och satte fordenskull en annons i tidningen.
Manga gossar infunno sig pa kontoret nasta dag. Somliga
av dessa hade medfort goda rekommendationsbrev, men
grosshandlaren skickade bort dem alia utan att se pa deras
rekommendationer och beholl en enda liten gosse, som icke
hade nagot som heist skriftligt intyg. En av hans vanner,
som var narvarande, fragade varfor han just valde en, som
ej hade nagon rekommendation, da de fiesta andra hade
medfort sadana. "Jo", svarade grosshandlaren, "han hade
ej sa fa rekommendationer, ehuru de ej voro skriftliga.
Han torkade av fotterna vid db'rren och tog upp en knapp-
nal fran golvet, foljaktligen maste han vara bade renlig
och noggrann. Dessutom tog han av sig niossan och sva-
rade raskt och riktigt, darfor maste han vara bade forstan-
flig och uppmarksam.
Han vantade stilla och tyst, medan
var och en av de andra trangde sig fram, och ar foljakt-

ligen ocksa bl}'gsam. En manniskas uppforande betyder

mycket mer an vilken rekommendation som heist."
B. Conversation. 1. Vad behovde grosshandlaren? 2.

Vad gjorde han for att fa en springpojke? 3. Medforde

hans annons nagot resultat? 4. Vad hade de fiesta med-
fort? 5. Brydde sig grosshandlaren om deras rekommen-
dationsbrev? (bry sig oni=o core for). 6. Vem valde
han for platsen? 7. Vad var det. som forvanade en
 VOCABULARY. 167

av bans vanner, vilken var narvarande? 8. Vilka fern

goda egenskaper (qualities) agde gossen? 9. Varigenom
(through what) visade gossen, att han var renlig? Artig?
Forstandig och uppmarksam? 10. Vad brydde sig gross-
handlaren mer om an (than) om rekommendationsbrev ?
1
C. Are tbere many advertisements in the paper to-
1.

day? No, only a few (283). 2. I should like to know

if there is anyone who wants an errand boy. 3. It seems
as if every other (279, 3) advertisement is about errand
boys. 4. The next morning there were many boys in (pa)
the it was full of boys who wanted the place. 5. The
office ;

recommendation of most were very good. 6. Some

letters of
of the boys had many recommendations each. 7. But the

merchant dismissed every one of them and kept a small

2
boy who did not have any recommendation whatsoever.
8.Which one of you got the place? Neither. 9. Every boy
who did not have any letter of recommendation was dis-
missed, and neither of us had any. 10. I believe that he
3
will soon need another (279, 2) boy in his office; the one
11. The
4 4
that (den som) he has is neither polite nor tidy.

conduct of both boys was good, but it seemed as if the

littleboy behaved better. 12. Do you have any reason
whatsoever 2 for not having 5 done this yet? 13. I did not
know that it should be ready so soon; when I asked you,

you said that I could do it at any time. 14. How fast shall
2
I drive ? You may drive as fast as you please .

ijfr del or finns det (244, b).

2
287, 1. 3
Use present or kommer att and
infinitive. 4
VarTcen. . . .eller. translate varfor du icke har, etc.

VOCABULARY.
en annons' (pronounced an- behdl'la (insep., see hdlla), to
nongs') -er, advertisement retain
artig, -t, polite lieho'va (insep.), lib, to need
av'torka (sep., torka av'), to bety'da( insep.), lib, to signify
wipe llygsam, -t, modest
168 USE OF TENSES.
bort'skicka, skicka bor'(sep.) narvarande, , present
to dismiss nnsta, next ,

bdde. och (conj.), both.

. . and ocksd, also
ehu'ru (conj.), although en plats, -er, place, position
fort, fast rask, -t, quick
foljaktligen, consequently renlig, -t, cleanly
forderi'skull, on that account en rekommendation', -er, re-
ett golv, ,
floor commendation
en grosshandlare, , whole- ett rekommendations'brev, ,

sale merchant a letter of recommendation

in'finna sig, to appear, to pre- skriftlig, -t, written
sent oneself en springpojke. -ar, errand boy
ett intyg, ,
testimonial synas (dep.), Ha, to seem
just, just torka av', I, wipe off
en knappndl, -ar, pin trdnga sig from', lib, to crowd
ett kontor, ,
office to the front, to press forward
medan, while tyst, , quiet, silent
med'fora (sep.), to bring along upp'taga, taga upp', to take up
noggrann, -grant, careful ett uppforande (no pi.), conduct

LESSON XXVII.
Use of the Tenses.
289. In general the tenses are used as in Eng-
lish, but the following points should be noticed.
PRESENT.
290. The Present for the Future. In both lan-
guages the present is used with the meaning of the
future but this use is much more extensive in Swe-
dish, and a Swedish present must often be rendered
by the future. In fact Swedish employs the present
instead of the future almost always when some ad-
verbial expression of time accompanies the verb and
prevents a misunderstanding jag gar till posten och :

ar tillbaka om tio minuter, I am going to the post

office and shall be back in ten minutes.
NOTE. For the progressive present see 228 and note.
 USE OF TENSES. 169

IMPERFECT.
291. The Imperfect for the Present. The im-
perfect of the verb v ara used in a present sense,
is

especially in exclamatory expressions, to denote

intensity of feeling, such as pleasure, enthusiasm,
disgust, etc. It is usually combined with the imper-
sonal det. Ex.: Det var fortjusande vackert! How
charmingly beautiful Det var forfdrligt, hvad det
!

bldser! How fearfully it storms! Det var roligt,

att du kommer, I am glad that you are coming. Det
var da lojligt! Isn't that ludicrous?
NOTE. For the progressive imperfect see 228 and note.

292. The imperfect is used in certain expres-

sions with a present or imperative meaning to give
a tinge of modesty or politeness: herrarna beha-
gade komma in, please come in, gentlemen; jag on-
skade veta om herr X
dr tillbaka, I should like to
know if Mr. X. is back. This might perhaps be
regarded as a subjunctive (167).
PERFECT.
293. The Perfect for the Future Perfect. As in
English the perfect is often employed with the
meaning of the future perfect when no misunder-
standing can arise: ndr han har varit i Sverige ett
dr, sd talar han svenska flytande, when he has been
in Sweden a year, he will speak Swedish fluently.

FUTURE.
294. For the present taking the place of the
future see 290.
.295. The future expressed by the auxiliary skola
and the infinitive often conveys the idea of a reso-
Swedish Grammar 12
170 USE OF TENSES.

lution, decision, or even command: jag skall betala,

I will pay, is equivalent to a promise ; du skall betala
is equivalent to an exhortation or command.

296.Pure futurity is often expressed by the

present of the verb fcowwa-f-the infinitive of the verb
preceded by att: jag kommer att betala, I am going
to pay. In this case the present could not be used
since there is no adverbial expression of time to
obviate the misunderstanding. We may say, jag
betalar i morgon. If we wish to translate, for
instance, you will laugh when you read the book,
we must say ni kommer att skratta, nar ni laser
boken and not ni skall skratta, nar ni laser boken,
since the latter has almost the force of a command.
The present of skratta may also be used but is not
quite as good in this case as kommer, etc.

297. Sta i begrepp is occasionally used with the

infinitive to express immediate futurity; it is equiv-
alent to the English to be about to, or on the point
of, but is used much less extensively: jag star i
begrepp att resa till Europa, I am on the point of
leaving for Europe.

FUTURE PERFECT.
298. The future perfect is used very little in

Swedish, its place being taken by the perfect (293).

299. Omission of the Auxiliary in the Perfect
and Pluperfect. In a dependent clause the auxiliary
hava is frequently omitted: nar du gdtt (har gatt),
skall jag borja att arbeta, when you have gone, I
shall begin to work.
 USE OF TENSES. 171

THE USES OF THE INFINITIVE.

300. The simple infinitive (without att) is used
much more frequently in Swedish than in English.
Thus, att is omitted :

(a) With the future auxiliary skall, the modals,

and lata, fa, Idr.

(b) When the infinitive has a subject in the ob-

very common in Swedish; as,
jective, a construction
jag bad honom komma, I asked him to come; jag
horde honom sjunga, I heard him sing; jag sag ho-
nom komma, I saw him coming.
(c) Very often when the infinitive is used pred-
icatively after a verb in the passive: han hordes
saga, he was heard to say; han sages ha dott, he is
said to have died de syna-s trivas, they seem to get
;

along well.
(d) After many verbs which in English require
to before the infinitive which they govern, like,

dmna, to intend; hoppas, to hope; bruka, to use;

plaga, to use, etc., especially when euphony demands.
301 . The infinitive with att is used :

(a) As subject or object of a sentence: att fela

dr mdnskligt, to err is human. In this case the
infinitive is often translated by a verbal noun or a
gerund in English.

(b) As a
modifier of nouns and adjectives kons- :

ten att the art of growing rich detta dr latt

bli rik, ;

att forstd, this is easy to understand.

Note expressions like : rum att hyra, rooms for rent ; ved att saga, wood to
be sawed, where the noun is really the object.

(c) As predicate after vara, bliva, finnas, std,

etc. Swedish uses here the active infinitive where
172 EXERCISE.

either the active or the passive is used in English:

Vad dr hdr'att gora? What is here to be done?
Han star ej att overtala, he is not to be persuaded.
302. Prepositions with att Infinitive. When it

refers to the subject of the leading verb the att

infinitive may be preceded by almost any prepo-
sition, in which case the English generally requires
a verbal noun; as, han lekte i stdllet for att gora
sitt arbete, he played instead of doing his work;

genom att hjalpa andra hjdlper man ofta sig sjalv,

by helping others, we often help ourselves; jag dr
glad over att kunna hjdlpa dig, I am glad that I
can help you.
NOTE. When the subject of the infinitive is not the same as that of the
leading verb, Swedish uses an att clause preceded by the preposition: genom att
han Idnade mig pengar, kunde jag kopa huset, by his lending me money, I was
able to buy the house ; han gick, utan att jag fick tala med honom, he went
without my getting a chance to speak to him.

EXERCISE XXVII.
A. Ett skepp, som seglade fran Smyrna till Marseille
med dyrbar last, forfoljdes av sjb'rovare och ansags vara
forlorat. Kaptenen kom da pa den tanken att lata besatt-
ningen ga ned under dack. Pa dacket lamnade han blott en
enda matros, som han noga foreskrev, vad han skulle gora.
Nar sjorovarnas skepp narmade sig och dess kapten be-
fallde, att man skulle stryka flagg, ropade matrosen med
jamrande rb'st: "Jag bar ej sa mycket styrka kvar; ni fa
bemaktiga er skeppet; vi komma fran Smyrna, och kap-
tenen samt halften av besattningen ha dott i pesten pa
b'verresan. Sex man aro annu kvar, men komma sakert
att do, om ni ej hjalper oss. Skynda er att stiga ombord.
ty ni allena
1
kan radda oss." "Far din vag, din 2 dum-
bom !''
ropade sjorovaren till svar, "tror du verkligen, att
 EXERCISE. 173

jag skulle vilja narma mig ditt fartyg!" Darpa avliigs-

nade ban sig sa fort
3
ban kunde.
Note the weak form of the adjective after a personal pronoun. 2 Note the
J

use of the personal pronoun of the second person in expressions denoting con- 1

tempt ; transl. you big fool. Other expressions of the same kind din skurk, :

3
din asna, etc. , Note omission of som, as.

B. Conversation. 1. Varifran kom skeppet? 2. Vart

seglade det? 3. Vad for slags last hade det? 4. Var det
ett segelfartyg eller ett angfartyg (steamer) ? 5. Av vem
forfoljdes det? 6. Kunde det undkomma (escape) sjo-
rovaref artyget ? Vart skickade kaptenen hela besatt- 7.

ningen med undantag av en enda matros ? 8. Vad befall-

1

de kaptenen pa det andra fartyget honom 'att gora? 9.

Vad hade blivit av kaptenen? 10. Hur manga av besatt-
niiigen voro kvar? 11. Vad gjorde sjorovarna, niir de horde
detta ?
1
With the exception of.

0. Supply the proper Swedish equivalent for the Eng-

lish future, namely, the present, future with sTcall, or ham-
mer att, in the first six sentences.

1. I morgon . . .
(resa, 1st plur.) till Stockholm. 2. Om
en vecka . . .
(vara, 1st plur.) tillbaka, och da ... (besb'ka,
1st plur.) dig. 3. Det dar gamla fartyget . . . sakert for-

olyckas. 4. I morgon . . .
(fara) till Chicago, och da ...
(kb'pa, 1st sing.) en ring at dig. 5. Du . . .
(gora) allt
ditt arbete, Erik, innan du far ga ut och spela 6. Nar boll.

ni laser min daliga svenska, sa (skratta, 2nd sing., . . .

polite) at mina manga fel. 7. Hela besattningen ... (do,

progressive present). 8. I gar nar min kusin kom for att

besoka mig, . . .
(packa, progressive imperfect, first person)
min koffert.

Change the following three sentences according to 299.

9. Om jag hade vetat, att ban var sjuk, sa hade jag besokt
174 VOCABULARY.

honom. 10. Den gamle herrn, som nyss bar stigit i vagnen,
ar min larare. 11. Vi sakna vara vanner, som nyss ha rest
till New York.
In the following supply the proper infinitive, the att
infinitive or the simple, of the verbs indicated. 12. Genom
.
(narra) sjorovarna raddade kaptenen sitt fartyg.
. . 13.
Han bad matroserna ... (ga) ned under dack. 14. Han
ansags . . .
(vara) rik. 15. Sjorovaren hordes . . .
(ropa)
till matrosen pa dacket.

D. 1. But say, this is (291) a beautiful ship! Do you

know to what port going to sail ? 2. Shall we go on
it is
1

board? I know the captain, and shall 1 introduce you to

him, you wish. 3. He is a fine man and I am sure (saker
if

you will like him. 4. He has just returned from

2
pa) that
America and the passage was very difficult. 5. It was only
3
by maneuvering the ship skillfully that (som) he saved it.
6. He does not believe that his trip will be stormy. 7. He
2

asked us to come on board, for (ty) he did not wish to

8. When the
3
leave the city without having spoken to us.
sailor had (299) told the pirate that half of the crew had
died of the plague, the pirate sailed away without taking 3

possession of the ship. 9. He was on the point (297) of

going out when I entered. 10. Did he do all this work?

Well, I call that working (301, a). 11. We must walk
fast in order to get (Tcomma) home before night (def.
form). 12. Mr. Lind was kind enough to lend me a book.
13. He is very much
interested in playing3 tennis. 14. The
water is warm enough for bathing 3 (till att bada i).
*Here the future implies a decision: skola or komma attf 2 Here pure futuri-
ty.

VOCABULARY.
alle'na (only predicative, no bemak'tiga sig, to take pos-
neut.), alone session of
befal'la, lib, to command en besatt'ning, -ar, crew
 VOCABULARY. 175

dyrbar, -t, precious, costly en matros', -er, sailor

ett ddck, , deck maniivre'ra, I, to maneuver
dilrpd, thereupon ned, down
ett far'tyg, , vessel nog, enough; certainly, to be
en flag g a (flagg), -or, flag sure
fort, quickly, rapidly noga (adj. and adv.), exact
fo'reskriva (insep. v.), to pre- ndrma sig, I, to approach

scribe omoord, on board

fvrfol'ja (insep.), lib, to pur- en pest, -er, pest, plague
sue presente'ra, I, to introduce
en hamn, -ar, port, harbor ropa, I, to cry, call
en hedersman, -man, man of en rost, -er, voice
honor en sjorovare, pirate ,

en hiilft, -er, half skicklig, -t, skillful

intresse'rad, -at, interested stryka, strok, stroko, stru-
jiimrande, , plaintive kit, -en, -et, to lower
en kapten', -er, captain en styrka, strength, power
komma in', to enter en tanke, -ar, thought
en last, -er, cargo; burden iinnu, yet

IDIOMS: 1. Var sd god och Idna mig, be so kind as to (please)

lend me; han var sd god och kom, he was kind
enough to come.
2. att do i en sjukdom, to die of a disease.
3. att komma pd en ide, en tanke, to hit upon an idea,
a thought.
4. att presentera en person for ndgon, to introduce
a person to somebody.
5. att omtala ndgot for ndgon, to tell somebody some-
thing.
 LESSON XXVIII.
Comparison of Adjectives
303. Most adjectives form their comparative by
adding -are to the stem of the positive, and the
superlative by the addition of -ast.
304. Examples :

rik rikare rikast rich

ddel ddlare ddlast noble
trogen trognare trognast faithful
vacker vackrare vackrast beautiful
ringa ringare ringast humble, small
NOTE. Positive stems in unaccented drop the e of these syllables
-el, -en, -er,
in the comparative and superlative. Positive stems in -a drop the a.

305. The following adjectives form their com-

parative and superlative by the addition of -re and
-st and modify the stem vowel if it is strong:

grov grovre
hog hogre
lag lagre
Idng Idngre
stor storre
trang trdngre
tung tyngre
ung yngre
NOTE. Grov, trdng and lag are also compared regularly ; lag then has a
moral signification.

306. The following are compared irregularly:

 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 177

307. Some
adjectives derived from adverbs,
especially such as designate place, have no posi-
tive. These have a comparative in -re, generally
inverted in the superlative -erst.

bakre bakerst farther back, rear

bortre bofrterst farther
frdmre frdmst farther in front
ftfrre(a) forst former
inre innerst inner
nedre nederst nether, lower
undre under st under
yttre ytterst outer
o'vre overst upper

308. Adjectives which do not easily take the

endings of comparison may be compared by using
mera and mest together with the positive (such
are adjectives in -e, -ad, -s, isk and all participles) .

Ex. ode, desolate, mera ode, mest ode; dlskad, mera

:

dlskad, mest dlskad.

NOTE. This is also the case when two qualities of the same object are com-
pared with one another: han or mera trott an somnig, he is more tired than
sleep}'.

DECLENSION OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES.

309. The comparative is invariable except that
it takes an -s in the genitive when used as a noun :

den dldre brodern, the older brother; det dldre bar-

net, the older child; den dldres rdttigheter, the
rights of the older.

310.The superlative is not declined in the pred-

icate when not preceded by the definite prepositive
article; when preceded by this article it is declined
like an adjective in the weak declension. Ex. han :
178 EXERCISE.

var den flitigaste i klassen, he was the most diligent

one in the class han var didst, he was the oldest.
;

NOTE.Superlatives in -ast take only the ending -e: del vackraste barnet, but
det yngsta barnet, den yngste gossen.

311. Than is rendered by an: han ar aldre an

jag, he is older than I.

EXERCISE XXVIII.
A. Insert comparative and superlative forms respective-

ly in the blanks.
1. Jag ar trogen, du ar . . .
, han ar . . . 2. Vi aro adla,
ni aro . .
., de aro ... 3. Detta huset ar stort, det dar
ar . och det grona dar borta ar
. .
, 4. Detta ar en . . .

fortjusande utsikt, men utsikten fran berget pa andra sidan

floden ar ., och utsikten fran den hoga bergstoppen
. .

(peak) dar borta ar 5. Karl ar liten, Erik ar .

., . . . .

Ernst ar 6. I dag ar det manga i kyrkan, men forra

. . .

sondagen var det ... Han ar en lag manniska, jag 7.

bar sallan sett en ... Vilken av de tva bergstopparna 8.

ar den (lowest) ? 9. Hur gammal ar Erik? Det vet

. . .

jag ej sakert, men han ar (older) an Karl, och Alfred . . .

ar den . . .
(oldest) av gossarna. 10. Vem ar . . .
(most
musical}, Anna eller Klara? 11. Anna ar . . .
(compara-
tive) an Klara. 12. H'ar du sett en ... (more desolate,
ode) trakt an denna?
E. 1. Ar icke katedralen i Koln en av de aldsta, storsta
och hogsta kyrkor i varlden? 2. Jo, det finns endast fa,
som aro aldre, storre och hogre. 3. Nar tycker ni, att det
ar intressantast (310) att resa? Pa sommaren, ty da aro
dagarna langre, man kan se mer, och det ar mycket ange-
namare. 4. Hur lang tid tar det att komma fran New

York till Liverpool? De snabbaste angarna gora over-

resan pa mindre an sex dagar. 5. Det ar ett misstag, att
 EXERCISE. 179

de europeiska tagen skulle vara langsammare an de ameri-

kanska. 6. I flere lander i Europa aro snalltagen bland de
snabbaste, som det over huvud taget finns. 7. Har man ej
flere klasser darborta an har? Jo, det ar vanligen tre
klasser; i
Tyskland har man till och med fyra. 8. I Sve-

rige resa endast de allra rikaste (316) i forsta klass, och

de fiesta fara i
tredje. 9. Man reser bekvamare (318) i
andra klass dar an i var forsta. 10. Vena bor i huset dar-
borta? Tva av vara narmaste slaktingar, en farbror och
en kusin. 11. Den forre bor i framre del en av den ovre va-

ningen, den senare i den bakersta delen av den undre va-

ningen; resten av huset star tomt. 12. Jag skulle garna
vilja hyra huset, om dess yttre vore vackrare, dess inre dar-
Skulle du vilja gb'ra en langre
1
emot behagar mig. 13.
tur i min bil i
eftermiddag? Ja, med stb'rsta nb'je .
2

2
1
Translate: extended; langre means here rather long. Note the indefinite
form of the noun.

C. 1. There are large and high churches in most cities,

but there are business buildings in New York which are

larger and higher than the largest and highest churches in
the world. oldest brother is the most diligent boy
2. My
in the class. In point of 1 studies he is at the head
3.

(framst, 310), but in sports he is poorer than most of

them. 4. We had the most beautiful weather on our
trip to-day; it was less warm than on our former trip.
5. Have you no nearer and better friend in this city than
he? No, he is my nearest and best friend. 6. I do not

know whether I shall travel first or second class. Would

you advise me? 7. If I were you (i ert stdlle) I should
2

rather travel second; that class is more comfortable than

our first and only the wealthiest travel first class here.
8. The fastest steamers are not always to be preferred
3
;

a slower and larger steamer rocks less. 9. Don't you think

180 VOCABULARY.

that the interior of this house is much more beautiful than

the exterior? Yes, but it is more beautiful than modern
(308). The house next to ours is for rent (301, b, note).
Why don't you rather rent that ? It has many more modern
improvements (nutida bekvamligheter).
*Use impersonal form of gdlla. Translate so, (171, B, 2) skulle jag hellre,
etc. *att foredraga (301, c).

VOCABULARY.
en affiirsbyggnad, -er, business en klass, -er, class
building Idngsam, -t, slow '(not lone-
angendm, -t, agreeable some; to be lonesome
(en) bekvamlighet, -er, comfort att ha trdkigt)
bekviim', comfortable ett miss'tag, mistake
,

bredvid', next to, at the side of modern' -t, modern

ddrborta, over there ett noje, -n, amusement, pleas-
endast, only ure
europeisk, -t, European en rest, -er, remainder
en farbror, -broder, uncle en slakting, -ar, relative
fattig, -t, poor snabb, -t, quick, rapid
fo'redraga (insep., see draga), ett studium, -er, study
prefer till och med, even

gunga, I, to rock, to swing torn, -t, empty, vacant

gdlla, lib, to have a value; to en tur, -er, trip

be a question of vanligen, usually
Jiellre, rather en dngare, steamboat ,

i'drott
1
,-er, sport over huvud taget, on the whole
en katedral', -er, cathedral en overresa, -or, trip across
*ldrott is generally used collectively in the singular.
 LESSON XXIX.
Comparison of Adjectives (Continued).
312. A comparison of equality
is expressed by

lika(sa) .som, (just)

. .
.as; or as.
by sa. .sow, . .

so (as) ... as, the latter generally after negatives ;

lika or sa is occasionally omitted: han dr lika gam-

mal som jag, he is just as old as I; hon dr ej sa
lycklig, som hon brukade vara, she is not as happy
as she used to be; han dr tapper som ett lejon, he
is as brave as a lion.
NOTE. A comparison of equality with adverbs is expressed in the same way ;

where there is no equality the correlative as as must be rendered by d . . . .

som only han skriver lika bra som du, he writes as well as you ; kom id fort
:

som mojligt, come as soon as possible.

313. The comparison below the positive is formed

by using the adverbs mindre, minst (less, least) :

han dr den minst framstdende av de tre brb'derna,

he is the least prominent of the three brothers.
314. The adverb the with a comparative is ex-
pressed by dess, desto (sometimes ju) ; the correla-
tives the. .the by ju (normal order)
.
.dess, desto . .

or ju (inverted order) as, jasa, han kommer, desto

;

bdttre,so, he is coming, so much the better ju Idngre ;

han stannade hdr, dess (ju) fattigare blev han, the

longer he remained here, the poorer he became.

315. The comparative and the superlative are

sometimes used absolutely; the comparative then
denotes a rather high degree and the superlative a
very high degree; as, en sto'rre penningsumma, a
rather large sum of money jag gor det med storsta ;

noje, I shall do that with the greatest pleasure min ;

baste van, my dear friend (in speaking or writing

182 ADVERBS.

to some one) ; kdraste du (kdra du is perhaps more

common) , in speaking to very intimate friends.

316. Distributive Superlative. The superlative

is often strengthened by the adverb allra (old gen.
plural of all) den allra storsta, den aUra vackraste,
:

the greatest, prettiest of all (the very greatest, pret-

tiest) .

Adverbs.

317. The indefinite forms of the neuter singular

of most descriptive adjectives can be used as ad-
verbs. Ex.: adj., god, good; adv., gott; adj., vdnlig,
friendly; adv., vdnligt; adj., hastig, rapid; adv.,
hastigt.
NOTE. Some adverbs are formed from adjectives in -Kg by means of the
ending -en; trolig-en, probably; mojlig-en, possibly.

318. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. Adverbs form

their degrees of comparison like the adjectives. Very
few except those ending in -t can be compared.
Examples :

hovligt
ddelt
troget
tungt
319. The
bra, vdl
gdrna
ilia
ndra
Idnge
fore
fort
ofta
sakta
fram
 EXERCISE. 183

320. The comparative and the superlative of

adverbs are invariable. Apparent exceptions are
a few idiomatic absolute superlatives; as, de voro
i det narmaste ett hundra, they were very nearly
one hundred; han kdmpade i det Idngsta, he fought
as long as possible; han hdlsade mig pa det hov-
ligaste, he greeted me most politely; han kom med
det snaraste, he came as soon as possible.

321. So also the Swedish equivalent for the Eng-

lish,as ... can, could hon gick det tystaste hon
:

kunde, she walked as quietly as she could; han Idste

det tydligaste han kunde, he read as plainly as he
could (also sa tydligt han kunde; note omission of
som, as).
322. As. . .as possible is expressed by sa. . .som
mojligt ; sa snart som mojligt, as soon as possible.
323. The English more and more=aUt+the re-
peated comparative as in English (a single com-
parative may be used) stormen rasade allt hdfti-
:

gare och hdftigare, the storm raged more and more

violently.

EXERCISE XXIX.

A. 1. Gar du ofta pa 1 teatern, Karl? Hogst (at the

most) fern ganger om aret (338, note). Jag gar

eller sex

mycket pa forelasningar och konserter. 2. Konser-

hellre
ten i gar var troligen den mest lyckade (308) sedan sa-
2
songens bb'rjan, salongen var i det narmaste fullsatt. 3.
De olika numren pa programmet mottogos med det allra
varmaste bifall. 4. Jag tyckte, att frb'ken Forsell sjb'ng
lika bra som fm Jungstedt, fast den senare ar mera om-
talad (308). 5. Vad skall ni gora under de stundande
184 EXERCISE.

helgdagarna ? Jag skall avlagga ett kortare (315) besok

hos min bror. 6.Halsa honom pa det hjartligaste 2 och sag
honom, att jag skall skriva till honom med det allra sna-
2
raste Kara du, maste du verkligen resa? Jag ar sa
. 7.

ledsen; men kom igen sa fort du kan (321). 8. Ju oftare

du kommer, och ju langre du gb'r ditt besok, desto battre,
ty du ar alltid en mycket valkommen gast hos oss. 9. Hur
gar det for Erik i skolan? Icke sa bra som det gjorde i
bb'rjan; han var visserligen icke den allra basta i sin klass,
men han var flitigare an nu och gjorde sitt basta. 10. Nu
synes han mera lat an dum (308, note), han arbetar utan
det ringaste intresse och ar alls icke uppmarksam i klassen.
11. Karl daremot studerar det flitigaste han kan och ar
2
framst i sin klass. 12. Jag har hoppats i det
langsta , att
Erik skulle bli uppflyttad i ar, men det troligaste ar, att
han far sitta kvar.
1
Pa is used in the sense of to in a number of phrases: att go, fa tealern, pa
2
target, to go to the theater, to market. 320.

B. Conversation. 1. Vart gar ni heist, pa teatern eller

pa en forelasning? 2. Var auditoriet vid konserten i

gar
talrikt? 3. Fann ni konserten lyckad? 4. Appladerade
ahorarna de olika numren 1 ? 5. Vem sjong bast, froken
Forsell eller fru Jungstedt? 6. Na'r amnar ni (att) avlagga

(ett) besok hos er bror? 7. till honom an? Har ni skrifvit

8. Gor en jamforelse (comparison) mellan Eriks och Karls
arbete i skolan.
1
Indef. form nummer ; one m is dropped in the def. form since the long m-
sound is no longer intervocalic.

G. 1. Do you attend the theater oftener now than you

used to (do), Carl? 2. No, extremely seldom, and when I
1

2
do attend, I attend mostly the opera. 3. I have never be-
fore been as occupied as I am now; the more (314) I do,
the more there is to do, it seems. 4. Aren't you working a
 VOCABULARY. 185
2
little(274, ) harder than you used to? 5. Perhaps. I wish
to have a certain work ready as soon as possible in order
to get my vacation. 6. Where do you intend to spend it?

At a watering place? 7. No, I have been at watering

places several (flera) times before. This summer I prefer
to take a trip to northern Sweden. 8. mine A friend of
has given me
most (hogst) interesting account of the
a
beautiful sceneries of Lapland. 9. Are you going alone?

No, we shall be four, perhaps more (flera}. 10. Would

(skutte)you permit me to go with you if I could be ready

you? 11. With the greatest (315) pleasure, the
as soon as

(314) more we are, the merrier it will be.

D. 1. Is Eric as diligent as he was in the beginning?

2. No, I do not know what is the matter with him, it

seems as he were growing lazier and lazier (323).

if 3. Is

he not here yet ? Perhaps he will come a little later. 4. No,

he wrote me most politely that he would rather come an-

other time. 5. He sent the most cordial (316) greetings
to all his friends. 6. My dear (315) friend, can't you
come to see me a little ofterier than you do? Come as often

as you please (287, 1).

hogst, in the highest degree, very, and ytterst, extremely, ex-
l
Ytterst
ceedingly, are often used to form an absolute superlative. *For del mesta (320).

VOCABULARY.
ett auditorium, -cr, audience for det mesta, for the most
avlagga, insep., to make (a part
visit) ; sep. lay, take off en forelasning, -ar, lecture
en badort, watering place-er, en gdst, -er, guest
applause
ett bifall, approval, hjartlig, -t, cordial
en torjan, beginning hard, h&rt, hard
dum, -t, stupid intressant', interesting
fast, although eft intres'se, -n, interest

friimst, foremost karihan'da, perhaps

full'satt, ,
crowded en Mass, -er, class

Sivedish Grammar 13
186 NUMERALS.
kvar (adv. and adj. in the sjunga, sjong, sjongo, sjungit,
predicate) left, over sjungen, -et, to sing
lat (no neut.), lazy en skildring, -ar, account
ledsen, sorry snar, -t, rapid, quick; snart,
lyckad, -at, successful soon
norra (indeclinable), northern stundande (indecl.), coming
ett nummer, number ,synas (dep. v.), I la, to seem,
om'talad, -at, mentioned; appear
celebrated en sdsong', -er*, season
en opera, -or, opera; opera tilldta (insep.), to permit
house troligen, probably
ett program', program , uppflyttad, -at, moved up,
ringa (indeclinable) insig- promoted
nificant upptagen, -et, occupied
sceneri', -er, scenery verkligen, really
en semes' ter 1 , -rar, semester; visserligen, to be sure, cer-
vacation tainly
^Semester is a vacation from work, ferier a vacation from school. *Sasong is

a social season, arstid, a natural season.

IDIOMS: 1. att sitta kvar, not to be promoted.

2. att tli uppflyttad, to be promoted.
3. Hvad fattas honomf What is the matter with him?

LESSON XXX.
The Numerals.
CARDINAL ORDINAL
1. en [neut. ett; (den) forste(a), 1st
def. ene(a)'\
2. tvd andre(a), 2nd
3. tre tredje, 3rd, etc.
4. fyra fjarde
5. fern femte
6. sex sjatte
7. sju sjunde
8. dtta dttonde
9. nio nionde
10. tio tionde
11. elva elvte
 NUMERALS. 187

12. tolv tolvte

13. tretton trettonde
14. fjorton fjortonde
15. femton femtonde
16. sexton sextonde
17. sjutton sjuttonde
18. aderton adertonde
19. nitton nittonde
20. tjugu (tjugo, tjugonde
tjuge)
21. tjuguett tjuguforsta
22. tjugutva tjuguandra
30. trettio (tretti) trettionde
31. tretti(o)ett tretti(o)forsta
40. fyrtio (fyrti) fyrtionde
50. femtio (femti) femtionde
60. sextio (sexti) sextionde
70. sjuttio (sjutti) sjuttionde
80. attio (dtti) attionde
90. nittio (nitti) nittionde
100. (ett) hundra hundrade
101. hundra ett hundra forsta
200. tva hundra tva hundrade
250. tva hundra tva hundra femtionde
femtio
1,000. (ett) tusen tusende
1,150. ett tusen ett ett tusen ett hundra
hundra femtio femtionde
1,000,000. en million

REMARKS ON THE CARDINALS.

325. The cardinals are indeclinable when used
as adjectives with the exception of en, which has
the neuter ett: det ar tjuguett barn i rummet; but
tjuguen gossar.
326. When used as nouns they take an s in the
genitive but are otherwise indeclinable: de fyras
 188 NUMERALS.

adertons samman-
dsikt, the opinion of the four; de
komst, the meeting of the eighteen (the Swedish
Academy) .

NOTE. The numbers, million, milliard, billion, etc., are declined as nouns of the
Third Declension: tre millioner manniskor. Hundra and tusen may also be used
substantively and then take the form hundrade and tusende with plural in -n:
det tjvgonde arhundradet, the twentieth century ; del forsta tusendet, the first

thousand.

327. The form

tu is used for tva in certain set
phrases; such as, pa tu man hand, in confidence
between two de unga tu, the engaged or newly mar-
;

ried couple ett, tu, tre (in counting time, also in the
;

sense of suddenly) ; cf. adv. itu: riva itu, tear in two.

328. Tvenne and trenne are sometimes used for

two and three but never in connection with other
numerals. Bada and bagge are occasionally used
with tva for the* sake of emphasis: bada tva, both;
in such expressions as vi bada, de bagge, etc., we
two, they two, bada and bagge have the force of
numerals.
329. Hundra and tusen are always preceded by
ett may be left out) ett hundra
(in counting ett :

femtioatta; ett tusen ett hundra sextiofem; och, and,

is not used between the hundreds and the tens.

330. The forms tretti, fyrti, femti, etc. are used

mostly in compounds: femtiatta, sextitre.
NOTE. Fyrtio is pronounced as if it was written fortio. Aderton is

generally pronounced arton.

REMARKS ON THE ORDINALS.

331. The ordinals are used as indeclinable ad-
jectives, except forste(a) and andre(a) which follow
the weak declension. They are usually preceded by
the prepositive definite article, but may sometimes
 NUMERALS. 130

be used without it den forsta, den andra, den tred-

:

je; but forsta dagen (also den forsta dagen) i veckan

ar sondagen, the first day of the week is Sunday;
det ar andra gdngen han ar har, it is the second
time he is here.
332. In compound ordinals only the last number
takes the ordinal ending, den ett tusen tvd hundra
sextiofjarde.
333. The ordinals take the genitive -s: Karl den
tolvtes dod, the death of Charles XII.
334. The cardirrals are occasionally used instead
of the ordinals ;
these follow the noun :
pa sidan tio,
on page ten.
335. The ordinals are often abbreviated, the last
letter or letters being used with the numbers to in-
dicate the ordinal. Ex.: den 5:e, den 8:e; the num-
ber may be used alone after the article: den 5
februari.
EXPRESSIONS OF TIME (O'CLOCK) .

336. The following phrases illustrate the man-

ner of telling the time of day :

Hur mycket ar klockan? what time is it?

Klockan ar tio, it is ten o'clock.
Klockan ar halv tio, it is half past nine.
Klockan ar en kvart over fyra, it is a quarter past
four.
Klockan ar en kvart fore (till, i) fyra, it is a quar-
ter of four.
Klockan ar tre kvart pa fyra, it is a quarter of
four.
Klockan ar tjugu minuter fore tre, it is twenty
minutes of three.
190 EXERCISE.

Klockan dr tjugu -minuter over ire, it is twenty

minutes past three.
Klockan har jiLst slagit fyra, it has just struck
four.
Pa slaget ire, at three o'clock sharp.
Precis tre, at three o'clock sharp.
Vid niotiden, about nine o'clock.
Fram at tiotiden, towards ten o'clock.
Han kom klockan tio, he came at ten o'clock.

EXPRESSIONS OF MEASURE AND PRICE.

337. After nouns of measure t*he thing measured
is used without preposition: hon kopte fyra meter
svart tyg, she bought four meters of black cloth;
giv mig ett glas friskt vatten, give me a glass of
fresh water.
338. After an expression of price a noun of
measure requires the def. postpositive article in-
stead of the indef. article in English: detta tyget
kostar tre kronor metern, this cloth costs three
crowns a meter; tio kronor stycket, ten crowns a-
piece.
NOTE.
This distributive use of the def. article is found after other expres-
sions of quantity, but the noun is then preceded by a preposition (generally
om, pa, or <) tvd ganger om aret, two times a year
: ; han fortjanar trettio
kronor f veckan, he earns thirty crowns a week.

EXERCISE XXX.
A. 1. En gang ett ar ett, tva ganger
Practice orally.
En gang tva ar tva, tva ganger tva ar fyra,
ett ar tva, etc.

3X2=6, 4X2=8, etc. 2. Eead in Swedish: 2X12=24,

3X12=36, 4X8=32, 6X7=42, 7X9=63, 7X10=70.
3. Addera 1,563, 2,348, 11,213. 4. Subtrahera 15,113 fran
19,213. 5. Multiplicera 580 med 213. 6. live the differ-
 EXERCISE. 191
1
ent expressions for: It is a quarter past 12 ; 12.30; 1.45;

3.15; 4; 5.25. 7. Name the numbers 40, 41, 50, 53, G4,
67, 78, 89, 94, 100, 104, 205, 209, 371, 498, 1,000, 1,001,
75,012, 2,098,427.
'At a quarter past twelve, klockan en kvart efter tolv; klockan is often
abbreviated to kl. : kl. 12.15.

B. denna stad bo 2,656,342 manniskor, men den ar

I

anda ej pa langt nar sa stor som London, ty dar bo nara

7,000,000 manniskor eller nara tre ganger sa manga.
2. Hur manga invanare bar staten Minnesota? Omkring
2,000,000, tror jag. 3. Minnesotas befolkning ar ej vidare 1
talrik, nar man tar i betraktande, att det ar en av de storsta
staterna i Unionen. 4. Med vilket tag resa vi till Stock-
holm i Det gar ett tag ... (a quarter past
morgon?
seven), om vi stiga upp ... (at six or half past five), sa
kunde vi a'ta frukost pa hotellet. 5. Sag till uppassaren
att vi onska rakningen. Har ar den, jag fick den for nagra
minuter sedan. 6. Den ar val tamligen sa hog, formodar
jag. Ah nej, icke sa varst, 22 kronor och 37 ore, 10 kronor
for rumrnet, 8 kronor och 50 ore for supen och frukosten
och resten for diverse smasaker. 7. Da aro naturligtvis
icke drickspengarna till betjaningen inbegripna? Nej,
dessa far man betala sarskilt. 8. Hur mycket belb'pa de
sig till? 2 kr. eller 2.50 2 racker. 9. Skynda dig, ar du
snail,annars forsumma vi taget. 10. Det bradskar ej, vi
ha annu en kvarts timme pa oss (to spare), innan det gar;
kloekan har just slagitsju. 11. Jag har kopt en hel del (en
massa) saker pa torget i dag: 1 kilo mejerismbr, 4 tjog
agg, en skinka pa fyra kilo och diverse gronsaker. 12. Vad
kostar smoret och aggen? Smoret kostar 2.50 kilot3 och
aggen 1.50 tjoget.
Widare means wider, further; it has an idiomatic use which is hard to render;
sometimes it may be translated by very. *Tva och (pronounced d) femti.
3 Also
per kilo, ver is abbreviated to pr-
192 VOCABULARY.

C. 1. In the city of London live almost 7,000.000

people, or more than three times as many as (312) in our
state. 2. Was your bill at the hotel very high ? No, it was
not as high as I expected; it amounted (B, 8) to about
1
thirty-six crowns, the tips not included 3. Did you have .

breakf ast at the hotel before you started ? No, we only had
time to drink a cup of coffee and eat a sandwich. 4. Did
you oversleep ? Yes, we slept to a quarter past six and the
train was 2 to leave at ten minutes past seven. 5. How many
minutes do we have to spare (B, 10) before the train
leaves? 6. Let me see, only fourteen minutes; it is nine
minutes of five by (enligt) mj watch. Hurry, please, or we
shall miss the train. 7. (In a store.) What can I do for
you? I should like to look at. some view cards of 2 Stock-
holm. 8. We have cards at (till) various prices. This
kind ten ore apiece (338) or a crown a dozen, that, five
is

ore apiece, or fifty ore a dozen. 9. I owe you three crowns

and seventy-five ore, I believe; here is a fifty-crown bill,
can you change it? 10. Yes, here are forty-six crowns and
twenty-five ore in change (tillbaka) . 11. How much is a
crown? A crown is one hundred ore; in American money
a crown is about twenty-eight cents. 12. I wish to change
one hundred and forty crowns into (i) American money.
3
'Use the plur. of the p. part, of inbegripa. *Skulle. Use over or translate
the whole expression stockholmstyer.

VOCABULARY.
en befolkning, -ar, population ett dussin, ,
dozen
behaga, to please forso'va sig (insep., see
beldpa sig till, Ila, to amount sova), to oversleep
to forsum'ma (insep.), to neg-
en betjaning (generally no lect; to miss (train)
pi.), service, servants gronsaJcer (pi.), vegetables
(ett)betraktande, consideration del, -ar, part
brddska, I, to hurry en invanare, inhabitant ,

diver" se (pi.), diverse, various mejeri'smor, creamery butter

 NUMERAL FORMATIONS. 193

niira, near, almost en supe, supcer, supper

olik, -t, unlike, different talrik, -t, numerous
ett pris, , price tillbaka, back
en sedel, -lar, bill; femti- ett tjog, ,
score
kronesedel, fifty-crown ett torg, , market place
bill tamligen, fairly, pretty
en skinka, -or, ham en union, er, union
en smdsak, -er, trifle uppassare, , waiter
en smorgds, -ar, sandwich vtinta, I, to wait, expect
en stat, -er, state vdxla, I, to change
stiga upp' (see stiga), to get ett vykort, , souvenir postal
up, rise ett dgg, , egg
ett stycke, -n, piece andd, yet
IDIOMS: 1. alt taga en sak i betraktande, to take a thing
into consideration.
2. icke pd Idngt ndr, not by far.
3. icke vidare mycket, not very much.
4. utan vidare, without further ado.
5. Vad behagasf What do you wish? What can I
do for you?
6. Jag ar skyldig honom tio .kronor, I owe him ten
ten crowns.

LESSON XXXI.
The Numerals (Continued).
NUMERAL FORMATIONS.
339. From the cardinals are formed :

(a) The
variatives by the use of slags (the geni-
tive of slag, meaning kind) tvd slags, two kinds of;:

tre slags, three kinds of; manga slags blommor,

many kinds of flowers.
(b) The
multiplicatives by the addition of dubbel
(neut. dubbelt, pi. dubbla) for the adjective and
dubbelt for the adverb more rarely by the addition
;

of -faldig (-t, -a) for the adjective and -fait for the
194 NUMERAL FORMATIONS.
adverb: dubbel, double; tredubbel, triple; fyrdub-
belt (neut. and adv.), quadruple; kragar av fyr-
dubbelt linne, collars of four-ply linen; dubbelt sa
manga, twice as many; mangfaldig, manifold; vetet
avkastar trettiofalt, the wheat yields thirty-fold.
(c) The iteratives by the use of gang, time plur. ;

ganger: en gang, once or one time; tvd ganger, twice

or two times tre ganger, tva dr lika med sex, three
;

times two equals six.

(d) The distributives by the repetition of the
numerals en och en, one by one, one at a time
: ; tva
och tva, by twos, two at the time; de gingo tvd och
tva, they went by twos, in pairs.
(e) The collectives by suffixing the word tal to the
numeral :

1. To denote a decade or a century thus, 80-talet, ;

the eighties; han gar pa fyrtiotalet, he is in the

forties; 1500-talet, the sixteenth century (1500
1599).
2. To denote an approximate number: ett tiotal,
about ten; ett tjugutal, about twenty.
NOTE. Observe expressions like hundratals, hundreds, tusentats, thousands.
dussintals,many dozen tusentals manniskor voro narvarande, thousands of
;

people were present.

340. From the ordinals are formed :

(ct) Fractional nouns by compounding the ordinal

with the noun del, part (plur. delar) : en tredjedel,
a third; tva tion(de) delar, two tenths; en halv, one
half en tjugutvaendel, a twenty-second part so also
; ;

en tretti(o)tvaendel, etc.
NOTE. Half, halv and hiilft. Halv is used as the denominator of fractions
and as adjective, otherwise hiilft is used ett halvt dussin, half a dozen
: ena ;

hdlften av huset, one half of the house.

(b) Fractional adjectives by prefixing halv to the

 EXPRESSIONS OF DATE. 190

next higher unit: halvannan, one and a half; halv-

tredje, two and a half, etc.
NOTE. Only the first is in common use.

(c) Ordinal adverbs by using the preposition for

with the ordinal for det forsta, first for det andra,
: ;

secondly, etc.
(d) Distributives by prefixing var to the ordinal :

varannan vartannat), every other;

(neut. var
tredje (neut. vart tredje), every third: varannan
dag ha vi rakning, we have mathematics every other
day.
341. EXPRESSIONS OF DATE.
(a) In giving the day of the month the ordinal
is used without any preposition as, det ar den sjatte ;

augusti i dag, to-day is the sixth of August. In

dating a letter the date is placed before the name
of the month, not after, as in English: Boston den
5:e (or 5) oktober.
Observe the following date idioms:
Vad ha vi for ett datum i dag? What date is

it to-day?
Det ar den femtonde juni i dag. To-day is the
fifteenth of June.
I morgon ar det den sextonde. To-morrow will
be the sixteenth.
Vad for en dag ar det i dag? What day (of the
week) is it to-day?
Det ar onsdag i dag. To-day is Wednesday.
(b)The date of the year given by the cardinal
is

number often preceded by ar, in the year of, espec-

ially in the case of historical dates; as, Napoleon
dog ar 1821, Napoleon died in the year of 1821.
196 EXPRESSIONS OF TIME.

342. With the names of the days of the week

the prepositions pa (on), om (about), and i (in)
are used pa requires the def form, om the indefinite
; .

and i the genitive of the indefinite: pa mdndagen

voro vi borta, on Monday we were away i mandags ;

voro vi borta, last Monday we were away; pa son-

dagskvdllen voro vi i kyrkan, on Sunday evening we
were sondags kvdll for han till Neiv
in church; i

York, Sunday evening he left for New York;

last
om lordag, next Saturday; om so'ndag kvdll, next
Sunday evening.
NOTE The day following t is the last day of that name, while the day
1.

after pa any day of that name in the past or future the day after' om is
is ;

the next day of that name (for other uses of f and om see 338, note, and 343).
2. Pa followed by the def. sing, and om followed by the def. plur. may
denote indefinite or recurrent time: pa sondagen horde man ga i kyrkan, on
Sunday one ought to go to church rod gor ni om sondagarnat What do you
;

do on Sundays?

343. Note such expressions -of time as:

pa morgonen, in the morning;
pa fo'rmiddagen, in the forenoon;
pa eftermiddagen, in the afternoon;
pa middagen, at noon;
vid middagen, at noon;
pa kvdllen, in the evening ;

pa natten, in the night;

vid midnatt, at midnight ;

i kvdll, to-night;
i gar kvdll, last night;
i morgon kvdll, to-morrow night ;

i morse, this morning ;

i gar morse, yesterday morning ;

i morgon, to-morrow ;

i b'vermorgon, the day after to-morrow;

 EXERCISE. 197

i morgon middag, to-morrowat noon ;

tidigt morgon, early

i to-morrow ;

i morgon bittida, early to-morrow morning;

i borjan\ in the beginning of April ;

i slutet \pa april, the latter part of April ;

i mitten) in the middle of April ;

i sommar, this summer ;

i fjol sommar, in the summer of last year ;

i somras, the past summer (of the same year) ;

i dag for ett arsedanl to _ d

i dag ett ar sedan }

i morgon om ett ar, a year from to morrow ;

om mandag, next Monday ;

om sommarn, in the summer;

till sommarn, next summer.

344. (a) In addressing letters the street name is

written as one word with -gatan (def. form of gata,
street) the house number follows the street name:
;

Herr Carl Lind,

Storgatan 8, 4 tr.,
Stockholm.
NOTE. tr. (trappa or trappor, stair or stairs) signifies story.

(b) In giving an address, i nummer -\-ihe number

generally precedes the street name han bor i num- :

mer 11 Linnegatan (also i ll:an [elvari] Linne-

gatan), he lives at number 11 Linne Street.

EXERCISE XXXI.
A. Supply in Swedish whatever is indicated.
1. Hur stor del av ett ar ar en manad? En manad ar
en tolvtedel av ett ar. 2. Hur manga . . .
(twelfths) inne-
haller en hel. En hel innehaller . . .
(|f) eller ... (|t)
eller ... ({), alltsa gar det .. ('{fete.) pa en hel.
198 EXERCISE.

3. Hum adderar man ... () och ... () ? Man for-

vandlar bada braken till . . .
(twelfths) och adderar de
bada taljarne. 4. Hur mycket blir det? Det blir . . .
(ff ).
5. gor man sedan
Vad ? Man dividerar taljaren med nam-
naren och erhaller (liV)- 6. Vad for datum ha vi i
1
. . .

dag? Det ar
(the sixth) november i dag.
. .7. I dag
.

ha vi salunda arsdagen av Gustav Adolfs db'd vid Liitzen,

han stupade . . .
(the sixth) november . . .
(in the year of)
1632. 8. Vid vilken tid pa dagen stupade konungen? . . .

(in the morning), tror jag. 9. I dag fira vi pappas . . .

(50th) fodelsedag; han foddes (the ninth of) augusti . . .

1861. 10. I gar for en vecka sedan kom min bror hem fran

Tyskand for att deltaga i firandet. 11. Sverige ar mer an

. . .
(twice) sa stort som Minnesota och har nastan . . .

(three times) sa manga invanare. 12. Hur langa aro feri-

erna vid den svenska folkskolan ? Skolan slutar i mitten pa
juni och borjar igen i slutet pa augusti. 13. Sommarferier-
na racka alltsa omkring ... (2 |) manader. 14. Vilken ar
den genaste vagen, den till vanster eller den till hb'ger, bag-
ge leda till staden, eller vagen till hur? 15. Lit oss ta

vanster, den ar bortemot en och en halv kilometer kortare.

Den andra ar alltsa mer an diibbelt sa lang. 16. Vad ha
vi for dag? Det ar fredag i dag, och om (342,
en dag i

note) lordag maste vi ha det har arbetet fardigt for att

kunna ta i tu 2 (327) med nagot nytt i borjan pa nasta vec-
ka. 17. Har du varit i herr Lindgrens tradgard nyligen?

Ja, jag var dar i onsdags. 18. Eosorna aro utspruckna de ;

aro de allra harligaste rosor, jag nagonsin har sett, dess-

utom har han manga andra slags blommor.
J
The indef. article may be omitted, also vilket datum or vad ar det JOT datum,

vi, etc. *Att ta itu med nagot, to go to work with something.

B. Conversation. 1. Vad ar er brors adress nu? 2. Pa

vilken vaning bor han ? 3. Han amnar ju att flytta, vet ni
 EXERCISE. 199

nar? 4. Vad ha vi for datum i

dag? 5. Vad ar det for
datum i
morgon om en vecka? 6. Nar firar er bror sin
fodelsedag? 7. Vilket ar och vilken dag ar han fodd?
8. Nar foddes Gustav den andre Adolf? 9. Nar stupade
Karl den tolfte?

C. 1. Have you studied fractions? Yes, we are studying

(290, note) them now in school. 2. Can you tell me how to
1
multiply two-fifths by one-fourth ? i multiply the numer-
ators and the denominators together and the result is two-
twentieths. 3. How many units are there in seven-sixths?
In seven-sixths there is one unit and one-sixth over. 4. Why
are you in such a hurry
2
? I am going
3
to the station to
meet my sister. I must be there at a quarter of ten and it
ishalf past nine now. 5. Is she coming so soon, it is only
the 18th to-day; a week from to-day is Christmas. 6. Yes,
I know, but my birthday is (on) the 20th and we shall have
a family festival at home. 7. How old are you ? I am in

(on) my 20th year. 8. You are the oldest in the family,

L
suppose. No, my sister Mary is a year and a half older
than I, and I have a brother who is almost twice as old as
I. 9. I hope that you will pardon (use pres.) my delay
4
in writing ,
but I received your letter, which was dated
Monday, August 4th, only (forst) this morning. 10. You
have been away very long, haven't you ? Not so very long 5 ,

I left the city at the beginning of August and came back at

the end of September; so I was away a little over a month

and a half 6 11. Does your brother have the same address
.

as (som) before? No, he has moved; now he lives at num-

ber 13 King's Street.
''How to followed by an infinitive must be rendered by a clause here hur jag :

skall multiplicera or hurman mvltiplicerar. 2To be in a hurry, att ha bratt or

bruttom. IFuture with skall. 4 Translate att jag 'har drSjt med att skriva.
5
fcke sa varst Hinge; rdrst is colloquial. *En och en halv mdnad.
200 VOCABULARY.

VOCABULARY.
adde'ra, I, to add gen, -t, near, short (of a road)
alltsd, thus (not also) en hel (-a), unit
bliva, to become (in mathe- hoger (no neut., indef.), right
matics, to equal) innehdlla (insep.), to contain
ett ftrdfc, fraction , (also en kilome'ter, kilometer ,

trouble) conduct
leda, lib, to lead,
brattom (att Jia brtittom), en mdnad, -er, month
to be in a hurry mitten (def. form or mitt),
ett datum, -a, date middle, midst
date'ra, I, to date multipUce'ra, I, to multiply
del'taga (sep., see taga), to en ndmnare, , denominator
participate nastan, almost
divide'ra, I, to divide nyligen, recently
ett drojsmdl, , delay omkring, about
en dod, -ar, (generally sing.), racka, Ha, to reach; last
death sedan (adv. and conj.), then,
er'hdlla (insep., see hftlla), to thereupon, after
receive, get sluta 1 , I, to end
en familjefest, -er, family ett slut, , close, end
festival stupa, I, to fall (on the battle
ferier (pi.), vacation field)
ett ftrande, celebration sd'lunda, thus .

folkskola, -or, public school en tdljare, numerator

fodas (pass, of foda, give ursdkta, I, to excuse
birth to), lib, to be born utsprucken, p. part, of spricka
en fodelsedag, -ar, birthday ut', to
open (of flowers)
formo^da, I, to presume en vdning, -ar, story, apartment
forvand'la, I, to transform en drsdag, -ar, anniversary

*Sluta when it means to shut and to conclude belongs to the Fourth Conjuga-
tion; sluta, slot, slolo, slutil. sluten, -et.
 LESSON XXXII.
Prepositions.
345. Prepositions govern the objective case
which, except for a few of the pronouns, is the
same as the nominative.
NOTE. Till and i govern the genitive in a few idiomatic phrases: till sdngi
to (in) bed ; i somras, last summer.

346. The following are the most important prep-

ositions in Swedish:
av, of, off nara, near, close by
bakom, behind nedanfor, below
bland, among nedfor, down
efter, after, behind ovan, above
enligt, according to ovanfb'r, above
frdn, ifran, from pa, a, on
framfor, in front of sedan, since
for, for, before till, to
fb'rbi, by, past undan, away from
fore, before, ahead of under, beneath, below;
aenom, igenom, through,
' during
by uppfor, up
hos, with, by, among ur, out, out of
i,in, into utmed, along
innan, before utefter, along
innanf&Tt within utfor, down
inom, in, within utom, outside of; beside,
jcimte, by, beside except
kring, omkring, around, utan, without
about utanfor, outside of
med, with vid, invid, by, at
medelst, by means of bredvid, by the side of
mellan, emellan, between at, to, for
mot, emot, against, to- over, above
ward
347. The following expressions with preposi-
tional value are of common occurrence:
Swedish Grammar 14
202 PREPOSITIONS.

med avseende pa, with reference to

med hdnsyn till, in regard to
ikraft av, by virtue of
ior till foljd av, in consequence of, because of
med anledning av, on account of
i trots av (trots), in spite of
oaktat, in spite of
Icings, langsmed, along
rorande 1

angdende [concerning
betraffande J

i stdllet for, instead of

undantagandes, excepting
for .... skull, for the sake of
for. .
sedan, ago
. .

NOTE. For... skull and for... sedan take the expressions which they govern
between the two parts. For... skull requires the genitive case: for min fars
skull, for the sake of my father ; for hans skull, for his sake
; for ett dr sedan,
for Idnge sedan, a year ago, long ago.

USES OF THE PREPOSITIONS.

348. The following are the uses of some of the
most common prepositions.
Av, of, off, from, by, for:
(a) Titles: konungen av Sverige, the king of
Sweden.
(b) Material: klockan dr av guld, the watch is

of gold.

(c) Agent: han beundrades av alia, he was ad-

mired by everybody.
(d) Cause=for, of: han grdt av glddje, he wept
for joy; fian dog av hunger, he died of hunger.
(e) Quality, description or characteristic: en
 PREPOSITIONS. 203

man av karaktdr, av ara, a man of character, of

of honor.
(f) Source :
jag har fdtt boken av honom, I have
received the book from him; det ar sndllt av dig,
it is kind of you.

(g) Partitive idea: onskar ni ett glas av detta

vin? Do you wish a glass of this wine? en af mina
v anner, one of my friends; den flitigaste av alia,
the most diligent of all.

349. Efter, after, behind, according to, for, at:

(a) Time or sequence: efter middagen ar det

sko'nt att vila, it is nice to rest after dinner; vem
kommer efter mig? Who comes after me (behind
me)?
(b) for: after verbs of asking, looking, sending,-
striving, skicka efter lakaren, send for the
etc.:

doctor; jag har letat efter boken, I have hunted for

the book; vem frdgar han efter? Whom does he
inquire for? strdva efter, to strive for, etc.

(c)according to efter vad jag har hort, accord-

:

ing to what I have heard (enligt is more common

in this sense) .

NOTE. Closely related expressions are found with certain verbs: att doma
efter ndgot, to judge by something han rattar sig efter fin fan vilja, he is
;

governed by his father's will.

350. For, for, to, before, etc.:

(a) Advantage, reference, object: han har so'rjt
for sina barns uppfostran, he has provided for the
education of his children; tala om det for honom.
mention to him han har ingen forstaelse for ide-
it ;

he has no appreciation of ideal things for

ella saker, ;

mig far du gora det, as far as I am concerned you

204 PREPOSITIONS.

may do it;for mig dr han blott en vanlig mdn-

niska, in my estimation he is only a common mortal.
(b) Price: giv mig for en krona konfekt, give
me a crown's worth of bonbons; hur mycket har
du betalt for hatten? How much have you paid for
the hat?
(c) Place (especially figurative, a strictly literal
before is generally expressed by framfor) : med
do'den for b'gonen, with death staring one in the
face; ndr faran star for dorr en, when danger is at
hand (before the door) ; spdnn hasten for kdrran,
hitch the horse to the cart.

(d) Duration of time: det dr nog for en vecka,

that is enough for a week (see pa and under).
NOTE. The temporal before is rendered by fore and t'nnan.

(e) Succession han har o'versatt det ord for ord,

:

he has translated it word for word; han blev varre

dag for dag, he grew worse day by day, steg for
steg, step by step.
With sedan, in the sense of ago for en vecka
(f) :

sedan, a week ago; for lange sedan, long ago.

(g) After verbs denoting flight, concealment,
caution, fear, and the like: han ftydde for fienden,
he fled from the enemy; han gomde sig for mig,
he hid from me (with such verbs for is sometimes
used together with undan) : att varna nagon for
nagot, to warn somebody against something; att
akta sig for nagot, to be on one's guard against
something; att vara rddd for nagot, to be afraid
of something; att skrdmma nagon for nagot, to
frighten somebody for something.
(h) In a number of idiomatic expressions: vad
 EXERCISE. 205

tar du mig for? What do you take me for? jag

gick for mig sjalv, I walked by myself; han skrat-
tade for sig sjalv, he laughed to himself; for att
vara bara ett barn, spelar han icke sa ilia, to be
only a child he does not play so badly.

EXERCISE XXXII.
A. 1. Under sommaren bor ni val ej i staden? Nej, da
flytta vi ut
pa landet;
1
vi aga ett litet lantstalle utmed 2 flo-

den nedanfor 3 staden. 2. Aro era forbindelser med staden

bekvama? Ja, de allra bekvamaste; vi ha angbatsforbin-
delsemed tva turer i timmen, och efter vad jag bar hb'rt,
kommer automobilforbindelse snart att upprattas 4 3. Det .

ar mycket folk i denna restaurang, men darborta i hornet

till ar ett bord, som ej ar upptaget av nagon.
hb'ger
5

4. Detta lar vara en ypperlig restaurang, jag bar fatt adres-

sen av en av mina vanner. 5. Dar star han sjalv fram-

for disken och talar med agaren. Vill ni, att jag skall pre-
sentera er for 6 honom? Han ar en man av karaktar och
bildning. 6. Jag skall ga ned i staden 7 i
dag for att gora

nagra uppkop for mig sjalv; vill du kanske, att jag skall ko-

pa nagot at dig ? 7. Det var hyggligt av dig att tanka pa 8

mig, men jag ar alldeles utan pengar nu. 8. Pengarna kan
jag fb'rskottera, jag bar fatt lana av dig sa ofta. 9. du Om
9
gar forbi Lindgrens cigarrhandel, sa titta in och hor efter ,
om de fatt in av mina favoritcigarrer an, i sa fall 10 kop en
lada. 10. Sa sorgligt, att herr Liden skulle do sa hastigt.
Vad dog han av 11 ? 11. Av hjartforlamning. Han blev
haftigt sjuk efter middagen. Man skickade efter 9 lakaren,
men han kunde ej utratta nagot. 12. Han var en praktig
karl enligt ryktet bar han utovat en storartad valgorenhet.
;

Hans dod kommer att fororsaka sorg inom vida kretsar.

1 'Also utefter. *Nedanfor, ovanfor, designate location
Into; note use of ut.
upp/or, nedfSr denote direction. *Note use of kommer att; skall may also be
206 EXERCISE.

used. "Note omission of article. 6 Not till. 'Down town. *Think of, tdnka pa,
but if it means to have an opinion of it must be translated by tdnka om: vad
tanker du om honom, what opinion do you have of him? 9 349, a. 10 In that
11
case. 348, d.

B. Conversation. 1. Vart flyttar ni, nar sommaren

kommer? 2. Var ligger ert lantstalle? 3. Ar det svart att

komna in till staden ? 4. Aro angbatsturerna taia ? 5. Pa
vad satt kommer forbindelsen med staden att forbattras?
6. Varfor tror ni att den bar restaurangen ar ypperlig?
7. Vad for tjanst vill ni gora er van? 8. Vad lovar ni att

gb'ra, nar ban siiger, att ban ar utan pengar? 9. Var kb'per
ban sina favoritcigarrer?

C. 1. Where do you live during the summer?

1
We live
in a little country house, which we own along 1 the river a
little above the city. 2. Is it not inconvenient to live out-

No, we have connection by steamer

2 3
side of the city?
4
every half-hour , and according to the paper we are soon
3
to have connection by automobile. 3. Let us ask that
5
policeman for a good restaurant; I have not had a bite to
eat since twelve o'clock now after seven. 4. This
and it is

looks really cozy; shall we sit down by that table in the

corner? 5. Who was the gentleman who just walked past
us and saluted ? I met him about a week ago 6 when I took
a trip up 7 Gotha canal from Gothenburg to Stockholm.
8 9
6. May I give you a piece of this steak? If you please .

That much, give me only half of that. 7. After din-

is too
ner I shall have 10 to hurry home; I must be at the hotel
before nine, I expect company between nine and ten.
11
8. Which is the best way of getting to the hotel? By
street car or by steamboat? 9. The little steamboat that
12
lies there by the quay will land you right in front of the
hotel. 10. But it will leave within a few minutes. Now
 VOCABULARY. 207

it backs out from the quay. 11. There will soon come 13
another; I think a steamboat leaves every ten minutes.
12. If you are ready now, we shall go down to the quay
14
ancl wait for the boat. 13. Just in time 15 , there it comes
out 16 between those two big boats.
J
See A, 1, above. z
Utom or utanfor. 3
Medelst (med may also be used). 4
Far;'e
halvtimme or far trettionde minut (note use of ordinal in such expressions).
6 T
'349, a. 350, f for precedes omkring.
;
See A, note 3, above. *Use fa. Va, jag
tackar or om ni bchagar. "Present of modal. "Use infinitive of komma.
12
Translate right by mitt; mitt, middle, is used with certain prepositions: mitt i
rummet, in the middle of the room mitt under predikan, right in the middle
;

of the sermon ; mitt pu fingrel, right on the finger. Det plus present. 14P&.
KI tid.
16
Fram.

VOCABULARY.
en automobilfurbindelse, -r, hoger (no neuter, indef.), right
connection by automobile en kaj, -er, pier, quay
bekvtim, -t, comfortable kan'ske, may be, perhaps
en bildning, culture, educa- en karaktar', -er, character
tion en krets, -ar, circle
en bit, -ar, piece, bit (bite) ett lantstdlle, -n, country house
en cigar rhandlare, cigar , en poliskonstapel, -lar, police-.
dealer man
en disk, -ar, counter prdktig, -t, splendid
en favorit'cigarr', -er, favorite en sorg, -er, sorrow, grief
cigar sorglig, -t, sad
frummande, , strange en spdrvagn, -ar, street car
en forbindelse, -r, connection en stek, -ar, steak
for'orsaka (insep. v.), I, to storartad, -at, magnificent
cause titta, I, to look
forskotte'ra, I, to advance en tur, -er, trip; turn (also
Gota kanal, Gotha canal luck)
Goteborg, Gothenburg tilt, frequent

en halvtimme, -ar, half hour ett uppkop, purchase ,

hemtrevlig, -t, cozy, homelike upp'ratta (insep. v.), I, to

en hjartforlamning (-ar), heart establish, institute
failure upp'tagen, -t, occupied
hygglig, -t, nice, kind ut'rdtta (insep. v.), I, to ac-

Mftig, -t, violent complish

208 PREPOSITIONS.

utova (insep. v.), I, to exer- en dngbdtsforbindelse, -r, con-

cise, practice nection by steamer
en vulgiirenhet, charity en dngbdtstur, -er, steamboat
"

ypperlig, -t, excellent, fine trip a

en iigare, ,
owner
IDIOMS: 1. att ha frdmmande, to have company.
2. att Jia tur, to be in luck; det ur min tur, it is

my turn.
3. att titta in hos nugon, to call on somebody.

LESSON XXXIII.
Uses of Prepositions (Continued).

351. Genom (igenom), through, by means of,

on account of:
(a) Direction: vi gingo genom skogen, we went
through the forest.
(b) Time may follow the noun
(the preposition
in this senseand has then the form igenom): han
var olycklig hela livet igenom, he was unhappy
throughout his whole life.
(c) Means: han later hdlsa genom sin bror, he
sends greetings through his brother; genom stora
anstrdngningar har han uppndtt sitt mdl, by means
of great exertions he has attained his goal.
(d) On
account of: genom sitt ddraktiga upp-
forande har han forlorat vdrt fb'rtroende, on ac-
count of his foolish conduct he has lost our con-
fidence.

352. Hos, at the house of, in the shop of, in:

han bor hos oss, he lives with us; hos skrdddaren,
at the tailor's; vi Idsa hos Gothe mycket om kons-
ten, in Goethe we read much about art.
 PREPOSITIONS. 209

353. 7, in, into:

(a) Place (literal) : i rummet, in the room;

place into which (literal) is denoted by in i, into:
han kom in i rummet, he came into the room.
NOTE. Observe the difference between expressions like ya in i kyrkan, go. in
i skolan (go into the church, go into the' school [house]) and ga i kyrkan,
go. i skolan (to attend church, to attend school)'.

(b) Place (figurative) att leva i fattigdom, to

:

live in poverty; place into which (figurative) att :

rdka i svarigheter, to get into difficulties.

(c) Time (with seasons and days in the genitive

to denote past time, translated by last) : i vdras,
last spring ; i fredags, last Friday i gar, yesterday
; ;

i dag, to-day ; i hundratals ar, for hundreds of years ;

en gang i veckan, once a week.

(d) Manner: skriva i hast, to write in haste; i

vrede, in anger.

(e) Change, transition: grddden forvandlas i

smor och ost, the cream is changed into butter and
cheese; ga i bitar, to go to pieces.
354. Med, with, by, to:

(a) Accompaniment: mil ni ga med mig i kyr-

kan? Will you go to church with me? han var med
de forsta, som gingo, he was among the first who
went.

(b) Manner: att studera med flit, to study with

diligence; med ett enda sprang, with (at) a single
leap.

(c) Instrument: skicka med posten, to send by

mail ; skrivamed penna, write with pen fara med ;

jarnvag, travel by rail.

210 PREPOSITIONS.

(d) In a number of set phrases; as, besldktad

med, related to; tola med, speak to, etc.
NOTE. As an adverb med means along: kom med I Come along!

355. Mot, emot, against, toward:

(a) Direction: hdren marscherade emot fienden,
the army marched against the enemy; var vdnlig
emot din bror, be kind to your brother; han kommer
nog fram mot kv alien, he will very likely come to-
ward evening; gd emot nagon, go to meet somebody.
(b) Exchange, comparison: jag ut det
bytte
gamla pianot mot ett nytt, I exchanged the old
piano for a new; de vunno spelet med tio podng
mot fyra, they won the game with ten points to
four.

(c)Hostility: arbeta mot nagon, work against

somebody; sdtta sig emot nagot, oppose something.
(d) Remedy: hdr dr ett bra medel mot huvud-
vark, here is a good remedy for headache.

356. Om, about, around, in, for, of, a, etc.:

(a) Subject or topic han berdttade om sina dven-
:

tyr, he told of his adventures; vad handlar boken

om? What does the book treat about? jag vet ej
nagot om den saken, I know nothing about that
matter.
(b) Time (at the end of which) taget kommer
:

om fem minuter, the train will be here in five min-

utes; om en manad, in a month; om onsdag, next
Wednesday.
NOTE. Time within which is denoted by inom: jag skall ha det fdrdigt inom

nagra dagar, I shall have it ready within a few days.

(c) Time at which (indefinite) : om dagen, in

 EXERCISE. 211

the daytime; om vintern, in winter; tva ganger

om dret, twice a year.
(d) Interest, competition, with verbs of asking,
contending etc. bedja om ndgonting, ask for some-
1

:
,

thing (inquire for=frdga ejter, see 349, b) spela ;

om pengar, play for money; tdvla om ett pris, to

compete for a prize; att anhdlla om ndgot, to re-
quest something.
(e) Motion past: ska vi forsoka att om honom?
ga
Shall we try to pass him? (here om may perhaps
be regarded as a separable prefix ;
it takes the main
stress) .

(f) Position: han har en bindel om huvudet, he

has a bandage about his head med armen om nagon, ;

with the arm around somebody; jag ar vat om fot-

terna, my feet are wet; norr om Stockholm, north
of Stockholm; till hoger om, to the right of.
NOTE. Position or motion around, especially when the meaning is literal, is

generally denoted by omkring or kring.

EXERCISE XXXIII.
1
A. 1. Jag skulle vilja vaxla en del svenska pengar i

amerikanska. Kan ni saga mig, var det narmaste vaxel-

3
kontoret ligger 2 ? 2. Jag kanner ej till nagot vaxelkontor
i
narheten, men darborta om hornet ligger en bank, och dar
vaxlar man nog for er. 3. Det var bra, ty jag har sa bratt-
om; jag skall lamna Stockholm om* ett par timmar.
4. Hur mycket kostar ett telegram om tjugufem ord till
5

Berlin? Det blir fyrtio ore per 6 ord, och dessutom maste
7
ni betala for adress och namnteckning. 5. Avgar tele-

grammet i dag? Ja, med forsta lagenhet.

8
6. Jag skulle

vilja siinda ett tusen kronor per telegraf till Berlin, har ar
adressen och telegi'ammet. Tors 9 jag be om 10 ett kvitto?
212 EXERCISE.

7. Du var val ej hos Bloms i gar ef teriniddag ? Nej, herr

Carlen bad mig ga med honom till Idrottsparken, och vi
kommo ej tillbaka forran fram mot 11 niotiden. 8. Hur av-
lopte Idrottsklubben Kamraterna vann
f otbollmatchen ?

med tre Kamraterna spelade med kraft och

mal mot ett.

elegans. 9. Jag traffade var gamle van Agrell i mandags.

Han talade om de ekonomiska svarigheter, i vilka han ra-

kat, och anholl om
10
ett mindre Ian. 10. Stackars Agrell,
allt synes ha sammansvurit sig mot honom. 11. Visst inte,
han har adragit sig sina motgangar genom sitt slarv. Han
hade kunnat vara valbargad for lange sedan 12 , om han 13
skb'tt sig.
l
En del is used colloquially in the sense of tome, a number of. *Also dr belii-

get or or. *Kanna till, know

456, b. *0/.
of. The Latin per is used after
4

an expression of price with the meaning of a; we could also say fyrtio ore ordet.
'Note use of pres. ; also kommer att avga. "See 354, b ; also vid. 'Common
form of polite request. I0
356, d. "355, a. "350, f. "Note omission of auxil-
iary.

B. 1. Here is a telegram for you. It is from my brother;

I wish to answer immediately by 1 telegraph. 2. Could 2 you
tell me where the nearest telegraph office is ? You will find
one around the corner on the first cross street. 3. How
much does a telegram of 3 twenty words to Paris cost? It
4
costs forty-five ore a word. 4. May I then send the ad-

dressand signature for nothing5 ? No, you will have to pay

6
for them too. 5. Will you take dinner with 7 us next 8
Wednesday ? I am so sorry, but it will not be possible for
9

me. 6. Why not? I have promised to take my friend Car-

len along to the football game in the afternoon. 7. I should
10
like togo with you myself ; they are going to compete for
11
the championship in football. 8. Get into this compart-
12
ment; the train will start in a few minutes. Hurry up!
9. I shall 13 take these parcels with me into the car. It was
so kind of you to check that valise for me. 10. That seat
 VOCABULARY. 213
1*
will be very comfortable for you, if you are not afraid to
ride 15 backwards. you, good-bye! 11. theyThank Now
ring for the
16
third time. 12. How far 17 is it to Upsala?
13. You
18
Upsala lies thirty miles north of Stockholm.
19
ought to visit it in the spring, while the students are still
there. 14. They will return within 20 a month, I think.
15. Now we are there. Who is this gentleman that comes
22
tomeet 21 us? 16. Over there, towards the west we have ,

Old Upsala.
2 3 4
'See A, 6, above. Sec A, 1, above. See A, 4, above. See A, 4, above,
6 7 8
note 5. *Intet, not ingenting. Use ata. 352. 356, b. 'Use present of
bliva. 1P
356, d. "Use j;d. 12
Use pros, of ga.
13
Use skall since the future here
denotes a determination. "Use kommer ait bli.
15
350, g.
18
Leave out the
prepositive def. article. "Use langt. 18 356, f.
19
0m or pa. 20
356, 6, note.
21
358. a. ''-Vaster.

VOCABULARY.
an'Mlla (insep. v.), to request ett mdsterskap, , champion-
av'gA, to go out, depart; gd ship
av' to break mojligt, -t, possible (ly)
baklanges, backwards en namnteckning, -ar, signa-
en bank, -er, bank ture
ekonomisk, -t, financial norr (adj. and noun, no indef.),
elegans,
1
elegance north
en fotbollmatch, -er, football (en) narhet, nearness, vicinity
game ett ord, , word
genast, immediately ett paket, -er, parcel
en herre, -ar, gentleman polette'ra, I, to check
en idrottspark, -er, athletic en resviiska, -or, valise
park raka, I, to meet; encounter
Idrottsparken, Athletic Park radd (no neut. indef.), timid,
in Stockholm afraid
inom, within sammansvarja sig (refl. v.),
en kraft, -er, force, strength -svor, -svuro, -svurit, -en,
ett kvitto, -n, receipt -et, to conspire
en Wgenhet, -er, opportunity skota sig (refl. v.), Ha, to
en motg&ng, -ar, adversity take care of oneself
ett mal, goal; meal ett slarv, ,
carelessnosfi
214 PREPOSITIONS.

elt sate, -n, seat vaxla, I, to change

en telegraf, -er, telegraph ett vaxelkontor, exchange
en tvargata, -or, cross street office
Idvla, I, to compete .
d'draga sig (refl. v.), to bring
vdlMrgad, -at, well-to-do on, contract

IDIOMS: 1. att rdka en person, to see, meet a person; att rdka

i fattigdom, svdrigheter, to become poverty-stricken,
to get into difficulties; jag rdkar inte hdr, I do
not find my way here.
2. att ddraga sig en sjukdom, to contract a disease.
'Pronounced elegangs 1 .

LESSON XXXIV.
Uses of Prepositions (Continued).

357. Pa, on, upon, at, in, for, to.

(a) Place in which: boken ligger pa bordet, the
book lies on the table; jag mo'tte honom pa gatan
(not i gatan); I met him in the street; han ar pa
sitt rum, he is in his room ett hdl pa rocken, a hole ;

in the coat; pa landet, in the country.

(b) Place into which gd pa target, pa posten, pa:

teatern, to go to market, to the post office, to the

theater; gd ut pa faltet, pa landet, to go into the
field, into the country.
NOTE. Till teatern mean? only to the theater as a place ; pa teatern Implies
attendance ; att skicka till posten, to send to the post office ; att skicka pd
posten, to mail.

(c) Direction toward an object: han riktade sin

kamera pd mig, he pointed his camera at me; jag
blickade (sag) pd honom, I looked at him han syf- ;

iade pd mig, he alluded to me.

(d) Time during which, for how long: han har
rest till Sverige pd ett ar, he has gone to Sweden
 PREPOSITIONS. 215

for a year; han har ej skrivit pa en vecka, he has

not written for a week.
(e) Time at which pa morgonen, in the morning
:
;

pa varen, in the spring.

NOTE. Om morgonen, om varen, etc. is much more indefinite: we must say
i dag pa morgonen, this morning (not om morgonen), see om.

Response and expectation after certain verbs

(f) :

Response: svara pa, to answer; ho'ra pa, to

1.

listen to; giva akt pa, to pay attention to: ho'r pa

vad jag sdger, listen to what I say; svara pa mitt
brev, answer my letter.
2.Expectation hoppas pa, to hope for lita pa,
:
;

to upon; rdkna pa, to count on, etc.: jag

rely
hoppas pa regn, I hope for rain; jag rdknar pa din
hjdlp; I count on your help; tank pa det! Think of
it jag vdntar pa honom, I am waiting for him.
!

(g) With certain adjectives ond pa, angry with :

;

matt pa, tired of; avundsjuk pa, envious of; upp-

mdrksam pa, attentive to; svartsjuk pa, jealous of,
etc.: jag dr matt pa sddana saker, I am tired of
(have had enough of) such things; han dr ond pa
mig, he is angry with me.
(h) In a number of idiomatic expressions: pa
svenska, in Swedish soppa pa oxkb'tt, beef soup
; ;

att leva pa tio dollars i veckan, to live on ten dollars

a week; jag har inga pengar pa mig, I have no
money about me; en vdxel pa (a) femtio kronor,
a draft for fifty dollars; pa delta sdtt, in this man-
ner; det gar hundra ore pa kronan, there are one
hundred ore to the crown.
358. Till, to, in, for, of, etc.:

(a) Motion to a place: ga till staden, till svarta

tavlan, till posten, till himlen: go to town, to the

216 PREPOSITIONS.

blackboard, to the post office, to heaven; sjunka till

batten, sink to the bottom; fora till bords, conduct
to the table; han kom till mig, he came to me.

(b) Place at or in which: ligga till stings, to lie

in bed sitta till bords, sit at table ;
; till sjoss, on sea.

(c) Purpose, appointment, destination, transfor-

mation: nyckeln ar till att Idsa upp med, the key
is for unlocking; de ha kront honom till konung,

they have crowned him king; bliva till sten, become

stone; har ar ett paket till er, here is a package for
you; vara till nytta, be of use; taga till hustru, to
marry (lit. to take for wife) .

(d) Specification, reference: god till karaktaren,

of good character; vanlig till sattet, of a good dis-
position skomakare till yrket, shoemaker by trade
; ;

benet till bordet, the leg of the table han ar son till ;

presidenten, he is the president's son.

NOTE. Here may perhaps be classed the Swedish equivalent for the objective
genitive : karleken till fosterlandet, love of country; Guds kdrlek till oss,
God's love for us.

(e) Addition :
jag dricker kaffe till maten, I drink
coffee with my meals; tag socker till kaffet, take
sugar with the coffee.
(f) In a number of idiomatic expressions: till
hosten, next fall till pdsk far jag hem, I shall go
;

home for Easter; vad fick du till julklapp? what did

you get for Christmas present? vi hade lax till mid-
dag, we had salmon for dinner gratulera till fb'delse-
;

dagen, to congratulate on a birthday, etc.

(g) och med=to, up to, including frdn sidan
till :

tjugu och med sidan trettio, from page twenty

till

to page thirty inclusive. As an adverb it means

even: till och med han, even he.
 EXERCISE. 21?

359. Under, under, beneath, during, amid:

(a) Place, direction: jag stod under trddet, 1
stood beneath the tree jag star under hans uppsikt,
;

I am under his supervision; under omstdndigheter-

na, under the circumstances; kom under mitt para-

ply, come beneath my umbrella.

(b) Time under hans livstid, during his lifetime

:
;

under tiden, in the meantime; under marschen, on

the march; under middagen, in the course of the
dinner.

(c) Rank, value, age: kaptenen star under majo-

ren i rang, the captain is below the major in rank;
hans bok dr under all kritik, his book is beneath all
criticism; vill ni salja huset under 10,000 kronor?
Do you wish to sell the house for less than 10,000
crowns? under tjugu ar, under twenty years of age.
(d) Manner: under tarar omtalade han vad som
hdnt, weeping (with tears) he related what had
happened under skratt och skdmt, amidst laughing
;

and joking.

EXERCISE XXXIV.
A. 1. Pa manga 1
ar har ej en sa forfarlig jarnvagsolycka
hant som i
gar; till foljd av en felsignal ursparade natt-
snalltaget mellan Stockholm och Uppsala. 2. Min kusin
var bland passagerarne, han blev raddad pa 2 ett underbart
3. Vad vantar du pa ?
3
satt. Jag vantar pa att fa* en vaxel
a ett tusen kronor inlost, som jag utstallde pa denna bank
5
genom dess korrespondent i Chicago. 4. Jag har mycket
litet kontanta pengar pa mig, men jag har ett kreditbrev
pa denna bank till belopp av tio tusen kronor. 5. Har du
6 7
tagit ut alia dina pengar? Nej, jag har till princip att
Sivedish Grammar 15
218 EXERCISE.

alltid lata en mindre summa innesta; jag raknar pa att

kimna satta in
6
mera Har du reda pa att ogynn-
senare. 6.

samma rykten rorande denna bank under de senaste veckor-

na varit i omlopp. 7. Nu vanta vi ej langre 8 pa honom,
utan 9 ga till bords; pa honom kan man da aldrig rakna.
8. Vad ha vi till middag i dag, Anna?
Soppa pa lions,
lammstek m. m. (etc.) Maken till middag ha vi ej haft
pa lange. 9. Vem och vad ar den dar unge mannen, som
10

pa bjudningen i gar? Han ar en son till dr

11
vi traffade

Liden och ar larare till yrket. 10. Lagg det har brevet pa
posten, sa ar du snail. Du har glomt att satta frimarke pa.
11. Det var bra att du gav akt darpa. Adressaten hade nog
mig, om han fatt betala losen.
12 13
blivit ond pa
^57, A. 2 357, h. '357, f. *Fa can often be translated by get. 5 351, c.
Generally separated; but de uttagna pengarna, de insatta pengarna; uttagare,
T 8
insdttare. 358, c. Translate, any longer. 'Adversative conjunction ; trans-
10 12
lates but after a negative. 357, d. "357, a. 357, a, f. "Fa, have to.

B. Conversation. 1. Var gardagens jarnvagsolycka

obetydlig? Varigenom ursparade taget? 3. Vem befann
2.

sig pa taget vid tillfallet ? 4. Omkom han ocksa ? 5. Vad

beloper sig er vaxel till ? 6. Varf or behover ni ej bara myc-

ket kontanta pengar pa er? 7. Varf or later ni en mindre
summa innesta i banken? 8. Varf or vore det sakrare att

taga ut allt, som ni satt in? 9. Varf or har ni ej gatt till

bords forut? 10. Vad ar er tanke om middagen?

1

^Thought is here equivalent to opinion.

C. What do you think of 1 the railroad accident which

2
happened yesterday afternoon ? It is the most serious for

many years. 2. My brother, who is on a trip to Narvik,

was among the passengers, but was saved. 3. How? He
had gone into 3 the dining car and this was the only one
of the cars which did not derail. 4. The accident hap-
4
pened because of carelessness on the part of the employees.
5. Could you tell me where Stockholms Enskilda Bank is?
 VOCABULARY. 219
5
I have a drjift on it foi one thousand crowns. 6. All the
banks are closed at three o'clock sharp 6 and you have only
7
five minutes to spare 7. I must have the money, for I
.

have very little cash about me. During 8 all my travels I

have never been so short of money. 8. I believe that I must
turn to 9 you and ask for help. You can count on me.
10
9. I shall gladly advance the amount of the draft for you;
to-morrow they will 11 cash it in the bank. 10. Now we have
waited long enough for 12 him and the dinner is getting
cold. He seems to have a habit 13 of always coming late.
11. Whatis your opinion about the book? According to
12. How is he as to
14
my opinion it is badly written.
15
character? I observed only one fault in him while he was
16
under my
supervision: too great a love of money. 13.
Is your coffee sweet enough? Take a little more sugar.
17
No, thank you. I have not used sugar with 18 my coffee
for many years. 14. Mr. Lind will surely be envious of

Carl when he hears that they have elected Carl chairman 19 .

*356, tonka om, to have an opinion of

a. ; tanka pa, to think of (have in
;

mind), 357, f, 2.
2
357, d.
8
353, a.
4
A betjdningens sida; a is used instead
of pa in a few set expressions the place is never literal. 5 357, h. 8 Pd slaget
;

tre or precis klockan ire. To. er. 8 359, a. "Att vanda tig till, to turn to,
10
address oneself to. Garna; future with skall (the future here denotes a
promise). "Use present; we have here a temporal adverb which obviates
18
ambiguity.
12
357, f, 2.
I3
/To till vana att ; 358, c. "358, d. "352. 358,
I9
d. note. "Nej, jag tackar. 358, e. 358, c.

VOCABULARY.
en adressat', -er, addressee gdrdag, yesterday
all'varsam, -t, serious en Jijalp, help
avundsjuk, -t, envious lions (collective), chickens,
ett belopp, , amount poultry
en bjudning, invitation, party in'nestd (generally insep. in
ett fel, error, mistake
,
this sense), to remain
en felsignal, -er, wrong signal (money)
forfarlig, -t, terrible in'losa, losa in', to redeem;
giva akt' (pa), to heed to cash
 220 PUKI'OSITIOMJ.

in'satta, satta in' (see sdtta) en restaurangvagn, -ar, a din-

to deposit ing car
iMllna, I, to become cold ett rykte, -n, rumor; reputation
kontant', , (adj.), cash rakna, I, to count
en Correspondent', -er, corre- en sida, -or, side; page; part
spondent
ett socker (def. sockret), sugar
ett kreditbrev, letter of
,
en soppa, -or, soup
credit
ett satt, , manner; way
en lammstek, -ar, lamb steak
w ^rbar, -t, miraculous, won-
en losen, ransom; postage due
derful
en make, -ar, mate, match
en uppsikt, supervision
ett nattsncilltag, night ex- ,

ur'spara, spdra ur', to derail

press
o'betydlig, -t, insignificant ut'stalla (generally insep. in
ogynnsam, -t, unfavorable this sense), lib, to draw
ett omlopp, , circulation (a draft)
om'komma (see komma), ut'taga, taga ut' (see taga),
perish to take out

en princip', -er, principle en vilxel, -lar, draft

en reda (-0 in compounds) vdrdslosJiet, carelessness
order; knowledge ett yrke, -n, trade
IDIOMS : 1. att ha reda pd nagot, to know something.
2. att gora reda for nagot, to give an account of
. something.
3. till foljd af, in consequence of, because of.

LESSON XXXV.
Uses of Prepositions (Continued).
360. Vid, at, by, on, etc.:
(a) Vicinity: slaget vid Breitenfeld, the battle of
Breitenfeld; vid bordet, at the table; vid stranden,
by the shore vid Stockholm, in the neighborhood of
;

Stockholm fdstad vid vdggen, fastened to the wall.

;

Also figuratively: fdsta sig vid nagon, fix one's

affections on somebody vid lampan, by the lamp. ;

(b) Time: vid jul, at Christmas; vid femtio ars

 PREPOSITIONS. 22 1

alder, at fifty years of age; vid forsta tillfdlle, at

the first opportunity; vid Idsandet av detta brev.
at the reading of this letter.

(c) Condition: vara vid god hdlsa, to be in good

health; vid stark hetta, at a great heat; vid gott
lynne, in good humor; han dr vid armen, he is in
the army.
Contact: taga vid handen, to take by the
(d)
hand; rora vid saret, touch the wound; used thus
with verbs like hdlla, to hold gripa, to seize leda, to
; ;

lead; fora, to conduct; draga, to pull.

(e) Penalty: vid livsstraff, at the penalty of
death; vid tjugu kronors bb'ter, at a fine of twenty
crowns.

361. At, toward, to:

(a) Direction=toward, in the direction of, to. In
this sense at does not necessarily imply attainment
of the goal; the idea of direction is often strength-
ened by till placed after the governed word: han
har gatt at floden till, he has gone toward the river ;

kasta ett ben at hunden, throw a bone to the dog;

han skot stolen at sidan, he pushed the chair to the
side; han sag inte ens at mig, he didn't even look
at me (in my direction) .

(b) Often before an indirect object (also till) :

jag gav boken at Karl, I gave the book to Carl.

(c) Cause (often with a touch of ridicule or con-
tempt) att skratta at, to laugh at; det dr sa man
:

kan grata at det, it is enough to make one weep.

362. A, on, is used in a few common phrases;
as, d andra handen. on the other hand d ena sidan,
;
222 PREPOSITIONS.

on the one side; en vdxel a femtio kronor, a draft

for fifty crowns a Hans vdgnar, in his behalf. When
;

the expression is literal, pa must be used: pa ena

sidan gatan, one one side of the street.
363. over, over, above, across, beyond, about,
etc.:

(a) Place (literal and figurative) =over, above,

beyond: ett stort moln hanger over berget, a big
cloud hangs over the mountain; lararen star over
sina larfungar, the teacher is above his pupils; over
havet, beyond the sea; han ar nog over trettio ar,
I think he is above thirty. Related to this construc-
tion is over after such verbs as regera, to rule rada,
;

to hold sway (primarily to advise) segra, to gain

;

a victory: Karl den tolvte regerade over ett vid-

strdckt rike, Charles XII. ruled over an extensive
realm; han segrade over sina fiender, he was vic-
torious over his enemies.
(b) Direction=over, across: bron, som leder over
floden,har rasat, the bridge which leads across the
river has collapsed. Related to this construction
are expressions like han har rest till New York over
Chicago, he has gone to New York by way of Chi-
cago.
(c) Excess: denna sak kostar over en krona, this
thing costs over a crown; det gar over mitt for-
stdnd, that surpasses my understanding.
(d) Duration: han blev hos oss over sommaren,
he remained with us during the summer over natten,
;

over night.
(e) Cause, topic=about, of, concerning, on, at:
1. With verbs like skriva, to write; tola, to
 EXERCISE. 223

speak yttra sig, express oneself han skrev, talade

; :

over ett svart dmne, he wrote, spoke on a difficult

topic; han yttrade sig over dagens frdgor, he ex-
pressed himself concerning the questions of the day.
NOTE. Om used with similar verbs may have a different meaning: att tain
om ndgon, to speak of somebody (make a mention of), skriva om, to write
about.

2. With verbs denoting feeling: sorja over, to

mourn; klaga over, to complain of; gladja sig over,
to rejoice at; vredgas over, to become angry at;
fortvivla over, to despair of.
With adjectives denoting feeling: glad over,
3.

glad of; ond over, angry at; ledsen over, sorry on

account of.
NOTE. We
say in Swedish, ond pa en person, angry with a person, but ond
over en sak, angry at a thing.

EXERCISE XXXV.
A. 1. Din far ar visst ej vid synnerligen god halsa nu
for tiden. Nej det ar han inte, men han klagar aldrig over
nagot, och kan inte formas att tala vid en lakare. 2. Jag
1

har sagt at honom mer an en gang, att vid bans hoga alder
2

och med hans svaga kroppskonstitution maste han varda

sig om sin halsa battre. 3. Ser ni anslaget darborta vid

gangen ? Det dar under tradet med orden : "Det ligger i

(is to) allmanhetens intresse att skona planteringarna ?" 4.

Ja Det ar ett av de manga satt, pa vilka svensken uttrycker
!

"Keep off the grass." Han faster stor

3
det amerikanska
vikt vid hovlighet. 5. Under min vistelse i Sverige har jag
4
ofta forvanats over den stora hovlighet, vanned svenskarna
vid alia bemota varandra. 6. Har ni varit vid 5
tillf alien

Skansen, det beromda friluftsmuseet, som Hazelius har

upprattat? Vi svenskar aro med ratta 6 stolta darover.
7. Nej, annu har jag ej haft tid, men vid
7
forsta tillfalle
224 EXERCISE.

skall jag ga dit. 8. Doktor White, en av mina vanner i

London, hb'll for ej sa liinge sedan ett hogst intressant fore-

8
drag over Skansen. 9. Har du traffat Karl? Han har
fragat efter dig. Ja, jag traffade honom nyss ute pa va-
gen ; han gick at staden till men
9
, sade, att ban skulle vara
tillbaka vid 7
niotiden. 10. Har Klara blivit fardig med sin
laxaan? Nej, hon var sa trott, stackars liten 10 , att bon
somnade over boken.
J
Fd and forma are often used in the sense of make, cause fa nagon att tro, :

to make somebody believe hon kan icke format, he can't be made to there
; ;

is more compulsion implied in fd. 2 361, b; also till. *Att fasta vikt (av-
4
seende) vid, attach importance to; att Idgga vikt pa, lay stress on. Note the
prepositional compound. "Also pa. c
Med rdtta, rightly. '360, b. S
363. e.
9
361, a. "Note the irregularities of liten, neut., litet, def., Kile, -a, pi. amd.

B. 1. What shall
1
we do to-night? I am going to the
2

theater; will you go with me? 2. No, I think I shall pass

the evening over my books. I am in 3 such a humor to-night
3. I know that you
4
that I could not laugh at anything.
are tired of the theater ; I am not very fond of it either
5 6
;

you know how I have often expressed myself concerning

7

it. 4. At what time does the play begin? It begins as

usual at eight o'clock, I suppose 8 5. . Do you intend to re-
main here over Christmas? No, I am going home for 9
Christmas. 6. Where is your home ? You have mentioned
it to
10
me
before, but I have forgotten it. I live in Djurs-
11
holm, close by Stockholm. 7. Is not Djursholm a suburb
of Stockholm? Yes, and it has become famous by reason
of the many prominent men that have lived there. 8. Vic-
12
tor Eydberg died there not so very long ago and all
Sweden mourned his death. 9. Although have traveled -I

across the ocean many times, the rolling and pitching of

the ship always makes 13 me sick. 10. How quickly we glide
over the water ! We shall
14
soon be at the mouth of the
15
Elbe. 11. Were you at the spring festival at Skansen yes-
 VOCABULARY. 225

terday ? No, on account of the bad weather we

all stayed at

home in the afternoon. We

are so sorry 10 that we could not
17
go there 12. Were you not out at all? Yes, during the
.

evening the weather got better and we went to Berns and

18 19
listened to the music. 13. Your eyes look very sore.
Yes, I am
quite worried about
20
them. 14. Have you con-
sulted an eye doctor about them? Yes, and he told me to
21
otudy only by daylight. 15. Take the little one by the
hand, he may be frightened at the sight of horses.
2 3 4 5
'Future with shall. Why? 357, b. 360, c. 361, c. 357, g. *Fastad
8
fid. haller ej vidare pa, etc.
7
363, e, Use an adverb. 9 358, e,
also angaende.
fid jul, at Christmas. 10 350, a. "Invid (nara invid), i narheten av. "What
is the Swedish equivalent for all used in the sense of whole f 13 What order?
"Present. Why not future with si-all f 15
360, a. 16
What preposition? In this
case the preposition may also be left out. "Here and there used in the sense
of hither and thither are hit och dit: kom hit, not kom heir. ^357. f. 1.
"Se-f what?
20
363, e, 2. Den -\- what form of litenf

VOCABULARY.
en allmanhet, public, gen- klaga, to complain
eralities en kroppskonstitution, -er,
en anblick, , sight, aspect constitution (of body)
ett anslag, , design, placard, ledsen, -et, sorry
notice ett lynne, -n,humor, disposition
bemci'ta, Ha, to treat, to re- en mynning, -ar, mouth (of riv-
ceive er, cannon) nozzle ;

ett dagsljus, daylight om'tala, tola om', to mention

framstdende (invariable), ond, ont, angry; evil, sore
prominent orolig, uneasy, worried
-t,

fiista, I and Ha, to fasten, en pj<is, -er, play (theater)

attach en plantering, -ar, vegetation
en forstad, -sttider, suburb in parks, squares, etc.
furv&nas (dep. v.), I, to be en rullning, rolling
astonished rddfrdga (insep. v.), I, to con-
glida, gled, gledo, glidit, -en, suit (a doctor)
-et, to glide Skansen, an open air museum
glomma, lib, to forget in Stockholm
ett hall, , hold; direction skona, I, to spare, to treat with
(en) hovligJiet, -er, politeness care
226 ADVERBS.

en stampning, pitching (of ett tillfiille, -n, opportunity,

ships) occasion
stanna, I, to remain uttrycka, Ha, to express
stolt, , proud en vikt, -er, weight; impor-
synnerligen, especially tance
sorja, lib, to mourn en v&rfest, -er, spring festival
till'bringa (insep. v., see vdrda, to care for
bringa), to spend, pass en alder, -rar, age
(of time) en ogonlakare, , eye doctor

LESSON XXXVI.
Adverbs.

364. Origin. With respect to their origin ad-

verbs may be divided into three groups:

(1) Primitive words and compounds of such as

nu, now;
fort, fast; blott, only; ja, jo, yes; nej, no;
ej, icke, inte, not; dar, there; hdr, here; darav, of
or from that; hdrtill, to this, hereto.
(2) The neuter singular of the indefinite form of
adjectives: beskedligt (from beskedlig), modestly;
elakt (from elak), wickedly; klart (from klar),
clearly; hoppfullt (from hoppfull), hopefully.
(3) Derivatives formed by means of a suffix: bara
(from bar), only; mojligen (from mojlig), possibly;
nagorlunda, tolerably.
365. Derivative Suffixes. The usual adverbial
suffixes are:
(a) -a: borta (bort), away; hemma (hem), at
home.
Note the following idiomatic expressions: att vara borta, to be out; att vara
hemma, to be at home.
 ADVERBS. 227

(b) -deles: alldeles, entirely, quite; framdeles,

later on; sdrdeles, especially.
Note the following idiomatic expressions: alldeles riktigt, quite right; jag
mar alldeles ypperligt, I am feeling very well ; jag tycker ej sa sdrdeles om
honom, I can't aay I like him very well ; vi fa se framdeles, we shall see later.

(c) -e (in some adverbs of time and place) :

Idnge, long; framme, in front, at hand, at the des-

tination; inne, in; uppe, up; ute, out, etc.
Note the following idiomatic expressions: i morgon aro vi framme, to-morrow
we shall be at our destination; har du boken framme t Do you have the book
at hand ? / dag var jag uppe tidigt, to-day I was up early han or ute och
;

gar, aker, he is taking a walk, ride.

(d) -en (from adjectives in -lig) dagligen, daily; :

mojligen, possibly; troligen, probably, etc.

(e) -ledes: sdledes, thus; dvenledes, likewise.
(f) -Ugen: bitterligen, bitterly; storligen, greatly;
svdrligen, hardly; nyligen, recently.
(g) -lunda (an old genitive of the Old Swedish
lund, manner, disposition) annorlunda, in any oth-
:

er way ingalunda, by no means nagorlunda,

; ; toler-
ably.
(h) -s, -es (originally a genitive, generally in com-
pound adverbs, see 365, b, e, and 366, note 2) : alls in
alls icke or icke alls, not at all; ndgonstans, any-
where; hoptals, in great numbers; tidtals, at times;
tjogtals, by the score hundratals, by hundreds.
;

(i) -vis (ws=English wise) : lyckligtvis, fortu-

nately; mojligtvis, possibly; troligtvis, probably;
styckvis, piecemeal ; delvis, partly.

366. Compound adverbs are usually composed of

prepositions and adverbs. A
very common form of
adverb compound is hdr, here, or ddr, there, -fa
preposition hdri, in this, or that ddrtill, to this, or
: ;
228 ADVERBS.

that; hdri bestdr skillnaden, the difference consists

in this ddrav foljer, att
; , from this it follows . . . .

(or results) that. . .

., etc.
NOTB 1. Hdr and dfir are also prefixed to many adverbs of place to form
extremely common compounds: daruppe, up there, upstairs; darborta, over
there ; da.rhem.ma, at (my, your, his, etc.) home ddrinne, in there, inside, etc.
;

2. Another form of adverb compound sometimes met with consists of a

noun generally in the genitive case preceded by some other part of speech
(see also 365): avsides, apart; halvvags, half-way; liggdags (pronounced daks).
bedtime (also hur dagsf at what time?); ndgonstades, somewhere; utomhus,
outdoors.

367. Position and comparison of adverbs have

already been discussed.

368. The functions of the adverb are practically

the same as in English.
369. The following examples illustrate the idio-
matic uses of certain adverbs and adverbial ex-
pressions :

Allt: Karl kunde allt vara flitigare, Carl could cer-

tainly be more bedragit dig,
diligent; han har allt
I am sure he has deceived you.
Alltfor, for: han dr alltfor strdng, he is much too
strictdu kommer for sent, you come too late.
;

Bar a: om jag bar a hade tid! If I only had time!

Kom du hit bara! Just come here (threat) om ni ;

behover nagot, sa bara kom till mig, if you need any-

thing, just come to me; bara ett ogonblick, just a
moment.
Ens (in questions and after negatives) : han har
icke ens skrivit till sin mor, he hasn't even written
to his mother.
For all (for ing en) del: kom for all del, innan jag
reser, come by all means before I leave; gor det for
all del icke, by all means, don't do it; jag vill for
 ADVERBb. 229

ing en del sdra hans kdnslor, I would by no means

wound his feelings.
En gang: han har varit hdr en gang, tror jag, he
has been here' once, I believe; han kommer en och
annan gang, he comes now and then; det levde en
gang en konung, once upon a time there was a king ;

han skriver inte en gang till mig, he does not even

write to me.
Gdrna: jag dter gdrna fisk, I am fond of fish; jag
skullegdrna gora det, I should gladly do it jag ville;

gdrna ha litet mera kott, I should like a little more

meat han vill nog hellre (comp. of gdrna} vila sig,
;

I think he would prefer to rest.

Heller: min bror var icke trott, och icke jag heller,
icke heller jag, my brother was not tired, and I was
not tired either, neither was I.
Inte, icke, ej: of the negative adverbs inte is used
most frequently in conversation. Note such em-
phatic expressions as :

alldeles icke, by no means; inte (icke) alls, alls

(icke) inte, not at all; inte ett grand, inte en smul,

not a bit ; inte det ringaste, inte det allra minsta, not
in the least.
Ju: du gor det ju? You are sure to do it? Han dr
ju min far, he is my father, you know det kunde jag
;

ju gora, I suppose I could do that.

Nog: han kommer nog, he will very likely come;
det kan nog vara sant, it may possibly be true nog ;

borde du ha lytt din far, I think you ought to have

obeyed your father jag ville nog gdrna ga med, men
;

jag har inte tid, I should indeed like to go along, but

I do not have time.
230 EXERCISE.
i

mig en kopp till, dr ni snail, give me an-

Till: giv
other cup, please; hum manga till? How many
more?
: ni dr vdl trott, I suppose you are tired
1
Veil ; det
dr vdl sant, that is no doubt true lat dr han vdl, ; men
ej dum, he is lazy, to oe sure, but not stupid.
*Val has almost the same meaning as nOg ; both denote supposition ; nog is

more subjective, has a ring of concern and sincerity which vdl lacks.

EXERCISE XXXVI.
A. Det hande en gang, att en skomakares hustru blev
1.

2. Hennes man hade garna kallat

1
allvarligt sjuk. en
skicklig lakare, men han hade alls ingenting, varmed han
kunde betala en sadan och befaim sig alltsa i stor nod.
3. Han kande nog en framstaende lakare, som bodde mitt
2

emot (tvars ofver gatan) i ett stort, vackert hus, men han
visste ocksa, att denne skulle begara ganska mycket for sin

behandling. 4. Han
overlade saken lange for 3 sig sjalv och
kom slutligen pa foljande tanke. 5. Han gick namligen
till lakaren och bad honom att
4
besoka bans 5 hustni.
6. "Har ni da 6 nagot att betala mig med?" fragade lakaren.
7. "Tyvarr ej sa mycket", svarade skomakaren, "men jag
ger er garna allt vad jag bar, om ni bara botar min hustni."
8. "Under femtio kronor, atager jag mig icke er hustrus

behandling, och ni forstar ju, att ni maste betala, antingen

jag botar henne eller icke." 9. Skomakaren betankte sig

icke lange, samycket pengar hade han val inte, men det
gallde ju hans sjuka hustru darhemma, och nagon utvag
funnes 7 nog. 10. "Kom bara", sade han, "och jag betalar,
vad ni begar, antingen ni botar henne eller bringar henne
om livet." 11. Lakaren atog sig den sjuka fruns behandling,
men denna 8
blev allt varre och varre och dog slutligen.
12. Strax darpa 9 begarde lakaren sitt honorar av skoma-
 EXERCISE. 231

karen. 13. "Botade ni min hustru" fragade denne. "Olyck-

ligtvis icke", svarade lakaren. 14. "Ni bragte henne val ej
om livet", fortsatte skomakaren. Lakaren protesters de na-

turligtvis daremot. 15. "Ja, da kan jag alls icke inse, att

jag ar skyldig er nagot. 16. Dessa voro ju de tva villkor,

pa vilka jag lovade att betala er."
Would have liked to. *Ex. XXXII, C, Note 12. 8 350, h. 4 May be omitted.
s
llonom referring to lakare is the subject of the infinitive, hence hans and not
sin. Translate But do you have, etc. 'Translate and there would probably
: :

be, etc.
8
Note allt plus repeated comparative. 9 366, note 1.

B. Conversation. 1. Vem insjuknade, skomakaren eller

hans hustru? 2. Varfor hamtade ban icke en lakare med

detsamma. 3. Fanns det nagon skicklig lakare i narheten ?

4. Varfor tvekade skomakareu att hamta honom? 5. Vil-

ken bb'n riktade skomakaren till lakaren ? 6. Vad ville den-
ne forst veta, innan han atog sig den sjuka fruns behand-
ling? 7. Var denna lakare barmhartig? 8. Vad lovade sko-
makaren att betala? 9. Pa vilka villkor skulle han betala
detta honorar? Lyckades lakaren att bota den sjuka?
10.
11. Var skomakaren enligt sin asikt skyldig lakaren nagot?

fallen seriously ill, and her illness will

She has 1
C. 1.
2
probably last long. 2. I should have liked to send for a

prominent physician, if I had only had money. 3. The doc-

tor who lives right across the street is skillful, but he charg-
es at least ten crowns a visit
3
,
I suppose 4 . If he had been
sick instead of his wife, he would probably 4 not have hesi-
tated at all to summon the expensive doctor. 5. When the
5
health of my wife is concerned, no expense, of course , can
be too great. 6. You know, do you not 6 , that you will never
get your fee from him. He is honest, to be sure
6
, but al-

together too poor. 7. I heard that the doctor, soon after

7
sent the shoemaker a bill for his treatment. 8. I have

not seen her since she became better. Neither have I.

232 VOCABULARY.

9. I should like 6 to see Mr. Edgren; is he at home? No, ho

is out for the moment. He is out riding 8 with Dr. Forsell.
10. Do you happen to have those books at hand 8 ? No, I have
them somewhere; just wait and I shall look for them.
11. Please don't take the trouble just now; you will, no
doubt 6 find them later on.
,
12. How are you now 10 ? I am

feeling somewhat better ;

until now 11 the doctor has visited
me daily. 13. What was the cause? Too much indoor 12
13
work, I think .

2 S
'Not future with skall. Why? A, 1, above. A, 3, above. Use the definite

postpositive article. Attention has been called before to this distributive

use of the definite article after expressions of price ; often per is used, XXXIII,
A, Note 5. In expressions of time i and om are used han fortjilnar fyrtio :

kroner i veckan, 2,000 kronor om

makes forty crowns a week, 2,000
aret, he
crowns a year en gang i manaden, once a month. ^Translate by nog, which
;

follows the simple verb or the auxiliary. 'Translate by ju which follows verb ;

6
invert. Translate by an adverb. ''Hans or sinf 8 365, c. Note. 9 349. b.
There are three common ways of asking for the health of a person in Swe-
10

dish which are they ? ^Tills nu, tills for narvarande. '-Certain adverbs may
;

be used to modify nouns in Swedish, when so used they follow the noun :

arbete inomhus, indoor work nb'jen vtomhtis, outdoor amusements

;
resan dit, ;

the trip thither, etc. "Invert.

VOCABULARY.
allvarligt (adv.), seriously framstdende, prominent
barmhdr'tig, -t, charitable, foljande, following
merciful ett honorar', fee

befinna sig en Jialsa, health

(refl. v., see fin-

no,), to be, hdndelsevis (adv.), by chance

be situated; feel
begdra, lib, to demand, charge inomhus (adv.), indoors
en behandling, -ar, treatment in'se (insep. v., see se), to
betdnka sig (refl. v.), Ha, to see, realize
reflect i stdllet for, instead of

bota, I, to cure leta, I, to search for

dagligen (adv.), daily ndmligen (adv.), namely, that
fort'sdtta (insep. v., see sat- is to say
ta), to continue clyckligtvis, unfortunately
framme (adv.), in front, at proteste'ra, I, to protest
hand rikta, I, to aim, direct
 CONJUNCTIONS. 233

en sjukdom, -ar, sickness d'taga sig (refl. v.), to under-

slutligen, at last, finally take
tveka, I, to hesitate dtininstone, at least
tvars (adv., prep), across ett ogonblick, ,
moment
en utgift, expense
-er, o'verldgga (insep. v., see lag-
en utvag, -ar, expedient ga), to deliberate
vara, I, to last; endure

IDIOMS: 1. att bringa om livet, to deprive of life, to kill.

2. att komma p& en tanke, to hit upon an idea.
3. Har du hdndelsevis sett min ftofcf Do you happen
to have seen my book?
4. langre fram (framdeles), later on.
5. for ogonblicket, for the moment.

LESSON XXXVII.
Conjunctions.

370. There are two general classes of conjunc-

tions: (1) the coordinating conjunctions, which are
used to connect clauses, phrases, and words of equal
rank; (2) the subordinating conjunctions, which
join a dependent clause to some other part of the
sentence.

I. COORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS.
371. The coordinating conjunctions are divided
into two groups: (a) general connectives and (b)
adverbial conjunctions.

(a) General connectives.

The most important of these are :

anting en . . .
eller, either ... or
bade och, both
. . . and . . .

ej heller, nor, neither

eller, or
Swedish Grammar 16
234 CONJUNCTIONS.

icke blott. . .utan dven(ocksd), not only. . .but also

men, but
och, and
samt, and
sdval. .
.som, as well as
ty, for
utan, but (adversative)
varken eller, neither
. . . . . . nor
372. REMARKS ON THE GENERAL CONNECTIVES.
Those of the general connectives which connect
clauses require the normal order (subject before
predicate) with the exception of antingen. .eller, . .

varken. .. .eller and ej heller, which require the

inverted order (predicate before subject) when
they connect clauses: han reste genast, men jag
stannade, he left immediately, but I stayed antingen ;

vet han ingenting, eller vdgar han ingenting saga,

either he knows nothing, -or he dares not say any-
thing.
NOTE. Icke blott... utan tifven may take either word order. The normal is
more common, in which case icke blott and aven are placed within the sentence ;

ifthey stand at the beginning the inverted order must be used: han icke blott
gav miff yoda rad, utan han lanade mig aven penningar, he not only gave me
good advice but he also lent me money ; icke blott gav han mig goda rad,
utan liven lanade han, etc., (aven rarely stands at the beginning). In dependent
clauses the Mormal order is used with antingen. .eller: jag vet inte antingen
.

han kommer eller ej.

373. The following peculiarities in usage should

be noted :

(1) ej heller translates nor when it it not correla-

tive: hem kommer icke, ej heller jag, he does not
come, nor do I.

(2) inverted order when used

eller requires the
with antingen and varken but not as a rule when
used alone.
 CONJUNCTIONS. 235

(3) samt does not connect clauses and is not used

in conversational language.

(4) for often takes the place of ty in conversa-

tion.

(5) utan is used only after a negative and intro-

duces a contrast which excludes or contradicts what
goes before detta dr icke ett skdl, utan en forevdnd-
:

ning, this is not a reason, but a pretext.

374. (b) Adverbial conjunctions. A large num-

ber of conjunctions are adverbs in form, but are
used as conjunctions to connect coordinate clauses.
The most important of these are the following :

alltsd, consequently
annars, otherwise
dels .... dels, partly . .
partly
dock, yet, still
ddrfor, therefore
emellertld, yet, still
icke desto mindre, nevertheless
likvdl, yet, still
ock, also
ocksd, also
sd, so
sdledes, thus
sdlunda, thus
an. .an, now.
. . . . .now
dndock, yet, still
dven, also, even

REMARKS ON THE ADVERBIAL CONJUNCTIONS.

375. The adverbial conjunctions require the in-
verted order: klockan dr dtta, sdledes bo'r han vara
236 EXERCISE.

har snart, it is eight o'clock, consequently he ought

to be here soon.

376. Note the following peculiarities in usage :

(1) Do not confuse the Swedish alltsa with the

English also; the equivalents of also are ock, ocksa,
and dven. Ocksa is more common than ock; when
used as mere adverbs ock and ocksa like English
too often follow the word they modify, while aven
precedes: man har ej hort av honom pa manga ar,
alltsa dr han troligen dod, he has not been heard of
for many years, consequently he is probably dead;
jag ocksa har varit i Paris, I, too, have been in
Paris.

(2) Dock, emellertid, likval, and dndock are often

placed after the subject and the predicate: angrep-
pet var hdftigt, dock (likval, etc.) blev det tillba-
kaslaget (or det blev dock, etc.) the attack was fu-
,

rious, yet it was repulsed. The adverbial conjunc-

tions must be placed after the subject and the pred-
icate when a dependent clause precedes: ehuru han
var ddr, fick jag dock ej tillfdlle att tola vid honom,
although he was there I had no opportunity to speak
to him.
An. .an is equivalent to the English now.
(3) . . .

now or at times. .at times (or alternately.

. . ) . . . :

an grdt hon, an skrattade hon, she laughed and cried

alternately. Quite common in the same sense is
omsom .... o'msom.

EXERCISE XXXVII.
A. 1. Det Jigger ett paket smutsiga starksaker anting-
en i matsalen eller i salongen. Var snail och tag dem
 EXERCISE. 237

till strykinrattningen, Karl. 2. Sag at dem, att bade

1
kragar och skjortor maste vara vita och val strukna, ty
2
de aro mycket vardslosa. 3. Jag later icke hamta tvat-
ten sjalv, utan 3 de maste skicka hem den fore klockan
sex pa onsdag kvall. 4. Herr Sjostedt bad mig halsa och

saga, att antingen kommer han

4
pa slaget fem, eller kom-
mer han icke forran i morgon. 5. Klockan fem? Det
ar bara halv tva nu; da hinner jag icke blott att ga till
barberaren, utan ocksa att utratta ett par arenden. 6. Har
sir en f
risersalong ; ehuru den icke ser fin ut, far jag lik-
val lov 5 att ga in, ty jag har brattom. 7. Jag onskar

att bli bade klippt och rakad, men jag har bratt, alltsa
far ni vara snail och skynda er. 8. Vad felas den har
rocken? Dels 6 saknas ett par knappar, dels
6
har den
gatt upp i sommarna har och myc- dar. 9. Ehuru det ar
7
ket att laga pa den, sa skall jag emellertid forsoka att
fa den fardig till i kvall. 10. Emedan ni lagat rocken sa
val
1
, skall jag ocksa bestalla en ny kostym hos er. Var dar-
for sa god och tag matt pa (of) mig. 11. Jag anvander en-
dast de basta varor och sysselsatter endast de skickligaste
arbetare, salunda kan jag garantera bade tyget och snit-

tet.
Bra and val would here be interchangeable, val denoting a. higher degree
1

of excellence. Bra often has reference to the essential excellence, val, to the
outward: skriva val and skriva bra are not the same, the former refers to form,
the latter to contents. Bra colloquially may have the sense of very (much):
bra mycket, arbeta bra, etc. 2 Note use of later. '373, 5. 4 372. 5
Fd lov,
must. 375. '376, 2.

B. Conversation. 1. Var ligger paketet med starksa-

kerna? 2. Vart vill ni, att Karl skall bara det? 3. Hu-
ru vill ni ha era kragar och skjortor?' 4. Nar maste
tvatten vara fardig? 5. Yarfb'r? 6. Vad later herr Sjo-
stedt halsa ? 7. Vad amnar ni gora under tiden ? 8. Var-
for gar ni in i en f risersalong, som ej ser fin ut? 9. Vad
vill ni ha gjort dar? 10. Vad fattas er rock?
238 VOCABULARY

C. 1. A
boy is here from the laundry and asks for
1

your washing, but we can't find it, therefore I came in

to ask you. 2. It is either on the little table in the dining
room or in the hall. Just 2 wait a little, I shall come
down myself. 3. It is a very poor laundry, they can
neither wash nor iron. Carl is not satisfied with their
work either 3 4. You must not wait for 4 me to call for it
.

12
this time, but send it home on Friday without fail.
5. Neither the collars nor the cuffs were well ironed last

time. Both the washing and the ironing must be bet-

6.

ter next5 time, or 6 I shall send my washing to another

laundry. 7. I don't know his address ; consequently I can't
write to him. 8. My friend writes that he will either come
7
at five o'clock sharp or not at all. 9. Although he will be
here in an hour, yet I shall go to the barber shop. 10. I
need not only a hair cut8 , but also a shave 8 11. I have only .

10
three quarters 9 of an hour to spare , hence you must hurry.
12. The coat was almost worn out; nevertheless he sent it
to the tailor to be mended. 13. Although the coat was al-
11
most worn out, nevertheless he sent it, etc.
1
349, b.
2
369, bara.
3
369, heller; place negative +
adverb after the subject.
'A'a'sia; note definite form of adjective,
4
357, f, 1, 2. (Translate by clause.)
noun is indefinite. What two words translate timef 6 When or equals other-
8
wise, it is translated by annars. ''Precis klockan fern or pa slaget fern. Idioni
9 IO
3. Tre kvarts timme. Use a prepositional phrase. "376, 2. "See 342.

VOCABULARY.
en arbetare, workingman
, fore (prep.), before
an'vanda, lib (impf. anvdn- forrdn' (conj.), before
de), to use garante'ra, I, to guarantee
en barberare, barber , g& upp' (sep.), to go up; rise
bestal'to, lib, to order (sun) ;open
ehuru, although hamta, I, to fetch
felas (dep., intr.), I, to lack, hinna, Tiemn, hunno, hunnit,
to ail -en, -et, to have time; at-
en f riser' salong, -ei; (common- tain, get (to)
ly, rakstuga) ,
barber shop
 CONJUNCTIONS. 239

en kostym', -er, suit, costume stryka, stro'k, stro'ko, stru-

en Jcrage, -ar, collar kit, -en, -et, to iron; erase,
laga, I, to mend; to occasion rub
en manschett', -er, cuff en strykinrattning, -ar, laundry
ett matt, ,
measure (en)strykning, ironing
ned (adv.), down starksaker (pi.), laundry
nojd, nojt, satisfied (linen)
en onsdag, -ar, Wednesday sysselsatta (see satta) , to oc-
ett paket', -er, cupy; to employ
parcel
sakna, I, to miss en som, so'mmar, seam
en salong', -er, drawing room; en tambur', -er, vestibule, hall
auditorium (in a theater) ett tyg, -er, cloth
utsliten, -et, worn out
en skjorta, -or, shirt vara, -or, article; merchandise
smutsig, -t, dirty, soiled v&rdslos, -t, careless
ett snitt, ,
cut ett iirende, -n, errand
IDIOMS: 1. Jag hinner ej att go'ra det, I shall not have time
to do it.

2. Han hann dit i tid, he reached there in time.

3. Jag o'nskar att bli klippt, rakad, 1 wish to have a
hair cut, a shave.
4. Rocken har gdtt upp i sommen, the coat has ripped
in the seam.
5. Darren har gdtt upp, the door has opened.
6. Laga, att ni ar har da, see to it that you are
here then.

LESSON XXXVIII.
Conjunctions (Continued).
II. SUBORDINATING CONJUNTIONS.
377. The most important of these are :

(a) Comparative: ju....desto (dess), the....

the ; som, as sasom, as, such as ; an, than.
;

(b) Concessive: ehuru, fast, fastdn, oaktat,

though, although; om ock, om an, aven om, even if,
even.
240 CONJUNCTIONS.

(c) Causal da, efter, eftersom, since, as emedan,

:
;

because entir, since som, as darfor att, because.

; ; ;

(d) Conditional: bara, if only; if all, in case, if;

om, if, whether.
(e) Consecutive (result) : sa. . .
.att, so. . .
.that;
sa att, so that.
(f) Final: for att, pa det att, in order that; sa
att, so that, in order that; att, that.

(g) Temporal: da, when; forrdn, innan, before;

medan, while; ndr, when; sedan, after; 'sa ofta, as
often as ; sa snart, as soon as ; tills, until.
(h) The general subordinating att, that.

REMARKS ON THE SUBORDINATING CONJUNCTIONS.

378. After a subordinating conjunction many
adverbs (negative adverbs, indefinite temporal ad-
verbs and certain adverbs expressing supposition,
etc.) which in an independent clause follow the sim-
ple predicate or auxiliary must be placed before the
predicate: eftersom han icke kommer, sa fa vi
borja dta utan honom, since he does not come, we
shall have to begin to eat without him; det dr osd-
kert, om vi ndgonsin fa se honom, it is doubtful, if
we ever shall see him; han sade, att han mojligen
skulle kunna lana mig ett par hundra, he said that
he possibly might be able to lend me a couple of hun-
dred.
NOTE.If the independent clause follows, its verb precedes the subject and
is introduced by sd, so: ehuru solen tycktes skina ganska varmt i dag
often
pa formiddagen, sa var luften ratt sval, although the sun seemed to shine
quite warm, the air wag quite cool.

In a subordinate clause the auxiliary hava

379.
isvery often omitted: om han inte slosat bort sina
pengar, sa hade han varit vdlbdrgad nu, if he had
 CONJUNCTIONS. 241

not squandered his money, he would have been in

easy circumstances now.

380. The following will serve to illustrate the

uses of the subordinating conjunctions:

(1) Ju requires the normal order of words, its

correlative desto (dess) the inverted order: ju forr
du go'r det, desto Idttare gar det, the sooner you
do it, the easier it will be (go).

Som may have both a comparative and a caus-

(2)
al value (eftersom is more common in the sense of
since) han gjorde precis som jag, he did exactly
:

as I lika rik som du, as rich as you (sdsom is less

;

common; it is more emphatic than som: sdsom det

nu regnar, har det icke regnat forr i ar, as it now
rains it has not rained before this year) som vddret
;

var tryckande, holl jag mig inne, as the weather was

oppressive, I stayed indoors.

(3) Om ock, om an are often separated if they

stand at the beginning of a clause, ock and an being
placed immediately after the subject: om han an
vore har, sd kunde m
inte gora ndgot, even if he
were here, we could not do anything.
(4) Da and ndr are temporal conjunctions, but
both may, like ivhen in English, have a causal value
(da is more common in the sense of as) when as ;

interrogative nar.

(5) Emedan and endr are used less in the spoken

than in the written language.
Bara=om bara (often om. .bara), if only:
(6) .

om det bara inte regnar, sa skola vi ga, if only it

does not rain, we shall go.
242 EXERCISE.

(7) Om
is also equivalent to whether in an indi-

rect question: jag vet ej, om jag skall stanna eller

ffd, Ido not know whether I shall stay or not. Som
om, as if, as though det ser ut, som om det skulle :

regna, it looks as though it would rain.

(8) Pa det att is less common than the other final
conjunctions sa att always denotes result when used
;

with the indicative han skadade sig, sa att han icke

:

kunde arbeta, he injured himself so that he could

not work. For att with the infinitive is used when
the subject in the purpose clause would be the same
as in the principal one.
(9) Sa ofta, as often as, and sa snart (sa fort),
as soon as, may take som but generally do not: sd
snart han kommer, sand honom hit, as soon as he
comes send him here.
Observe : sd ofta som heist, as often as you please ; sd snart som heist, as
soon as you please ;
ndr som heist, whenever you please.

(10) Att is its usage with the

almost identical in
substantive conjunction Like its English that.
equivalent it is often omitted: jag formodar han
kommer snart, I suppose he will soon be here; jag
tror icke jag kan, I don't believe I am able.
NOTE 1. Subordinate noun clauses introduced by att may be immediately
preceded by a preposition: han har ofveitygat mig om att han menar vpprik-
tigt, he has convinced me that his intentions are sincere endast genom att du ;

kom miff till hjdlp, blev jag rdddad, only by your coming to my assistance I

was saved.
2. Prepositions may also govern other clauses jag tanker pa hur jag skall
:

fa bud till min bror, I am thinking of how I shall get a message to my broth-
er ;jag gldder mig over vad som har hdnt, I rejoice over what has happened.

EXERCISE XXXVIII.
A. En viss person erholl en gang ett tungt brev f ran en
van. Enar brevet ej var frankerat, maste han betala ganska
 EXERCISE. 243

mycket i losen. Da ban oppnade det, fann han ingenting

annat an orden :
"Jag mar alldeles fortraffligt." Mottaga-
ren skrattade och avsande samma dag 1 ett stort paket till
vannen, avenledes utan att frankera det. Adressaten beta-
lade utan att knota den hoga losen i hoppet, att han skulle

genom paketets innehall, sa mycket mer

bli rikligt ersatt

som dess tyngd lat ana nagot vardefullt. Till sin over-

raskning fann han dock intet annat dari an en stor sten

med orden: "Vid underrattelsen att du madde bra, foil
narslutna 2 sten fran mitt hjarta."
2
1
Note use of indefinite form with samma. Narslutna is definite and the noun
indefinite, so innelyckta, inclosed.

B. Conversation. 1. Vad maste man betala, nar ett

brev ar ofullstandigt eller icke alls frankerat? 2. Vad fann
personen i
fraga, nar han oppnade brevet? Vad gjorde han
for att hamnas pa vannen ? 4. Varf or betalade vannen den
hoga losen utan att knota ? 5. Vad var det i all synnerhet,
som kom honom nagot varde-
att tro, att paketet inneholl
fullt? 6. Hur kande han sig vid upptackten av paketets

innehall? 7. Vad hade avsandaren bifogat?

C. Complete the following according to the anecdote

above and the indications given; be especially careful to
get the word order correct. 1. Brevet var ej frankerat,

alltsa
1
. . .
(must pay, etc.). 2. Da han oppnade brevet, . . .

(he found, etc.). 3. Nar en viss person var pa resa, . . .

(he received, etc.). 4. Eftersom han insag, att bans van ve-
lat spela honom ett spratt, . . .
(lie decided, etc). 5. Han
1
onskade att hamnas pa sin van, darfor ... (lie sent, etc.).
6. Emedan han sag, att en van hade sant det tunga brevet,
... (he paid, etc.). 7. Ehuru han sag, att avsandaren ej
var en av bans vanner, andock ... (he paid, etc.). . . .

8. Han
trodde, att paketet inneholl nagot vardefullt, sa
9. Ehuru han van-
mycket mer som. (it was not light).. .
244 EXERCISE.

tat nagot annat, . . . icke desto mindre 3 ... (he did not 'be-

come, astonished). 10. An 1

... (he played) en van ett
spratt, an en annan. 11. Ju 4
tyngre det ar, desto vardeful-
lare . . .
(one believes the contents to be). 12. Den fattige
mannen her om brb'd, ty 5 ... (he is hungry). 13. Han

sade, att (he knew nothing).

... 14. Ju fb'rr ... (he
4
fortare... (we shall be ready).
conies), desto 15. Yara

kusiner komma icke att besoka oss i bb'rjan pa juli . . .

(but) i slutet av September i stallet. Jag tordes ej

16.
vanda mig till honom, enar ... (I had never seen him
before).
WS. 378, note. 376, 2. 379, 7. *372.

D. 1. As soon as 1 the tailor comes, please 2 send him up

3
to me. 2. I have sent for you because my friends have rec-

ommended you to me so often. 3. If you have samples of

cloth that I like 4 , I may order
5
a suit. 4. The finer and
more durable the cloth is, the better, even if it should cost
a little more. 5. As the suit now is, it does not please me,
6
(but ) you will have to change it. 6. Don't you see that
the coat altogether too tight under the arms; besides it
is

does not fit me very well in the back. 7. You must hurry
and change that you can send it home on 7 Friday,
it so

8. He did his
8
for I shall leave the city on Saturday.
work so well that all were pleased 9 with it. 9. Since you
went away yesterday, he has done nothing but play 10 .

10. Since you cannot do it, you must let me try. 11. As

long as
11
it rains, we cannot go out. 12. The boys had seat-
ed themselves at the table in order to 12 study. 13. We have
not gone away, nor 13 shall we. 14. He does not believe what
you say, nor I either 13 . 15. The dearer the food is and the
colder the weather, the more the poor suffer. 16. He went
out of the house without saying 14 a word. 17. Have }ou
 VOCABULAKY. 245
15
thought of how we can help him? 18. I have no confi-
dence in 15 what he does.
1
380, Far god och. Give at least three equivalents for the English
9. 2

please. *Tycka om can be used in the sense of like about both ani-
"349, b.
mate and inanimate objects alska, to love, generally only about animate ob-
;

jects (also about objects like home, fatherland, ete.) hdlla av, to cherish af- :

fection for, only about animate objects. "Use present of verb with kanhdnda,
perhaps. "373, 5. 'Either pa or om. What form does pa require? What,
omf (See 342 and note 1.) 'Either of the three equivalents for the future
will do here. Which are they ? 9Nojda or belatna. "Swedish uses the supine
instead of the infinitive. "In analogy with as soon as, 380, 9. 12 380, 8. 18 369,
heller, and 373, 1. "Use infinitive. 15 380, 10, note 2.

VOCABULARY.
ana, to have a presentiment narsluten, -et, inclosed
arm, -ar, arm passa, I, to suit, fit

av' siinda, sanda av', to send, ett prov, -er, sample; test
dispatch (Pi. )

beldten, -et, satisfied riklig, -t, abundant

er'hdlla (insep.), to receive sitta, satt, sutto, suttit, to
er'satta (insep.), to compen- sit; fit

sate; take the place of ett spratt, , trick

fattig, -t, poor trdng, -t, narrow, tight
fin, -t, fine tvng, -t, heavy
ett fortro'ende, -n, confidence toras, tordes, torts, to dare
Jiamnas (dep.), I, to take en underrattelse, -r, informa-
revenge tion
ett innehdll, ,
content (s) varaTctig, -t, durable
knota, I, to grumble vardefull, -t, valuable
leka, Ha, to play dndra, I, to change
lida, led, ledo, lidit, -en, -et, dvenledes, likewise
to suffer o'verrasfcad, -at, surprised
en mottagare, , recipient o'verraskning, -ar, surprise

IDIOMS: 1. ingenting annat an, ingen annan an, nothing but,

no one but.
2. att hamnas pd ndgon, to revenge oneself upon
somebody.
3. att lata ana, to indicate.
 LESSON XXXIX.
Interjections.

381. The most common interjections are:

ack! alas! oh! hysch! hush!

ah! aha! ah! klatsch! crack!
aj! ouch! kras! smash!
fy! shame! whew! kratsch! crash!
7m/ ha! o/oh!0!
halld! hello! ojl ouch!
hejl hey! paff! pang! bang!
hejsan! heigh-ho! plask! splash!
hm! hm! ptro! whoa!
hurra! hurrah! puh! usch! whew!
hu! whew! ve! woe!
NOTE 1. A number of other words and expressions are also used as inter-
jections, such as ffott Igood halt
! ! halt ! hell ! hail !
hjdlp ! help ! Se dtir !

look! Se upp ! look out! Vdlan' ! very well! etc.

2. Aj is the usual interjection to express pain. Usch expresses disgust ;

hu, horror, puh, oppression and discomfort, fy, reprimand and disgust. These
interjections are often followed by da: usch da t fy da!

382. The affirmatives ja and

jo, yes, and the
negative nej, no, may
be classed as interjections.
Jo is used in answer to a negative question or in
answer to a question or statement implying doubt:
(1) Kommer han snart? Ja, det gb'r han. Will
he come soon? Yes, he will.
(2)Du har val icke tid nu? Jo, det har jag visst.
I don't suppose you have time now? Yes, certainly
I have.

(3) Ska vi fara (doubt) ? Jo visst! Shall we go?

Certainly !

NOTE. Ja and jo are often strengthened by the addition of da and visst:

ja visst, jo visst, certainly, yes ; jo da, why, yes. Ja may sometimes be rendered
by well: ja, har jag inte sagt dig detf Well, haven't I told you so.
 INTERJECTIONS. 247

383. Jasd, an interjection extensively used in

Swedish, is made to express almost any emotion,
as joy, sorrow, anger, menace, etc. It may be ren-
dered by so, oh! is that so? ivell, you don't say! etc.

384. Nej is often strengthened by da, visst inte

or inte alls: Nej da, no indeed; nej visst inte, cer-
tainly not; nej, inte alls, not at all. It has other
idiomatic uses: Nej, vad sdger du? You don't say!
Nej, se ddr! Why, just look! Nej, sa vackert! How
beautiful !
 APPENDIX.

The Use of the Articles.

1. Some of the most important uses of the articles have

been given already. The following summary may be useful.

THE DEFINITE ARTICLE.

The definite postpositive article is used:

(a) With abstract nouns, nouns of material and class: leve

friheten, long live freedom; guldet dr ej sd nyttigt som jdrnet,
gold is not as useful as iron; mdnniskan dr sJcapelsens krona,
man is the crown of creation.
NOTE. The article is omitted when the noun is not used in an absolutely
general way: han har guld, he has gold (partitive).

Cb) With names of seasons and days of the. week: sommaren

dr slut, summer is ended; om vdren, in the spring; pd mdnda-
gen, on Monday.
Note omission of article in expressions like om mdndag.
next Monday.
(c) With many names of rivers, lakes, oceans, mountains:
Ofre sjon, Lake Superior; Osiers jon, the Baltic; Klippiga Ber-
gen, the Rocky Mountains.
(d) With names of streets: Linnegatan, Linng Street; Oden-
gatan, Oden Street.
(e) With names of places of public and official resort: i
kyrkan, in or to church; i skolan, at (in) or to school; infor
ratten, in court.

(f) In a distributive sense where English uses the indefinite

article. In temporal expressions the noun is preceded by a
preposition, generally i or om: tvd Jcronor metern, two crowns
a meter; hundra Jcronor i veckan, a hundred crowns a week;
tvd gdnger om dret, twice a year.
(g) Instead of possessive adjective, see 178.
 APPENDIX. 249

(h) With titles used alone in address: vill doktorn vara sd

god och komma? Please come, doctor; har kyrkoherden trdffat
honomf Have you met him, rector? (See 142.)
2. The definite postpositive article is omitted:
(a) With nouns used as partitives (some, any) or as &
simple predicate: har ni pengarf Do you have money? But
penningen (general) dr upphovet till mycket ont, money is

the cause of much evil.

Cb) After samme, same: samme gosse, som m sago i gat,
the same boy that we saw yesterday.
3. The prepositive article is as a rule used in connection
with the postpositive article when the noun is preceded by
an adjective. It may be omitted in a few instances (cf. tht
remarks on the prepositive article, 126, 2).

THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

4. ft thus appears that the definite article is used more

widely than in English. On the other hand the indefinite
article is more frequently omitted:

(a) Before an unmodified noun denoting vocation, rank

character, station in life, used alone, or connected by som,
in the former case also before a noun denoting nationality.
han dr soldat, he is a soldier; han talade som soldat och ej
som statsman; he spoke as a soldier and not as a statesman.
But we must say: han ar en tapper soldat, he is a brave
s. oldier.
NOTE.If the noun and modifier form a set phrase the indefinite article is

omitted han ar svensk sprdklarare, he is a teacher of Swedish

: han ar
; e><

svensk sprdkldrare would mean he is a Swedish teacher of langiiages han ; a,

kungligt rad, he is a royal councilor.

(b) Often in phrases: i hast, in haste, in a hurry; me&

grdtande stamma, in a tearful voice; med darrande hand.
with a trembling hand; jag har huvudvdrk, tandvdrk, etc.,
I have a headache, toothache; jag har fdtt svar, I have re-

ceived an answer, etc.

Note such forms as nagra fd, a few; mdngen, -et, many a;

(c)
en sddan,ett sddant, such a; vilken, -et, what a; vilken man
han dr! What a man he is!

Sivedish Grammar. 17
350 APPENDIX.

Rules of Gender.
REMARK. Only the rules for determining the neuter gender
are given. In regard to masculine and feminine nouns it
will suffice to say that sex names follow the sex male names
being masculine, female names, feminine. Originally masculine
or feminine names of inanimate objects or abstracts are now
classed as common gender (Swedish realgenus or den-genus).

5. Neuter are:
(a) Almost all names of continents, countries, places,
metals, letters of the alphabet, and all words not real sub-
stantives but used as such: det mdktiga Amerika, the powerful
America; det vackra Stockholm, the beautiful Stockholm;
jdrnet, the iron; det sko'na, the beautiful.

(b) Verbal abstracts of the same form as the verb after

dropping the infinitive ending -a, with or without change of
vowel: fallet, the fall; kallet, the calling; skriket, the cry;
derived from falla, kalla, skrika.
Nouns ending in
(c) -a (pi. -n), -an (in concrete nouns),
ande ende at dome
1
,
1
,
1
,
1
, -e (pi. -n), -el and -er (plur.=sing)
!
,

2
eri, -ment, -on, -skap (plur.=sing.) , -um, -eum, -turn.
J
In abstract nouns. 2
Other\vise common gender.

Note* on Inflection of Nouns.

VOWEL MODIFICATION IN THE PLURAL.
6. The following nouns modify the vowel in the plural,
some also double the final consonant:

en and, Under, duck en man, man (manner) man

en bok, bocker, book en moder, modrar, mother
en bot, boter, fine en mus, moss, mouse
en brand, Grander, fire-brand en natt, natter, night
en broder, broder, brother en rand, rander, border
en dotter, dottrar, daughter en rot, rotter, root
en fader, fader, father en son, soner, son
en fot, fotter, foot en spdng, spanger, foot-bridge
en gd$, gdss, goose en stad, stader, city
en hand, hdnder, hand en stav, staver, stave
en ledamot, ledamoter, member en stang. sttinger, pole
en ZMS, loss, louse en tdng, tiinger, pincers
 APPENDIX. 251

DOUBLE PLURALS.
7. Some nouns have double plurals, corresponding to dif-
ferent senses of the singular:

en bors, borsar, purses borser, bourses

en form, formar, molds former, shapes
en gang, gdngar, paths gdnger, times
en stav, stavar, staffs staver, staves

SINGULAR LACKING.
8. Some nouns occur only in the plural, the following being
the most important:

FIRST DECLENSION.
anor, pedigree snubbor, scolding
bannor, scolding sndsor, snubbing
hdvor, goods, gifts sddor, chaff
inalvor, entrails dthdvor, gestures, manners

SECOND DECLENSION.
furaldrar, parents vagnar, behalf; pd (d) ndgons
goddagar, easy life vagnar, in behalf of somebody

THIRD DECLENSION.
annaler, annals ranker, intrigues
ferier, vacation skrofler, scrofula
flnanser, finances specerier, groceries
gronsaker, vegetables umgalder, dues
musikalier, music (written) utskylder, taxes

DOUBLE GENDER.
9. Some nouns may have either common or neuter gender:
the most important of these are:

blod, blood ndbb, beak, bill

bolster, bolster paraply', umbrella

borr, drill parasoll', parasol
brarn, border, trimming redskap-, utensil, tool
doft, fragrance snitt, cut
252 Al'PENDlX.
1
finger finger , span, shaving
musslin', muslin tack, thanks
'Generally fingrar in the plural.
2
Always common gender when used in a
collective sense redskapen, the utensils.
:

Irregularities in Conversational Pronunciation.

10. Conversational Swedish presents many peculiarities

in pronunciation, among which are the following:
(a) The words mig, dig, sig, and saga are practically always
pronounced as if written maj, ddj, saj, and saja.
(l>) Det often drops the t in pronunciation. Colloquially
dem is always pronounced as if written dom. In certain parts
of Sweden, especially in Stockholm, dom is used for de. An-
other common colloquial form for de is di.
(c) Adjectives ending in -ig generally drop g before the
neuter -t in pronunciation: tro'ligt, probable, pronounced
tro'litt; ste'nigt, stony, ste'nitt, etc.

(d) Ar and aro, is, are, are often pronounced o or e.

(e) Och is generally pronounced d, so is also att when it is

the sign of the infinitive: jag skulle tycka om att (d) traffa
honom, I should like to see him.
(f) Vad very often drops d in conversation: Va(d) fbe)falls?
I beg your pardon, what did you say? Va(d) menar duf What
do you mean?
-t in the supine of verbs of the Fourth Conjugation
(g) Final
is dropped in conversation in many parts of Sweden: tagi
(hard or soft g) for tagit, skrivi for skrivit. So also final -t in
mycket and litet.
(h) Skall is generally pronounced ska; taga, bliva, draga,
hava, 'bedja giva are generally shortened to ta, Wi, dra, ha,
be, ge.
(i) Verbs of the First Conjugation often drop the ending -de
of the past tense in conversation: jag tala med honom i gdr,
I spoke to him yesterday.
(j) There are a number of familiar words which are
softened in conversation by the dropping or assimilation of
a consonant: tradgdrd, garden, tragg&rd; gastgivare, inn-
keeper, where stg^= sJi.
 APPENDIX. 2o:>

(Jc) The plural ending -or of the First Declension is often

pronounced ~er: vecka(or), vecker.

(I) For enclitic pronouns 'en, 'et ('t), and -na, see 140, c.

Irregularities in Conversational Grammar.

11. The most common grammatical irregularities met with
in the spoken language are here noted:
(a) The singular of a verb regularly takes the place of the
plural in conversation.
(~b) Neuters of the Fifth Declension take -ena in the def.
form of the plural instead of -en, thus becoming like nouns
of the Fourth Declension: hus-ena, the houses; namn-ena, the
names.
(c) Gender nouns ending in -n preceded by a vowel often
have the definite form the same as the indefinite: han stfir
pa grdsplanen (pronounced grasplan), he stands on the lawn;
fageln sitter pd grenen (pronounced gren), the bird sits on
the branch.
 STRONG AND IRREGULAR VERBS.
INFINITIVE
 Al'I'KNDIX. 255
beta, be named
25G

sjunka, sink
 APPENDIX. 257

tvi, wash
 VOCABULARY.
SWEDISH-ENGLISH.
In the vocabulary, only the gender of neuter nouns is designated ; all nouns
not marked (n.) are gender nouns. For the principal parts of irregular and
strong verbs the list on page 254 should be consulted. Parts of speech are
designated only in cases of ambiguity.

anliigga, irr. v., found, estab-

lish
abborre, -ar, perch
anliinda, lib, arrive
adde'ra, I, add
anse, irr. v., regard, consider,
adjo', good-bye think
adress', -er, address ansikte (n.), -n, face
adresse'ra, I, address anslag (n.), , plot, design;
adressat', -er, addressee placard, notice
business; store
affur', -er, anvdnda, lib, use
affdrsbyggnad, -er, business ana, I, suspect;
anticipate
building annars, otherwise
aga, I, punish annons' (annongs'), -er, ad-
akt (invar.), notice vertisement
alldeles, entirely, quite apote'kare, , druggist
alle'na (gen. def.), alone apt it', appetite
allmdnhet, public; i , in arbeta, I, work
general arbetare, workingman
,

alls, at all arm, -ar, arm

alltid, always arreste'ra, I, arrest
alltsd, consequently, thus, so artig, polite
allvarlig, sober, grave, serious att, conj., that; to (infinitive
allvarligt, adv., seriously sign)
amerikan', -er, American auditorium (n.),-ier, audience
an-, accented var. prefix automobil', -er, automobile
anblick, -ar, sight, spectacle automobilforbindelse, -r, con-
anfortro, III, intrust nection by automobile
angendm, agreeable, pleasant av, prep, and accented vari-
anhd.Ua, st. v., request able prefix, of, by, from, etc.
ankare (n-* -^, anchor avbryta, st. v., insep., inter-
ankomma, st. v., arrive rupt; sep., break off
 VOCABULARY. 250

avgd, irr. v., sep., depart belopp (n.), , amount

avlfigsna (sig), I, remove; refl., beldten, -et, def. -lutna, satis-
go away. fied

avliJpa, lib,turn out beliist, well-read

avsiinda, lib, sep., send away, beldpa sig (till), I la, amount
dispatch to
avundsjuk, envious bemdktiga sig, I, take posses-
sion of
B bemota, Ha, treat; receive
back ben (n.), bone, leg
backa, I,
,

bad (n.), bath berg (n.), ,

mountain
,

beratta, I, relate
badort, -er, watering place
baka, I, bake beromd, n. -romt, famous
bagare, ,
baker beromma, lib, praise
background bestd, irr. v., exist; stand (a
bakgrund, -er,

bakllinges, backwards test); treat; av, consist

of
bakom, behind
bank, -er, bank bestdlla, lib, order

bara, only besdttning, -ar, crew

besok (n.), visit
barmhar'tig, merciful ,

barn (n.), child ,

besoka, Ha, visit
be-, unaccented insep. prefix betala, I, Ha, pay
bedja (om), irr., pray, ask for
betjaning, no pi., servants,
attendance
bedraga, st. v., cheat, deceive
command betraktande (n.), considera
befalla, lib,
st. be (health tion taga i take into
beftnna sig,
; ,
v.,

and place) betyda, lib, mean, signify

befolkning, population betunka, Ha, consider, delib-

-ar,
erate; sig, reflect
begara, lib, demand, request
bevista, attend
begaran, no pi., demand I,

behaga, I, please bifall applause

(n.),
"auto"
behandling, -ar, treatment bil, -ar,

behdlla, st. v., keep, retain bildad, n. -at, cultured

behova, lib, need bildning, culture, education

biljett'kontor' (n.), ticket of-
bekant, known, acquainted;
fice
en an acquaintance
,

piece
bekvam, comfortable, conven- bit, -ar,

ient bita, st. v., bite

bekvdmlighet, -er, comfort, bjudning,- ar, invitation, party

convenience blank, smooth, shiny, glossy
3GO VOCABULARY.
bliva, st. v., become; remain, bdra, st. v., carry
be (aux. of passive) biirare, , porter
olixtra, I, lighten bust, best
Momma, -or,flower borja, I, begin
blom'sterrabatt', -er, flower borjan (no. pi.), beginning
bed
C
blott,only
blygsam, def. -samma, modest ceremoni', -er, ceremony
blow cigarr', -er, cigar
bldsa, Ila,
black (n.), ink cigarrhandel, cigar store
cigarr Jiandlare, cigar dealer
bo, III, dwell, live
,

boJc, bo'cker, book D

bonde, bonder, peasant, farmer dag, -ar, day
bord (n.), ,
table daglig (adj.), daily
borsta, I, brush aagngen (adv.), daily
bort, away dagsljus (n.), daylight
borta, away from home; dar- dal, -ar, valley
, over there dam, -er, lady
bostad, -stdder, dwelling, date'ra, I, date
residence datum (n.), data, date
bota, I, heal, cure del, -ar, part
bra (adj. and adv.), good, fine; deltaga, st. v., sep., participate
well, quite den(pron.), that, it; (art.) the
bredvid', by, at the side of dessutom, besides, in addition
brev (n.), letter det (pron.), it; (art.) the
brevbarare, ,
letter carrier dikt, -er, poem
brodd, sprout direkt', direct
broder, bro'der, brother disk, -ar, counter; dish
bruka, I, use dit, thither
bryta av', st. v., break off diver''se (pi. only), diverse
brddska, hurry divide'ra, I, divide
brdk (n.), trouble; frac- , doktor, dokto'rer, doctor
tions (math.) dotter, dottrar, daughter
bras pd, take after, favor dram, -er, drama
brdtt, brdttom, ha be in -a , drama (n., no plur.), drama
hurry dricka, st. v., drink
brod (n.), ,
bread drickspengar (pi. only), tip(s)
by, -ar, village droska, -or, cab
bygga, lib, build droja, lib, delay, take (time)
bdde. .och, both.
. . .and drojsmdl (n.), , delay
 VOCABULARY.

duell', -er, duel episk, epic

duka, I, set the table er-, accented insep. prefix
dum, def. dumma, stupid, erbjuda, st. v., offer
foolish erfarenhet, -er, experience
dumbom, -bommar, fool erhdlla, st. v., receive, get
dussin (n.), dozen , erinra, I, remind; sig,
dyrbar, expensive, precious remember
dalig, poor, bad, wicked ersatta, irr. v., to replace,
ddr, there compensate
durbar over there
1

ta, europe'isk, European

darhem'ma, at home exporte'ra, I, export
darpd, thereafter, thereupon,
on it (them)
do, irr. v., die fabrik', -er, factory
dod, dott (adj.), dead fader (far), fader, father
dod, (-or), death familjefest, -er, family festival
doda, I, kill familj', -er, family
dorr, -ar, door fara, st. v., travel, drive, go
fara med', go along (drive,
travel )
cfter, prep., adv., and accented farbror, -bro'der, uncle
variable prefix, after fartyg, ship, vessel
,

efterkomma, st. v., comply fast, n. fast, firm, solid, fast

with, komma efter, come fast (conj.), although
after fattas, I, dep. impers. v., lack,
eftermiddag, afternoon;
-ar, ail; vad digf What is

i , this afternoon ailing you?

ehuru, although fattig, poor
ej, not fel (n.), , error, mistake
ekono'misk, financial felas, I, dep. impers. v., lack
eld, -ar, fire, conflagration ferier (pi.), vacation
elegans' (elegangs'), elegance fin. nice, fine, delicate
elektrisk, electrical finna, st. v., find; det ftnns,
emedan, because there is (are)
emot (prep, and adv.), against, fira, I, celebrate
opposite firande (n.), celebration
en, ett, a, an, one fisk, -ar, fish

endast, only flagga, -or, flag; hissa flaggan,

en rat; everybody hoist the flag
enligt, according to Here, several, more
262 VOCABULARY.

flicka, -or, girl /riser' salong, -er, barber shop

flitig, diligent frisk, fresh, healthy
flod, -er, river fru, -ar, lady, wife, Mrs.
fly, III, flee frukost (pronounced fruc'-
flyta, st. v., flow kost), -ar, breakfast
flytande, indecl., flowing, fluent frukt, -er, also collective pi.,

flytta, I, move frukt, fruit

folk (n), people, nation;
, frysa, st. v., freeze
also collectively, people frysa bort', perish by frost
folkskola, -or, public school fryspunkt, -er, freezing point
forsla, haul frdga (efter), I, ask a ques-
fort (adv.), fast, quickly tion, inquire
fortsatta, irr. v., continue jran, prep., adv. and accented
fot, fotter, foot variable prefix, from
fotbollag (n.), , football frammande, n., strange, ,

team foreign, ha , have com-

fotbollspel (n.), or -match, , pany
-er, football game framst, foremost, first

fram, adv. and accented var. fullpackad, n. -at, crowded

prefix, forth, forward fullsatt, n. ,
crowded
framdeles, in the future, later fylla, lib, fill; Ar, have a
framme (adv.), at destination, birthday
at hand fyrtio, forty
framracka, or rdcka fram', fa, irr. v. (modal), get, re-

reach forth, hold out ceive ; may

framstfiende, indecl., promi- fdgel, fdglar, bird
nent fait (n.), ,
field

framtid, future fdrdig, ready

franke'ra, I, stamp (put on fdsta, I and Ila, fasten
stamp) fodas, lib, dep. v., be born
Frankrike (n.), France fodelsedag, -ar, birthday; till
Frans, Francis, Frank fddelsedagen, for a birthday
fransk, French; franska, folja, lib, follow
French language folja med', accompany
fri, fritt, free foljaktligen, consequently
frikopa, sep., v., ransom, re- foljande, n. , following
deem fonster (n.), , window
friluftsmuseum (n.), -er, open for (prep.), for, before
air museum for. . .sedan, ago
frimarke (n.), -n, stamp
 VOCABULARY.

for (adv.), too; mycket, forlora, I, lose

too much
formak (n.), , parlor
for-, accented insep. prefix,
formiddag, -ar, forenoon; pd
before
formiddagen, in the fore-
for-, unaccented insep. prefix noon
forarglig, annoying, vexatious
formoda, I, suppose
forbindelse, -r, connection; ob-
formd, III, intr., be able; tr.,
ligation induce
fiirbjuden, n. -bjudet, def.
forolyckas, I, dep. v., perish
bjudna, prohibited
for'orsaka, I, cause, occasion
fordraga, st. v., tolerate;
forr (adv.), before
varandra, bear with one an-
other forre(a), former
forran before, until
fore, prep., adv., and accented (conj.),
var. prefix, usually insep., forsena, I, cause to be late,

before, first, ahead delay

foredrag (n.), , lecture forsiktig, cautious
foredraga, st. v., prefer forskotte'ra, I, advance
forelasning, -ar, lecture (money)
forening, -ar, union, society forslag (n.), , proposition
foreskriva, st. v., dictate, pre- forsona, I, reconcile; refl. v.,

scribe become reconciled

fore-Sid-, st. v., propose forsova, st. v., oversleep
forestallning, -ar, performance forst, first
foretaga (sig) st. v undertake
, forstad, -stader, suburb
forfattare, author, forstd, irr. v., understand
forfiirlig, terrible forstdndig, wise, sensible
forfolja, lib, pursue fiirstora, lib, destroy
furgifta, I, poison forsumma, I, neglect, miss
forhindra I, prevent (train, meal, etc.)
forhdllande (n.), -n, relation, forsoka, Ha, try
condition; i till, relative fortjusande, n. charming ,

to fortjdna, I, also Ila, earn

forklada (sig), lib, disguise fortrdfflig, excellent
(oneself) forvandla, I, change, trans-
forkyla sig, lib, catch cold form
forkyld, n. -kylt, having a cold forvdnas, I, dep. v., to be as-

forkylning, -ar, cold (sick- tonished

ness) fordldrar, pi. only, parents
264 VOCABULARY.

gang, -er, time (in counting) ;

en , once
gammal, def. gamla, old
gang, -ar, walk, path
ganska, quite, entirely
gdr, i gdr, yesterday
garante'ra, I, guarantee
gdrdag, yesterday
gata, -or, street
gds, gdss, goose
gen (adj.), near (of a road) have a
galla, lib, concern;
genast, immediately value; be a question of
genom or ige'nom (prep, and gdst, -er, guest
adv.), through; as adverb gora (irr. v.), do, make
it has the form igenom Goto, kanal,Gotha Canal
giva, st. v., give; akt' pd, Goteborg (n.), Gothenburg
notice, observe
glad, n. glatt, glad, happy H
glas (n.), , glass
glasogon, pi., spectacles hals, -ar, neck, throat
glida, st. v., glide Jialv, half
glddja, irr. v., gladden halvtimme, -ar, half hour
gladje, no joy pi., half-sole
halvsula, I,
glomma, lib, forget halvvags (adv.), halfway
golv (n.), floor ,
hamn, -ar, harbor, port
gosse, gossar, boy
han, he
grad, -er, grade, degree; i
hand, hander, hand
ho'gsta , in the highest
handbagage, hand baggage
degree
handla, I, act, trade; om,
gren, -ar, branch
treat about
gro, III, sprout
wholesale handlande, merchant
grosshandlare, ,
,

merchant harv, -ar, harrow

grata, st. v., weep, cry hastig, quick, rapid, sudden
grds (n.), grass hatt, -ar, hat
grasmatta, -or, lawn havre (n.), oats
gron, green hedersman, -man, man of

gronsaker, pi. only, vegetables honor

gul, yellow hcl, n. -t, whole; en , a unit
gunga, I, rock, swing helgdag, -ar, holiday
gd, irr. go, run; det gar
v., hellre, rather
icke, itwon't work klockan ;
hem (n.), home
gdr, the watch is running hem (adv.), home; gd , go
gd upp', rise home
 VOCABULARY. 265

hemifrdn, from home haftig, violent, vehement

hemma, at home hiilft, (noun), half
-er
hemtrevlig, cozy, homelike halsa, health
Jiennes, her, gen. case halsa, I, greet
herr, Mister, in address Ml'sa pd, greet
herre, -ar, master, gentleman halsa pd' (hos), make a call
heta, irr. v., to be called; jag (at somebody's home)
Jieter Karl, my name is Carl halsning, -ar, greeting
hinna, st. v., attain; have time hamnas, I, dep. v., take re-
to do or get to venge
historia, -ier, history, story hamta, I, fetch
hitta, I, to find Mnda, lib, happen
hjalp, help handelse, -r, event
Jijalpa, Ha, help hdndelsevis (adv.), by chance
hjarta (n.), -n, heart htinga, lib, hang
hjartforlamning, -ar, heart hanseende (n.), -n, respect
failure Mr, here
hjartlig, hearty, cordial harlig. glorious, magnificent
hon, she hast, -ar, horse
hopp (n.), , hope hog, high
hoppa, I, jump hoger, def. hogra, right; till

hoppas, I, dep. v., to hope to the right

,

hos, with, by, in, in the house hojd, -er, height, hill
of hons (n.), , chicken, col-
honorar' (n.), , fee chickens
lective,
hotelV (n.), , hotel hora, lib, hear
hund, -ar, dog hora pd, listen to ho'r pd mig, ;

hungrig, hungry listen to me

hur, how horn (n.), ,
corner
hus (n.), , house host, -ar, fall; i hostas, last
hustru, -r, wife fall

huvudvark, headache hostdag, -ar, autumn day

hygglig, nice, "kind, accommo- hovlig, polite
dating hovlighet, politeness
hyra, lib, rent, hire
Mlla, st. v., hold, keep I

Mil (n.), , hold; direction;

dt alia , in all directions i (prep.), in, into
Mr (n.), ,
hair i'akttaga, st. v., observe
hard,, n. Mrt, hard ibland', sometimes
Sicedish Grammar IS
266 VOCABULARY.

i'drott, -er, sport intyg (n.), , testimonial

idrottspark, -er, athletic field invdnare, , inhabitant
igen', adv. and accented var. is, -ar, Ice
prefix, again, back Ita'lien (n.), Italy
igenMnna, lib, sep. v., recog-
nize
i'hdliff, hollow
ja, yes
ilia (adv.), bad; det var ilia,
that was too bad jasd (pronounced jas'sd), so;

illuminated
you don't say! Is that so?
illumine'rad, -at,
and accented jo, yes
in, prep., adv.,
ju, the (with the compara-
var. prefix, in, into
tive), you "know, to be sure
inackordering, -ar, boarder,
also room jul, Christmas; vid
-ar, ,
board; Jiel ,

at Christmas; till for

and board ,

Christmas
inbegripa, st. v., include
just, just
infinna sig, st. v., to come,
arrive juste'ra, I, adjust
jdmrande, n., plaintive
ingen, intet, or inget, no, no
,

jdrnvdgs'biljett, -er, railway

one, nothing
ticket
inledp (n.), , purchase
to
jdrnvdgsolycJca, -or, railway
inlosa, Ila, sep., redeem,
* accident
cash
innan (conj.), before jdrnvdgsstation, -er, railway
station
inne (adv.), inside
inne-, accented var. prefix
innehdll (n.), , contents K
innehdlla, st. v., contain kaffe (n.), coffee
innestd, irr. v., remain (mon- kaj, -er, quay, pier
ey in a bank) kail, cold
inom (prep.), within kallna, I, grow cold
inomhus (adv.), indoors kalla, I, call

insiitta, irr. sep. v., deposit kamma, I, comb

inse, irr. v., to see, under- kanhdn'da, perhaps
stand kan'ske, perhaps
inte, not kappa, -or, cloak
intet, n. of ingen, no, nothing karaktdr', -er, character
intresse'rad, n. -at, interested kapten', -er, captain
intrcssant', n. , interesting kasta, throwI,

intres'se (n.), -n, interest kasta ut', throw out

 VOCABULARY.

katedral', -er, cathedral kort (o short and open), n.

katt, -er, cat , short

kilo, kilogram (n.), , kilo kosta, I, cost
gram kostym', -er, suit
kilome'ter, , kilometer kraft, -er, strength, power
klack, -ar, heel (of shoe) krage, -ar, collar
klaga (over), I, complain kredit'brev (n.), , letter of
klandra, I, criticise credit
Jclar, clear krets, -ar, circle, society
klass, -er, class krok, -ar, hook
klassisk, classic Arena, -or, crown
klen, weak kroppskonstitution, -er, con-
klimat' (n.), climate , stitution (of body)
klippa, Ha, cut, shear kulle, -ar, hill
kldda, lib, dress kunna, know; (modal) can,
kldda sig, dress (oneself) be able
kldda om' sig, change dress Kungsgatan, King's Street
kldder, pi. only, clothes kupe, -er, compartment (rail-
knacka, I, knock; pd dor- way)
ren, knock at the door Tcusin' -er, cousin
knappast, hardly kusk, -ar, driver, cabman
knappndl, -ar, pin kvalitet', -er, quality
knota (over), I, grumble kvar, adv. and accented var.
koffert, -ar, trunk prefix, left over, behind, re-
koka, I, cook, boil maining
kollide'ra, I, collide kvarlamna, I, sep., leave be-
komma, st. v., come hind
komma in', come in kvarn, -ar, flour mill
konduktor', -er, conductor Kvart, quarter; en kvarts
-er,

konsert', r er, concert timme, a quarter of an hour

konst, -er, art; pi. tricks kvdll, -ar, evening; i gar ,

konstndr', -er, artist last night; pd kvdllen, in

kontant, n. cash , the evening
kontor (n.), office , kyckling, -ar, young chicken
kopp, -ar, cup kylig, chilly
korg, -ar, basket kyrka, -or, church
korrespondent' ', -er, corre- kdmpa ut', I, fight to a finish ;

spondent die
kort (o long and close) (n.), kdnna, lib, know (acquainted
, card with)
 268 VOCABULARY.

klinna till', be acquainted londondngare, ,

London
with steamer
kdrlek, love lov (n.), permission; vacation
kold (n.), cold (from school); fd lov, may
kopa, I la, buy have to
kora, lib, drive lova, I, promise; praise
lugn (adj.), calm, quiet
lycka, happiness, fortune
lyckad, n. -at, successful
laga, mend; bring to pass
I, lyckas, I, dep. v., succeed
lammstek, -or, lamb steak lycklig, happy
land, lander, country; pd lan-
lyda. lib, obey
det, in the country; i land, lynne (n.), -n, humor; via
ashore gott good humor
, in
landskap (n.), , landscape Idda, -or, box, drawer
landsatta, irr. v., land Una, I, lend; borrow
lantstalle (n.), -n, country Idng, long
house Idngsam, def. -samma, slow
lantbrukare, , farmer Idsa, I la, lock
last, -er, load; vice Idta, st. v., let, allow; cause
lot, no neuter, lazy to do or be done
le, irr. v., smile lagenhet, -er, opportunity
leda, lib, lead Idgga bort', put away
irr. v.,

ledsen, n. ledset, def. ledsna, lakare, physician ,

sad, sorry Idmna, I, leave

lek, -or, play, game lange (adv.), long
Zefca, Ha, play Idngre, comp. of Idng, lange,
leva, irr. v., live longer
lida, st. v., suffer Idra, lib, teach; learn
ligga, irr. v., lie Idrare, , teacher
/ifc (adj.), like, alike lard,' n. Idrt, learned
lika (adv.), (just) as Idrjunge, -ar, pupil
liten, n. litet, def. lilla, pi. Idsa, Ila, read
sra4, little, small Idsa upp', also upp'ldsa, recite
litteratur, -er. literature Idsebok, -bocker, reader
ttv (n.), , life Idxa, -or, lesson
ljus (n.), , light; candle Idsa (biljett), buy (ticket)
I jus (adj.), light losen, no pi., ransom
loge, logar, threshing floor
 VOCABULARY. 269
M modern', modern
maj, May mogen, n. moget, def. mogna,
majs, Indian corn ripe
make, -ar, match, mate mogna, I, ripen
mala, lib, grind morgnar, morning;
morgon,
man, man, man tidigt pd morgonen, early
man (indef. pron.), one, they in the morning
manschett', -er, cuff i morgon, to-morrow
manovre'ra, I, maneuver
morgontidning, -ar, morning
marJcnad, -er, fair
paper
marknadsstdnd (n.), ,
booth
i morse, this morning
at a fair
mot, prep, and accented var.
mat, food
prefix, also emot, against
matsal, -ar, dining room
motgdng, -ar, adversity
matsedel, -sedlar, bill of fare
mottaga, receive
med, prep., adv., and accented
var. prefix, with, along, etc. mottagare, , recipient

medfora, lib, bring, entail mottagningsrum (n.), , re-

medan (conj.), while ception room

mejeri'smor (n.), creamery mo'torbdt, -ar, motor boat

butter mulna, I, become cloudy

mellan (emellan), between multiplice'ra, I, multiply
men, but mun, munnar, mouth
mena, I, mean munter, def. muntra, merry
mer(a), more museum (n.), museer, museum
meta, I, angle musik', music
middag, -ar, noon; dinner; i musikalisk, musical
middags, this (past) noon musikkdr, -er, band
min, n. mitt, my mycken, n. mycket, def. myck-
minnas, lib, dep. v., remem- na, much
ber mycket (adv.), very
minut', minute
-er, mynning, -ar, mouth (of river,

miss'taga, st. v., mistake cannon) nozzle ;

misstaga sig, be mistaken md (modal), may

misstag (n.), mistake ,
ma, III, feel; hur mar nif
mitt, indecl. noun, middle; i How are you?
mitten, in the middle mdl (n.), goal; meal
mjol (n.), flour mdnad, -er, month
mjolnare, ,
miller mdndag, -ar, Monday
moder, modrar, mother mdtt (n.), , measure
270 VOCABULARY.

mdnniska, -or, human being, nyhet, -er, newness, novelty;

person news
mdsterskap (n.), champ- , nyligen, recently
ionship nyss, just now
mo'bel, mobler, piece of furni- nag on, n. -ot, pi. ndgra (adj.
ture and pron.), any, some
mojlig, possible ndgonsin, ever
mojligen, possibly namligen, that is to say;
morJc, dark namely
mossa, -or, cap namnare, , denominator
m.ota, Ha, meet ndr, when
motas, reciprocal; meet (one ndr (adj.), near
another) ndra (adv. and prep.), near
ntirhet, nearness, vicinity
N ntirma sig, I, approach
namn (n.), , name ndrsluten, n. -slutet, def. -slut-
namnteckning , -ar, signature na, inclosed
natt, natter, night; i , last ndrvarande, indecl., present
night ndsta, indecl., next, following
nattsndlltdg (n.), , night ndstan, almost
express nod, distress
nappa, I, bite nojd, n. no'jt, contented
natur', nature noje (ik), -n, amusement,
naturligtvis (adv.), of course pleasure
ned, down
nej (adv.), no
ni, you (polite address) o-, accented prefix of negation
nog, enough obetydlig, -t, insignificant
nog, certainly; I suppose obetydlighet, -er, insignifi-
noga (adv. and predicate adj., cance, trifle
indecl.), careful (ly) och, and
noggrann, n. -grant, careful, ocksd, also
accurate oense (indecl. predicate adj.),
norr (noun and adj., def. form at variance
only), north, northern officer', -er or -are, officer
nu, now officerskappa, -or, officer's
nu for tiden, now-a-days cloak
nummer (n.), def. numret, ofrankerad, n. -at, not
, number stamped, not prepaid
ny, n. nytt, new ofta, often
 VOCABULARY. 271

ogynnsam, def. -samma, un- paraply (n.), -n, umbrella

favorable passa, I, fit, suit; be proper
oliJc, unlike, different passagerare, , passenger,
olycka, -or, misfortune traveler
olyckligtvis, unfortunately passande, n. , proper
olympisk, Olympic patient', -er, patient
om, conj., if; prep, and ac- pengar, pi., money
cented var. prefix, around, penna, pen
-or,
about; concerning person', -er, person
ombord, aboard pessimistisk pessimistic
om'komma (see komma), pest, -er, pestilence, plague
perish piller (n.), , pill
omkring (adv. and prep.), pjas, -er, play (theatrical)
about, around plan, -er, plan
omlopp (n.), circulation plane' ra, I, plan

omtala. I, sep., relate, tell plante'ring, -ar, park; plant

omtalad, n. -at, mentioned; ing
celebrated plats, -er, place; tag , sit

omojlig, impossible down

ond, n. ont, bad, evil; sore; plocka, I, pick
angry plaga, I, pain, torment, trouble
onsdag, -ar, Wednesday polette'ra, I, check (trunk)
opera, -or, opera polis'konstapel, -staplar, po-
ord (n.), ,
word liceman
ordforande, , chairman post, mail; post office; skic-
ordine'ra, I, prescribe ka pa posten, mail
orolig, uneasy poste restante, general de-

orsak, -er, reason livery

otdlig, impatient postanvisning, -ar, money or-

oskadlig, harmless der

ovanlig, unusual pota'tis, (colloquially often
-ar), potato
precis', exactly; precis kloc-
kan fern, five o'clock sharp
packa, I, pack predi'ka, I, preach

packa upp', unpack predikan, no. pi., sermon

pallet' (n.), parcel, presente'ra (for), introduce
pant, -er, security; forfeit princip', -er, principle
par (n.), pair, couple;
,
ett pris (n.), -er, price
par, a couple of
272 VOCABULARY.

program' (n.), def. -gram- , revolver, -rar, revolver

met, program rik, rich
promene'ra, I, take a walk riklig, abundant
proteste'ra, I, protest rikta, I, aim, direct
prov, -er, sample; test (pi. ) riktig, right, correct, quite
pryda, lib, decorate, adorn (adv.)
praktig, fine, magnificent, ring, -ar, ring
splendid ringa, indecl., humble, insig-
punJct, -er, point, dot nificant
pa, on,upon ringa, lib, ring
pdminna, lib, remind ringa pd' (hos), ring up
riva, st. v., tear, scratch
R ro, III, row
raka, I, shave roa sig, I, amuse oneself

rask, quick, brisk rock, -ar, coat

recept' (n.), , prescription roddbdt, -ar, rowboat
redan, already rolig, amusing; ha roligt, have
regna, I, rain fun
rekommendationsbrev (n.), roll, -er, part (theatrical)
letter of recommendation
, ropa, I, call,shout; pd, call
rekommende'ra, I, recom- (somebody)
mend; register ruin', -er, ruin
rekommenderad, n. -at, regis- rullning, -ar, rolling
tered rum (n.), ,
room
reda (-0 in compounds), or- rykte (n.), -n, reputation;
der; ha pd, know about; rumor
ta pA, find out Ryssland (n.), Russia
regna, I, rain rdd (n.), advice; ha rdd,
,

rengora, irr. v., clean have the means to

resa, I la, travel, go rdda, lib, advise
resa, -or, journey, trip rdgbrod (n.), , rye bread
resona'bel, def. -abla, reason- rddfrdga, I, consult
able raka, I, meet; get (into) ;
i

rest, -er, remainder svdrigheter, get into diffi-

restaurang', -er, restaurant culties; rdkas, to meet one

restaurangvagn, -ar, dining another
car rlicka, Ha, reach, last, be suf-
resultat (n.), , result ficient
resvdska, -or, valise rddd, no. n., timid, afraid;
rev, -ar, fish-line radd for, afraid of
 VOCABULARY.

rddda, I, save sedan, (conj.), after, when;

rdkna, I, count (adv.), then, thereupon, af-
rdkning, -ar, bill; calculating, ter; (prep.), since, after
counting sedel, sedlar, bill
rdtt (adj.), n. , right; ha segelbat, -ar, sailboat
rdtt, be right segla, I, sail
rod, n. rdtt, red semes' ter, -rar, semester; va-
ro'ka, smoke
I, cation
rokare, smoker , sen, late
rokkupe, -er, compartment senare, later
for smokers sex, six
rokning, smoking sida, -or, side; page
riirande, concerning sig, him-, her-, itself, them-
rorelse, -r, movement, motion, selves
exercise sin, reflex, possessive, 3d pers.
rust, -er, voice sist, last; till sist, at last
sitta, irr. v., sit

sju, seven
S
sjuk, sick
sak, -er, thing, matter sjukdom, -ar, sickness
sakna, I, lack, miss, feel loss sjunga, st. v., sing
of sjunka, st. v., sink
sakta (sig), slow down; lose sjo, -ar, sea, lake
time (watch) sjorofvare, , pirate
sakta (adv.), slowly sjosjuk, seasick
sal, -ar, hall sjostrand, -strdnder, lake
drawing room,
salong', -er, shore
auditorium skada, -or, injury, damage
salt (n.), salt skadad n. -at, injured, dam-
sam-, accented, insep. prefix, aged
together ske, III, happen
samma, (the) same skepp (n.), , ship
sammansvdrja (sig), irr. v., skicka, send
I,

conspire skicka ~bort', send away; dis-

samtal (n.), conversation

, miss
samtala, I, converse, chat skicka in', send in
sceneri' (n.), -er, scenery skicka ut', send out
se, irr. v., see; se' pd, look at; skicklig, skillful
se ut', look (appearance) skildring, -ar, description,
sed, -er. custom portrayal
274 VOCABULARY.

skillnad, difference; pd, slut (n.), close, end

difference between sluta, I and st. v., close; end;
skina, st. v., shine shut
skinka, -or, ham slutligen, finally, at last
skiva, -or, slice sld, st. v., strike
skjorta, -or, shirt slakting, -ar, relative
skjuta, st. v., shoot slarv (n), carelessness
,

sko, -r, shoe sla, (irr. v.), strike

skola, -or, school; gd i , go slappa, Ha, let go; sltippa in,
to school (attend) ut, let in, out
skolavgift, -er, tuition slatt, -er, plain
skolkamrat, -er, school-mate smaka, I, taste
skog, -ar, forest smeka, Ha, caress
skomakare, , shoemaker smutsig, dirty
skona, I, spare smdsak, -er, trifle

skorsten, -ar, chimney, smoke- smiilta, Ha, melt

stack smor (n.), butter
skratta, laugh
I, smorgds, -ar, bread and butter,
skriftlig, written sandwich.
skrika, st. v., shout, cry sna6&, quick, rapid, fast
skriva, write
st. v., snar, quick, speedy
skriva om', rewrite snart, soon
skridsko, -r, skate; dka skrid- snitt (n.), , cut (fashion;
sko, skate. snail, good, kind; var ,

skridskobana, -or, skating rink please

skraddare, , tailor snulltdg (n.), , express train
skuld, -er, guilt; debt sno, snow
skydda, I, protect socfcer(n.), def. sockret, sugar
skyldig, guilty; vara skyldig, so/fa, -or, sofa, seat
owe solsken (n.), sunlight
skynda, hurry I, solstrdle, -ar, sunbeam
skynda sig, hurry som pron.), who, which,
(rel.
skammas (for), lib, dep. v., that; (conj.) as
be ashamed (of) sommar somrar, summer; i

skota, Ha, take care of; man- somras, last summer

age somna, I, fall asleep
slag (n.), , blow, stroke son, soner, son
slagsmdl (n.), , fight soppa, -or, soup
slant, -ar, coin sorg, -er, sorrow, grief
slott (n.), castle sorglig, sad, sorry
 VOCABULARY. 275

sova, st. v., sleep stryka, st. v., iron; lower (of
spare, I, save a flag) ; stroke
spatser'tur, -er, walk; gora en strykning, ironing
, take a walk strykinrdttning, -ar, laundry
spegel, speglar, mirror; ne sig stude'ra, I, study
i spegeln, look in the mirror studium (n.), studier, study
spel (n.), , play; game stund, -er,while; om en kort
spela, I, play , in a short while
spratt (n.), , trick; spela stundande, indecl., coming
ett , play a trick on stupa, I, fall; die (on the bat-
springa, st. v., run tle field)
springpojke, -ar, errand boy stycke (n.), -n, piece

sprdk (n.), , language styrka, strength, force

spdrvagn, -ar, street car std till', irr. v., be (with ref-
stackars, indecl., poor, wretch- erence to health), hur star
ed det till? How are you?
stad, stdder, city stdlle (n.), -n, place; i ert ,

stampning, pitching (ship) in your place

stanna, I, stop, stay, remain stdnga, lib, close, shut
stark, strong stdrk'saker, pi. only, laundry
stat, -er, state (washing)
station', -er, station supe, -er, supper
stek, -ar, steak svag, weak
sten, -ar, stone svar (n.), answer ,

stiga, st. v., step svara, answer

I,

stiga from', step forth svensk (adj.), Swedish; (n.),

stiga pd', enter -ar, Swede
stiga upp', get up, rise Sverige (n.), Sweden
stil, -ar, style; print svar, difficult; serious
stjdla bort', st. v., steal svdrighet, -er, difficulty
stjdlpa, Ila, upset svalja, lib, also svalde, svalt.
stol, -ar, chair swallow
stolt. n. , proud synas, Ila, dep. v., seem
stor, great, large synnerligen, especially
storartad, n. -artat, grand, sysselsdtta, irr. v., busy; em-
magnificent ploy
stormig, stormy syster, -trar, sister
strand, strdnder, shore sd, III, sow
strax, soon sd, so
stria, -er, strife, struggle, fight sd att, so that
276 VOCABULARY.

sdlunda, thus, consequently teater, teatrar, theater; gd pd

sdng, -er, singing, song teatern, go to the theatre
saga, irr. v., say; dt (till), telegraf, telegraph
tell telegram (n.), telegram ,

saker, def. sdkra, sure, cer- telegram'bud (n.), mes- ,

tain ; pd, sure of senger boy

sallan. seldom telefone'ra, I, telephone
siillskap, -er, society, club tennis, tennis
sullsynt, n. ,
rare termome'ter, -metrar, ther-
sang, -ar, bed; gd till stings, mometer
go to bed tid, -er, time; i , on time
sarskilt, separate tidig, early
sasong', -er, season tidtdbell', -er, time table
sate (n). -n, seat; bench tidning, -ar, newspaper
satt (n.), , manner, way tiggare, , beggar
satta, irr. v., set, put, place till, prep., adv., and accented
sutta sig, sit down var. prefix, to, until.
sodra, def. only, southern tillbaka, back
soka, Ha, seek, look for tillbringa, I and irr. v., pass,
som, sommar, seam spend
somnig, sleepy tillfdlle (n.), -n, chance, occa-
sondag, -ar, Sunday sion; vid forsta at the ,

sorja, lib, mourn, grieve first occasion

sot, n. sott, sweet tillhora, lib, belong to
tillkomma, st. v., befit, be the
right of
faga, ta, st.v., take tilldta, st. v., allow, permit
taga upp', take up tilldtelse, -r, permission
tal (n.), speaking, speech;
, tillsammans, together
number tillverka, I, manufacture
tambur', -er, hall, vestibule tills (conj.), until
talrik, numerous timme, -ar, hour
tand, tander, tooth; ha ont i titta, I, look; pd, look at
tdnderna, have a toothache tjog (n.), , score
tandvark, toothache tjugu, twenty
tanke, -ar, thought torn, def. tomma, empty, va-

tappa, I, lose, drop cant

'tavla, -or, picture, painting torg (n.), ,
market place
tavelgalleri' (n.), -er, picture torka, dry
I,

gallery torka av', wipe off, dry

 VOCABULARY. 277

torr, dry tysk, German

trevlig, pleasant, nice; ha det tyska, German language
trevligt, have a fine home, tyst, n. , silent
time, etc. tyvdrr', unfortunately
tro, III, believe tag (n.), , train
trogen, n. troget, def. trogna, tacka, Ila, cover
faithful taljare, , numerator
troligen, probably tdmligen (adv.), quite, fairly
tr&kig, tedious, boring, un- tdnka (pa), Ila, think (of)
pleasant tat, frequent

trdng, narrow, crowded tdvla (om), compete (for)

trad (n.), , tree to'ras (modal), dare; may

trddgdrd, -ar, garden

traffa, I, meet, see U
trdffas, reciprocal, meet, see under, prep, and accented
one another var. prefix, under, beneath,
trdnga sig from, lib, crowd etc.

up, make a way for one- underhdlla, st. v., entertain;

self support
troska, I, thresh underldta, st. v., neglect
trott, n. , tired underrdttelse, -r, information
tu (tvd), two; itu, in twain, undersoka, Ila, examine, in-

apart, asunder vestigate

tung, heavy underbar, wonderful
tunga, -or, tongue undra, I, wonder
tur, -er, trip, turn; luck union', -er, union
tveka, hesitate upp, adv. and accented var.
tvenne, two prefix, up
tvist, -er, quarrel uppassare, waiter ,

tvd, two uppbrand, n. -brant, burnt up

tvdrgata, -or, cross street uppdragen, n. -et, def. dragna,
tvdrs (over), across wound up
tvaft, -ar, wash (ing) iippflyttad, n. -at, moved up;
tvdtta, I, wash promoted
ty, for, because uppfora, lib, erect, build
tycka, Ila, think, fancy; uppfora sig, conduct oneself,
om', like; ilia om, dis- behave
like uppforande (n.), ,
conduct,
tyg (n.), -er, cloth performance
tyngd, -er, weight uppldsa, Ila, sep., recite
278 VOCABULARY.

uppluckra, I, sep., loosen utrdtta, I, to carry out, ac-

(soil) complish
uppmarksam, def. -samma, at- utsikt, -er, view
tentive utsliten, n. -et, def. -slitna,

upprndrksamhet, attention worn out

utsprucken, n. -et, def. -spruck-
upprdtta, I, establish, found
na, open (about leaves and
uppsats, -er, composition
flowers)
uppsikt, supervision
utstdlla, lib, exhibit; draw
uppsTcatta, I, esteem
(draft)
uppsta, irr. v., sep., to arise;
uttaga, st. v., sep., take out
originate
uttrycka, Ha, express
upptaga, st. v., sep., to take
utvdg, -ar, expedient
up; to adopt utova, I, practice; exercise
upptagen, n. -et, occupied;
busy; adopted
urmakare, ,
watchmaker vacker, def. vackra, pretty
urspdra, I, derail vagn, -ar, wagon, carriage
ursakta, I, excuse vakna, I, awaken
ut, adv. and accented var. vaktmdstare, janitor, ,

prefix, out (motion) waiter

utan, prep, and adv., with- vandra, I, wander, stroll

out; att vara , lack vanlig, usual, common

utantill, by heart vanligen, usually

utbryta, st. v., sep., break out vapen (n.), def. vapnet, ,

out
weapon
ute,
var, indecl. adj., each, every
utflykt, -er, picnic, excursion
var och en, everyone
utforande (n.), execution
vara, -or, ware, merchandise
utgift, -er, expense
vara, I, to last, endure
utgiva, st. v., sep., publish; vara (v.), to be
edit; spend varaktig, lasting, durable
utkdmpa, I, bring a contest varje, indecl. adj., each, every
to a close; play (a game) varm, warm
utmana, I, challenge varsebliva, st. v., sep., become
utmarkt, n. , excellent aware of
utom, outside of, beside; ex- vart, whither
cept Vasagatan, Vasa Street
utrikes, adv. and indecl. adj., vatten (n.), water
abroad, foreign vattna, I, water
 VOCABULARY. 279

veranda, -or, porch vdlgorenhet, charity, oenevo-

verk (n.), ,
work lence
verkligen, really valja, lib, choose, elect
vete (n.), wheat vdlsigna, I, bless
vetebrod (n.), , white bread, van, vanner, friend
loaf of vdnda, lib, turn, turn back;
vid, prep., adv., and accented sig, turn around
var. prefix, at,by vdnlig, friendly, kind; mot,
vid, n. vitt, wide kind to
vidare, further; utan with- , vdnskap, friendship
out further ado, directly vdnster, def. vdnstra, left; till

vikt, -er, weight; importance vanster, to the left

viktig, important vdnta (pa), I, wait (for)
vila, I, rest vdntsal, -ar, waiting room
vilja (v.), will, wish, intend, vardefull, valuable
etc.; ha, want vdrd (n.), vdrt, worth
villkor (n.), , condition vdrld (I mute), -ar, world
vin (n.), -er, wine vasnas, I, dep. v., make noise
vinge, -ar, wing vdxa, I la, grow
vinter, -rar, winter; i vint- vdxel, vdxlar, draft; utstdlla
ras, last winter en draw a draft
,

vinterhatt, -ar, winter hat vdxelkontor (n.) exchange ,

visa, I, show office

viss, sure, certain vdxla, I, change, exchange

visst, adv., surely, certainly
Y
visserligen, to be sure
ypperlig, excellent
vistelse, -r, sojourn
vykort (n.), souvenir pos-
,
A
tal card d, prep, and accented insep.
vdning, -ar, story, apartment prefix, on
var, -ar, spring; i vdras, last ddraga sig, st. v., contract,
spring incur
vdrda, nurse, take care of
I, Alder, dldrar, age
vdrdslos, careless dka, Ila, ride
vdrdsloshet, carelessness dker, dkrar, field
vdrfcst, -er, spring festival dngare, ,
steamer
vdt, n. vdtt, wet dngbdtsforbindelse, -r, connec
vdcka, I la, wake up tion by steamer
viider (n.), , weather dngbdtstur, -er, steamboat trip
valbargad, n. -at, well to do dngmaskin, -er, steam engine
280 VOCABULARY.
dr (n.), year , dnnu, still, yet
drsdag, anniversary
-or, apple (n.), -n, apple
dsikt, -er, opinion urende (n.), -n, errand
dtaga sig, st. v., undertake d'venledes, likewise
dter, adv. and accented var. tita, st. v., eat

prefix, again; back

dterldmna, I, sep., return o, -ar, island
dterstd, irr. v., remain 60a (n.), 60on, eye
itervdnda, lib, sep., return ogonblick (n.), moment ,

dtmins'tone, at least ogonldkare, oculist ,

ditto, eighty omsesidig, mutual

onska, I, wish
onskan, indecl., wish
ddel, def. ddla, noble oppna, I, open
iiga, lib, own ore (n.), -n, Swedish coin
agare, , owner over, prep., adv., and accented
dgg (n.), egg var. prefix, over
arnna, I, intend overldgga, irr. v., deliberate
an, yet; than (after a com- dverraska, I, surprise
parative) overruskning, -ar, surprise
dndamdl (n.), , purpose overresa, -or, trip across, voy-
tindd, yet, nevertheless age
dndra, change; sig, change overtyga, I, convince
one's mind overvaka, I, supervise
dng, -ar, meadow overvikt, overweight

ENGLISH-SWEDISH.
For particulars of declension and conjugation, the Swedish-English vocabulary
must be consulted.

according to, enligt

a, an, en, ett accordingly, foljaktligen
able, be , kunna account, skildring, rakning;
about, om, omkring on account of, med anled-
abroad, utrikes ning av, till foljd av
abundant, riklig acquainted, bekant
accident, olycka, olycksfall accustom, vanja
accompany, folja med across, tvars (over)
accomplish, utratta add, addera
 VOCABULARY. 281

address, adress amusement, noje

address, adressera amusing, roande, rolig
addressee, adressat and, och
adopt, upptaga, antaga angle, meta
adorn, pryda another, en annan
advance (money), forskottera anniversary, arsdag
adversity, motgang annoying, forarglig
advertisement, annons answer, svara
advice, rad any, nagon; any longer, langre
advise, rada anything, nagonting, nagot
afternoon, eftermiddag; this appetite, aptit
eftermiddag; in the
, i , applause, bifall
pa eftermiddagen apple, apple
afraid (of), radd (for) approach, narma sig
after, efter approval, bifall
again, igen arm, arm
against, emot, mot around, omkring, om
age, alder arrest, arrestera
ago, for. ..sedan arrive, ankomma, anlanda
agreeable, angenam, behaglig art, konst
ail (impers.), fattas article, artikel; vara
aim, rikta artist, konstnar
air, luft as, som
alike, lika ashamed, skamsen; to be ,

allow, tillata skammas (for)

almost, nastan ashore, i land
alone, generally def., allena ask, fraga (efter), bedja (om)
along (as in come ), med astonished, forvanad; be ,

already, redan forvanas

also, ocksa at, vid (time, place) at the ;

although, ehuru, fastan house of, hos

altogether, alldeles attain, uppna, hinna
always, alltid attend (visit), besoka, bevis-
American (n.), amerikan, ta; church, ga i kyrkan
(adj.), amerikansk attention, uppmarksamhet
among, bland, ibland attentive, uppmarksam
amount, belopp audience, auditorium
amount to, belopa sig till author, forfattare
amuse, roa; to amuse oneself, automobile, automobil
ha roligt autumn day, hostdag
Swedish Grammar 19
282 VOCABULARY.

aware, varse; to become of, belated, forsenad, sen

bliva varse belief, tro
away, bort, borta; to go away, believe, tro; in, tro pa
ga bort; to be away (out), bell, klocka
vara borta belong (to), tillhora
B bench, bank, sate
back, tillbaka; back and forth, beside, bredvid, vid; utom
fram och tillbaka (except)
back (v.), backa besides (prep.) utom; (adv.)
background, bakgrund, fond dessutom, dartill
backwards, baklanges best, bast
bad, dalig, ond, elak between, (e)mellan
badly, ilia big, stor
bake, baka bill, sedel; rakning
baker, bagare bill of fare, matsedel
band, band, musikkar bird, fagel
bank, bank birthday, fodelsedag
barber shop, frisersalong bite, bita; nappa (of fish)
basket, korg bite, napp (of fish), bit.
be, vara; how are youf Hur bless,valsigna
star det till? blow, blasa
bear, bara blonde, ljus, blond
beat, sla; besegra (in games) board (fare), kost
beautiful, skon, vacker board and room, inackordering
because, emedan, ty board (a train), stiga pa'
become, bliva; what became boarder, inackordering
of himf Hvad blev det av boil, koka
honom? cloudy, mulna bone, ben
bed, sang; go to , ga till book, bok
sangs booth, stand
befit, passa; tillkomma boring, trakig
before (prep.) fore; (adv.) born, fodd; be ,
fo'das

forr, forut; (conj.) innan borrow, lana; borrow from,

beg, tigga; for, bedja om lana av
beggar, tiggare both, bada, bagge; both...
begin, borja, begynna and, bade. .och .

beginning, borjan; in the , boy, gosse

i borjan branch, gren
behind, bakom bread, brod
being, vasen human
; ,
man- break, bryta
niska
 VOCABULARY. 283
break off, bryta av, avbryta carelessness, vardslb'shet,
break out, bryta ut slarv
breakfast, frukost cargo, last
bring, bringa, hamta carriage, vagn
bring along, medfora, fora med carry, bara
brother, broder cash (noun), kontant
brunette, brunett, mb'rk cash (v.), inlosa
brush, borsta castle, slott
build, bygga cat, katt
building, byggnad cathedral, katedral
burn, branna cause (noun), orsak
burnt up, uppbrand cause (v.), fororsaka
business, affar; do a good , cautious, forsiktig
gora goda affarer cease, sluta, avsluta, upphora
business building, affarsbygg- med
nad celebrate, fira
but, men, (after a negative, celebrated, firad, omtalad
utan) celebration, firande
butter, smor certain, saker, viss
buy, kopa chair, stol
by, vid, bredvid chairman, ordforande
challenge, utmana
championship, masterskap
cab, droska chance, tillfalle; by chance.
cabman, kusk handelsevis
calculation, rakning change, andra; vaxla( money)
call, kalla character, karaktar
call on, balsa p, (hos), be charge, begara
soka charitable, barmhartig, valgo-
called, be ,
beta rande
calm (adj.), lugn charity, barmhartighet, valgo-
can, kunna renhet
captain, kapten charming, fortjusande
car, vagn, sparvagn chat (noun), samtal
card, kort chat (v.), samtala
care (noun), yard, skotsel, cheat, bedraga
omsorg check, polettera
care (v.), varda, skota chicken, hons, kyckling
careful, aktsam, noggrann child, barn
careless, vardslos, slarvig chilly, kylig
284 VOCABULARY.

choose, valja compartment, kupe"

Christmas, jul compensate, belona, ersatta
church, kyrka compete, tavla
cigar, cigarr; dealer, ci- complain, klaga (over)
garrhandlare comply, efterkomma
circle, cirkel
composition, uppsats
concern, anga, galla
circulation, omlopp
concert, konsert
city, stad
condition, f orhallande till-
;

class, klass
stand
classic, klassisk
conduct (noun), uppforande
clean, ren conduct (oneself), uppfora sig
cleanly, renlig conductor, konduktor
clear, klar confidence, fortroende
olimate, klimat conflagration, brand, eldsvada
clock, klocka connection, forbindelse
close (noun), slut consequently, foljaktligen
close (v.), sluta, stanga consideration, betraktande
cloth, tyg consist, besta (av)
clothes, klader conspire, sammansvarja (sig)
cloudy, mulen; become , consult, radfraga
mulna constitution, kroppskonstitu-
coat, rock tion
coffee, kaffe contain, innehalla
coin, mynt, slant contents, innehall
cold (adj.) kail, (noun) for- continue, fortsatta
kylning contract, adraga sig (as a

collar, krage sickness)

collide, kollidera converse, samtala
comb, kamm conversation, samtal
come, komma cook, koka
come (to a place), infinna sig cool, kylig
comfort, trost correspondent, korrespondent
comfortable, bekvam cordial, hjartlig
coming, kommande, stundan- corner, horn
de cost, kosta
command, befalla costly,dyrbar, kostbar
common, allman, vanlig costume, kostym
company, sallskap, framman- count, rakna
de (guests) counter, disk
 VOCABULARY. 285

country, land; in the , pa degree, grad

landet delay (noun), drojsmal
country house, lantstalle deliberate, betanka, overvaga
couple, par; a couple of, ett demand (noun), anhallan, be-
par garan
course, gang, kurs; of course, demand (v.), anhalla
naturligtvis denominator, namnare
cousin, kusin deposit, insatta
cozy, hemtrevlig derail, urspara
creamery butter, mejerismb'r description, beskrivning
crew, besattning deserve, fortjana
cross street, tvargata design, anslag; monster
crowd, folkmassa desire (noun), onskan, lust
crowded, fullsatt, fullpackad destroy, forstora
cuff, manschett die, do
culture r kultur different, olik, annorlunda
cultured, bildad difference, skillnad
cup, kopp difficult, svar
cure (v.), bota difficulty, svarighet
custom, sed diligent, flitig
cut (noun), snitt dining car, restaurangvagn
cut(v.), klippa, skara, avmeja dining room, matsal
D dinner, middag
daily, daglig direct, direkt
damage (v.), skada direction, hall, riktning
dark, mork dirty smutsig
date, datum disguise, forklada
date (v.), datera -dismiss, skicka bort
daughter, dotter dispatch, avsanda
day, dag diverse, diverse
daylight, dagsljus divide, dividera
dead, dod do, gora
deal, del; a great deal, myc- doctor, doktor
ket, en hel del doctor's office, mottagningsrum
dealer, handlande doctor's fee, honorar
dear, kar, dyr (price) dog, hund
death, dod door, dorr
debt, skuld dot, prick, punkt
deceive, bedraga down (adv.) ned; (prep.) ned-
deck, dack for
286 VOCABULARY.

.dozen, dussin entertain, underhalla, roa

draft, vaxel entertaining, roande, under-
drama, dram, drama hallande
draw, draga; rita entirely, belt och ballet
drawing room, salong entrust, anfortro
dress, klada (sig) envious, avundsjuk
drink, aricka erect, uppfora, uppratta
drive, kora errand, arende
drop, slappa ned, tappa (lose) errand boy, springpojke
druggist, apotekare error, fel, misstag
dry, torr especially, isynnerhet
duel, duell establish, anlagga, uppratta
durable, varaktig esteem, uppskatta
dwelling, bostad European, europS, europeisk
even, till och med; afven
evening, afton, kvall
every, varje, var
each, var, varje everybody, envar, var och en
early (adj.) tidig; (adv.) ti-- exact, noga, noggrann
digt exactly, precis
earn, fortjana examine, examinera, undersoka
eat, ata excellent, fortramig, ypperlig
economical, sparsam, ekono- except, utom
misk exchange, byta, utbyta
egg, agg excursion, utflykt
eighty, attio excuse (v.), ursakta
either (conj.), antingen execution, utforande
elect, valja exercise (noun), ovning, ro-

electric, elektrisk relse

elegance, elegans exercise (v.), utova, ova, rora
emperor, kejsare expect, vanta
employees, betjaning expedient, medel; rad
empty, torn expense, utgift
end (noun), slut, ande expensive, dyr
endure, fordraga; besta; vara experience, erfarenhet
enjoyment, noje export (v.), exportera
enough, nog express (v.), uttrycka
entail, medfora express train, snalltag
enter, intrada, komma in eye, oga
 VOCABULARY. 287

fool, narr
face, ansikte football game, fotbollspel
factory, fabrik football team, fotbollag
fair (noun), marknad for (prep.) for; (conj.) f or, ty
faithful, trogen force, kraft, styrka
fall, falla, stupa (fall on the foreign, frammande; utrikes
battlefield) foremost, framst
family, familj; festival, fa- forenoon, formiddag; in the
miljefest forenoon, pa formiddagen
famous, beromd, ryktbar forest, skog
farmer, lantbrukare forget, glomma
fast (speed), fort, hastigt fortune, lycka; formogenhet
fast (immovable), fast fraction,brak (arithmetic)
father, fader France, Frankrike
fault, fel Francis, Frans
fee, honorar free, fri
feel, kanna freeze, frysa
fetch, hamta freezing point, fryspunkt
feiv, fa; a few, nagra (fa) French, fransk
field, aker friend, van
fight (noun), slagsmal, strid friendly, vanlig
fill, fylla friendship, vanskap
finally, slutligen, antligen frightened, forskrackt
find, finna, hitta from, (i)fran
fine, fin, trevlig, vacker front, front; in front, framme
fire, eld, eldsvada frost, frost
first, forst fruit, frukt
fish, fisk full, full
fit. passa further, langre, vidare
flag, flagga future, framtid
flee, fly

floor, golv
flour, mjol
flow, flyta game, spel, lek
floiver, blomma: bed, blom- garden, tradgard
sterrabatt general, allman, vanlig
fluent, flytande general delivery, poste re-

folloio, folja stante

following, foljande generality, allmanhet
food, mat generally, vanligen
288 VOCABULARY.

German, tysk hall,tambur

Germany, Tyskland ham, skinka
get, fa, erhalla, bekomma hand, hand; at ,
till hands,
get up, stiga upp framme
girl, flicka hand baggage, handbagage
give, giva hang, hanga
glad, glad; I am glad, det gla- happen, ske
der mig happiness, lycka
glass, glas happy, lycklig, glad ; make ,

glide, glida gladja

glorious, harlig harbor, hamn
go, ga, resa, fara hard, hard, svar
goal, mal harmless, oskadlig
God, Gud hat, hatt
good, god, snail haul, forsla, kora
good-bye, farval, adjo he, han
goose, gas headache, huvudvark
Gotha Canal, Gota kanal health, halsa
Gothenburg, Goteborg healthy, frisk, halsosam
granary, lada hear, hora
gras
, heart, hjarta; by , utantill

,
stor heart failure, hjartforlamning
green, gron heavy, tung
greet, halsa heed, lyda, giva akt pa
greeting, halsning heel, hal; klack (of shoe)
0nef, sorg height, hojd
grind, mala help (noun), hjalp
grow, vaxa, blifva (become) help (v.), hjalpa
grumble, knota her (gen. and obj.), hennes,
guest, gast henne
0ttiZ, skuld herself, sig
guilty, skyldig here, bar
hesitate, tveka
H high, hog
habit, vana highly, hogt, hogligen, mycket
Twiir, bar hill, hojd, kulle

f, halv (adj.), halft (noun) him, honom

w, halvtimme himself, sig
half-sole, halvsula hire,hyra
halfway, halvvags 7m. bans
 VOCABULARY. 289

history, historia indicate, visa

hold (noun), hall induce, forma.
hold (v.), halla; out, rac- industrious, flitig
ka fram information, underrattelse
holiday, helgdag inhabitant, invanare
hollow, ihalig injured, sarad, skadad
home (noun), hem; at , ink, black
hemma insignificance, obetydlighet
home (adv.), hem insignificant, obetydlig
honest, arlig intend, amna, vilja
hook, krok interest (noun), intresse
hour, timme interested, intresserad
hope (noun), hopp interesting, intressant
hope (v.), hoppas interrupt, avbryta
hotel, hotell introduce, presentera (for)
house, bus; at the house of, invite, bjuda,inbjuda
hos invitation, inbjuaning
human, mansklig; being, iron (v.), stryka
manniska ironing, strykning
humanity, mansklighet, island, 6
humor, lynne it, det
hungry, hungrig Italy, Italien
hurry (noun), bradska; be in
a ha brattom
,

hurry (v.), skynda, skynda journey, resa

sig joy, gladje
hurry up, skynda pa jump (v.), hoppa
just, just
I

is
K
ice,

if, om keep, behalla, halla

ill, sjuk kilogram, kilogram, kilo
illuminated, illuminerad kilometer, kilometer
immediately, genast kind (adj.), snail, vanlig
impatient, otalig kind (n.), slag

important, viktig king, konung, kung

inclose, innesluta, narsluta King's Street, Kungsgatan
inclosed, narsluten knock (v.), knacka
include, inbegripa know, veta, kanna, kunna
inconvenient, obekvamt know about, kanna till
290 VOCABULARY.

letter, brev; of credit, kre-

ditbrev; recommenda-
of
lack, sakna; impers., fattas,
rekommendationsbrev
tion,
felas
lie, ligga
lady, dam lie, ljuga
lake, sjo, insjo life, liv
lake shore, sjostrand like (adj.) lik; (adv.) as
lamb steak lammstek likewise, afvenledes
land (noun), land like, tycka om
land (v.), landa (intr.), land- line (fishing), rev
satta (tr.) listen, lyssna; to, hora p&
landscape, landskap literature, litteratur
language, sprak little, liten; a little, lite(t)
Lapland, Lappland live, leva, bo
large, stor load, last, borda
last (v.), vara, racka loaf, kaka
last (adj.), sist; last night, i
lock, lasa
gar kvall; last year, i fjol; long, lang; (adv.) lange
last Monday, i mandags longer, langre
late, sen, forsenad long (v.), langta
laundry, strykinrattning long expected, lange vantad
(place) look, titta, blicka; se ut (ap-
laundry, stryksaker pearance) ; at, se pa; look
lawn, grasmatta for, soka efter, leta efter
lazy, lat lose, forlora, tappa
lead (v.), fora love, karlek
learn, lara lower, taga ned; stryka (flag)
learned, lard luck, lycka, tur
least,minst; at atminstone ,
M
leave (v.), lamna, avresa, ga magnificent, harlig, storartad
leave behind, kvarlamna mail (noun), post
lecture, forelasning mail (v), bara, lagga pa pos-
left, vanster; to the ,
till ten
vanster make, gora; (induce) forma
left, kvarlamnad (att), fa (att)
leg, ben man, man, manniska
lend, lana maneuver (v.), manovrera
less, mindre manner, satt, vis
lesson, laxa; lektion manufacture, tillverka
let, lata many, manga
 VOCABULARY.
market place, torg most, rnest; most people, de
mate, make fiesta
may, ma, fa, kunna mother, moder
meadow, ang motor boat, motorbat
meal, mal mountain, berg
mean mena, betyda
(v.), mourn, sb'rja
means, medel by means
; of, mouth, mun; mynning (can-
medelst non, river)
measure, matt move, flytta
meet, mota, traffa movement, rorelse verk ;

melt, smalta much, mycken, mycket

mend, laga multiply, multiplicera
mention, namna, omtala museum, museum
merchant, handlande music, musik, spel
merciful, barmhartig mutual, omsesidig
merry, glad, munter my, rriin

miraculous, underbar
N
messenger boy, telegrambud
middle, mitt (i mitten) namely, namligen, that is to
mill, kvarn say
miller, mjolnare nature, natur
minute, minut near (adj.) nar, (adv. and
mirror, spegel prep.) nara
misfortune, olycka nearness, narhet
miss, sakna, forsumma need, behova
mistake (noun), misstag neglect, forsumma, underlata
mistake (v.), misstaga (sig) nest, bo
Mister (Mr.), herr never, aldrig
modern, modern new, ny
modest, blygsam newness, nyhet
moment, ogonblick news, nyheter
Monday, mandag newspaper, tidning
money, pengar; make ,
for- next, nast
tjana pengar next to, bredvid
money order, postanvisning nice, hygglig, snail, trevlig
month, manad night, natt; to-night, i kvall
more, mer, flere night express, nattsnalltag
morning, morgon; to-morrow, no (adv.), nej; (adj.) ingen
i morgon; this i morse:
, noble, adel
paper, morgontidning noise, vasen, larm
292 VOCABULARY.

noon, middag; at pa mid- , opera, opera

dagen opinion, mening, tanke
north (noun) norr, (adj.) opportunity, tillfalle, lagenhet
norra (def. only) or, eller, annars
northern, norra (def. only), order (noun), ordning, reda
nordlig order (v.), befalla, bestalla
Northern Museum, Nordiska originate, uppsta
museet otherwise, annars
not, inte, icke, ej out, ut, ute
nothing, ingenting, intet over, over; kvar; there,
notice (v.j, varsebliva darborta; sleep, forsova
now, nu (sig)
number, nummer, tal overweight, overvikt
numerator, namnare owe, vara skyldig
numerous, talrik own, aga
O owner, agare
oats, havre P
obey, lyda pack, packa
observe, iakttaga page, sida
occasion, tillfalle pain (v.), plaga; gora ont
occupied, sysselsatt, upptagen painting, malning, tavla
occupy, sysselsatta, upptaga pair, par
oculist, ogonlakare palace, palats
of, av, om paper, papper, newspaper, tid-
offer (v.), erbjuda ning
office, kontor parcel, paket
office building, affarsbyggnad pardon, ursakta
officer, officer parents, foraldrar
often, ofta parlor, formak
old, gammal park, park
Olympic, olympisk part, del; roll (theater)
on, pa participate, deltaga
on board, ombord pass, tillbringa
one, en, ett; (indef. pron.) passage, overresa
man passenger, passagerare
once, en gang past (prep, and adv.), forbi
only, bara, endast, blott patience, talamod
open (adj.), oppen; utspruc- patient, talig;patient
kep (flowers) pay, betala
open (v.), 6'ppna peasant, bonde
 VOCABULARY. 293

pen, penna polite, hovlig, aitig

people, folk politeness, hovlighet, artighet
perch, abborre poor, fattig, stackars, dalig
performance, forestalling population, befolkning
perhaps, kanske, kanhanda porch, veranda
permission, tillatelse, lov port, hamn
permit, tillata porter, barare
person, person, manniska portrayal, skildring
pessimistic, pessimistisk position, plats; stallning
pest, pest possible, mojlig
physician, lakare postage stamp, frimarke
picture gallery, tavelgalleri post office, postkontor

pick, plocka potato, potatis

pick upp, taga upp power, kraft; makt
piece, stycke, bit practice (v.), praktisera, ova,
piece of furniture, mobel utova
pill, piller praise, beromma
pin, knappnal pray, bedja
pirate, sjorovare preach, predika
pitching, stampning preacher, predikant
placard, anslag, plakat precious, dyrbar
place, plats; in the of, i prefer, foredraga, hellre
stallet for; take the of, (heist) +verb
ersatta prescribe, ordinera, foreskriva
plaintive, jamrande prescription, foreskrift, recept
plan (noun), plan present (adj.), narvarande
plan (v.), planera presentiment, aning; have a
plant, plantera, sit ,
ana
play (v.), leka; spela presume, formoda, tro sig
play (noun), lek; spel; pjis pretty, vacker; (adv.) tamli-
(theater) gen, ganska
pleasant, angenam, behaglig, prevent, forhindra
trevlig price, pris .

please, behaga print, tryck, stil

pleasure, behag, noje principle, princip
poem, dikt probable, trolig
poet,, diktare, skald probably, troligen
point, punkt, dot program, program
poison, forgifta prohibit, torbjuda
policeman, poliskonstapel prohibited, forbjuden
294 VOCABULARY
prominent, framstaende reach, racka; reach out, rac-
promise (v.), lova ka fram
promoted, befordrad read, lasa
propose, fbresla reader, lasebok
proposal, forslag ready, fardig
proposition, forslag realize, inse
protect, skydda really, verkligen
protest, protestera reason, orsak; by reason of,

proud, stolt till foljd av

public (noun), allmanhet, reasonable, resonabel
publik recall, minnas, komma ihag
public (adj.), allman, offentlig receive, erhalla, fa, mottaga
public school, folkskola recently, nyligen
publish, utgiva reception room, mottagnings-
pupil, larjunge rum
purchase (noun), inkop recipient, mottagare
purpose, avsikt recite, upplasa
pursue, forfolja reconcile, torsona
put, lagga, satta recognize, igenkanna
put away, lagga bort recommend, rekommendera
Q recommendation, letter of, re-
kommendationsbrev
quality, kvalitet
red, rod
quarrel (v.), trata
redeem, inlosa
quay, kaj
reduce, reducera
quick, kvick, hastig, snabb,
reflect, betanka (sig)
snar, rask
regard, anse, betrakta
quickly, fort rekommenderad
registered,
quiet, tyst
regulate, justera
quite, ganska, riktigt, alldeles
relate, beratta, omtala
R relation, forhallande

railway, jarnvag; accident, relative, slakting

jarnvagsolycka . remain, bliva, forbliva; inne-

rain (noun), regn sta (money in bank) ;
stan-

rain (v.), regna na; Mersta

ransom (noun), losen remainder, rest
ransom (v.), frikopa remember, minnas, erinra sig
rapid, hastig, snabb remind, erinra (om), paminna
rather, hellre rent, hyra
rare, sallsynt reputation, rykte
 VOCABULARY
request (noun), begaran salt, salt
request (v.) anhalla, begara salute, halsa (pa)
respected, respekterad sample, prov
rest (noun), vila sandwich, smorgas
rest (v.), vila sig satisfied, belaten, nojd
restaurant, restaurang save, spara; radda (rescue)
result, resultat say, saga
retain, behalla scenery, sceneri
return, aterlamna (tr. v.) ;
school, skola
komma tillbaka, atervanda score, tjog
revenge, hamnas scratch, riva
revolver, revolver seam, som
rewrite, skriva om sea, sjo, hav
rich, rik seasick, sjosjuk
ride (noun), aktur seat, sate, soffa, plats
ride (v.), rida (horse); aka security, sakerhet; pant
right, ratt; be , ha ratt see, se, traffa
right, hoger; to the , till seek, sb'ka
hoger seem, synas; it seems to me,
ring, ring det synes mig
ring up, ringa pa hos seldom, sallan
rink, skridskobana sell, salja
ripe, mogen semester, semester; termin
ripen, mogna send, skicka
rise, stiga upp send for, skicka efter
river, flod; bank, flod- send away, skicka bort
strand sensible, forstandig
road, vag serious, allvarlig, allvarsam,
rock (v.), gunga svar
rolling, rullning sermon, predikan
room, rum servant, tjanare; servants
row, ro; boat, roddbat (coll.),betjaning
ruin, ruin service, tjanst; betjaning (at-
rumor, rykte tendance)
run, springa; ga (watch) settle, avgora, uppgora
Russia, Ryssland seven, sju
S several, flera, atskilliga
sad, sorgsen, sorglig, trakig share (noun), del
sail, segla; boat, segelbat she, hon
sailor, sjoman shine, skina
296 VOCABULARY

shiny, skinande, blank smokestack, skorsten

ship, skepp, fartyg smoking, rokning
shirt, skjorta smooth, jamn, blank
shoe, sko snow (noun), sno
shoot, skjuta snow (v.), snoa
shore, strand so, sa, jasa
short, kort so that, sa att
shout, ropa, skrika society, societet; forening
show, visa sofa, soffa
shut, stanga sometimes, ibland
shut, stangd some, nagon
sick, sjuk somewhat, nagot
sickness, sjukdom somewhere, nagonstades
side, sida; to the , at sidan (-stans)
sight, syn; anblick, asyn son, son
signature, namnteckning song, sang
signify, betyda, mean soon, snart, strax
since, sedan (time), emedan sore, 6m; ond
(cause) sorrow, sorg
sing, sjunga sorry, ledsen
sink, sjunka soup, soppa
sister, syster southern, sodra, sydlig
six, sex souvenir postal, vy^ort
sit, sitta sow, sa
situated, belagen; be , lig- spare, skona
ga, befinna sig speak, tala
skate (noun), skridsko spectacles, glasogon
skate (v.), aka skridsko speech, tal
skating rink, skridskobana spend (money), giva ut;
skillful, skicklig time, tillbringa
sleep (noun), somn splendid, praktig
sleep (v.), sova sport, idrott
sleepy, somnig spring, var
slice (noun), skiva spring chicken, kyckling
slow, langsam spring festival, varfest
slowly, sakta sprout (noun), brodd
slow up, sakta sprout (v.), gro
small, liten stamp, frimarke; without ,

smile (v.), le ofrankerad

smoker, rokare start (v.), starta, borja, avresa
 VOCABULARY 29'

state, stat summer, sommar; last , i

station, station somras

stay, stanna summon, kalla
steak, stek sun, sol

steal, stjala, stjala bort sunbeam, solstrale

steamboat, angare, angbat Sunday, sondag; last ,
i

son dags
steam engine, angmaskin
superintend, b'vervaka
step (v.), stiga; up, forth,
supervision, uppsikt
stiga fram
supper, kvallsmat, sup6
still, annu
sure, saker; to be nog, vis-
,

stop, stanna
serligen
store, bod, butik
surely, sakert, sakerligen
stormy, stormig surprise (noun), overraskning
story, berattelse; vaning (of surprise (v.), overraska
a house) swallow, svalja
strange, frammande Sweden, Sverige
street, gata sweet, sot, alsklig
street car, sparvagn swing (v.), gunga
strength, styrka, kralt
strife, strid, gral
strike, sla table, bord; set the ,
duka
stroll, vandra tailor,skraddare
strong, stark take, taga; a walk, ga ut
student, student och ga, promenera; time,
study (noun), studium droja; after, bras pa
study (v.), studera talk (noun), samtal
stupid, dum talk (v.), tala, samtala
style, stil taste, smaka
suburb, forstad teach, lara
succeed, lyckas teacher, larare
successful, framgangsrik, lyc- tear, riva
kad tedious, trakig
sudden, hastig, haftig, snabb telegram, telegram
suddenly, plotsligt telegraph, telegrafera
sugar, socker tell, beratta, omtala, tala om,

suffer, lida saga at, till

suit (noun), kostym telephone, telefonera
suit (v.), passa ten, tio
suitable, passande tennis, tennis

Swedish Grammar. 20
298 VOCABULARY
terrible, forfarlig torment (v.), plaga
test (noun), prov train, tag
than, an transform, forvandla
thank, tacka travel, resa, fara
that, (rel.) som; (dem.) den- travel (noun), resa
ne, den dar; (conj.) att treat, behandla; besta; bemo-
theater, teater ta; about, handla om
then, da, sedan treatment, behandling
there, dar t'iee, trad

therefore, darfor trick, spratt

thereupon, darpa, sedan trifle, smasak, obetydlighet
thermometer, termometer trip, resa, tur
think, tanka, tycka trouble (noun), svarighet,
this, denna, detta brak
thought, tanke trouble (v.), besvara, plaga
thresh, troska true, sann
threshing floor, loge try, forsoka
throat, hals tuition, skolavgift
through, genom turn (v.) vanda (om)
throw, kasta turn (noun), tur
thus, sa, salunda twenty, tjugu
- bil- twice, tva ganger
-
ticket, biljett; office,

jettkontor two, tva

tidy, renlig, ordentlig
time, tid; have ,
hinna U
time (counting), gang umbrella, paraply
time table, tidtabell uncle, farbror
timid, radd under, under
tip, drickspengar understand, forsta
tired, trott undertake, foretaga, ataga sig
to-day, i dag uneasy, orolig
together, tillsammans unfavorable, ogynnsam
tolerate, tala, fordraga unfortunate, olycklig
to-morrow, i morgon unfortunately, olyckligtvis,
tongue, tunga tyvarr
to-night, i kvall union, union
too, for,ocksa unit, (en) hel
tooth, tand unpack, packa upp
toothache, tandvark unpleasant, trakig
town, stad until, till, tills (conj.)
 VOCABULARY 299
unusual, ovanlig W
upon, pa ic agon,vagn
upset, stjalpa wait, vanta (pa)
usage, set! waiter, uppassare, vaktmasta-
use (noun), bruk re
use (v.), bruka, anvanda ivaitlng room, vantsal
wake up, vakna
useful, nytcig
walk (noun), spatsertur
usual, vanlig; as- ,
som van-
wander, vandra
ligt
want (v.), onska, vilja ha;
usually, vanligen
sakna
warm, varm
wash (v.), tvatta
vacant, ledig, torn u-ash, washing, tvatt, tvatt-
vacation, ferier; semester ning
valise, resvaska watch, fickur, klocka
valley, dal watchmaker, urmakare
value (noun), varde; have a water (noun), vatten
galla
, water (v.), vattna
valuable, vardefull way, vag; satt, vis
variance, be at, oense weak, svag
various, olika wealthy, rik
Vasa Street, \asagatan weapon, vapen
vegetables, gronsaker weather, vader
vehement, haftig Wednesday, onsdag
very, mycket; with negative week, vecka
vidare, varst iveigh, vaga
vessel, fartyg weight, vikt, tyngd
vestibule, tambur weighty, viktig
vicinity, narhet well, val, frisk, bra; off,

vie iv, utsikt valbargad; read, belast

villa, villa wet, vat
village, by wheat, vete
violent, haftig, valdsam, sud- when, nar
den where, var
visit (noun), besok which, (interrog.) vilkeu;
visit (v.), besoka, halsa pa (rel.) vilken, som
(hos) ivhile (conj.), medan
voice, rost while (noun), stund
voyage, overresa whither, vart
300 VOCABULARY
who, (interrog.) vem; (rel.) wonder (noun), under
som, vilken wonder (v.), undra
whole, hel wonderful, underbar
wholesale merchant, gross- word, ord
handlare work (noun), arbete; verk
wholly, belt och ballet work (v.), arbeta
wife, hustru ivorkingman, arbetare
wind up, draga upp world, varld
window, fonster worn out, utsliten
wine, vin worried, orolig
wing, vinge worth (adj.), vard
winter, vinter; last winter, i
write, skriva
vintras Y
wipe, torka; off, torka av year, ar
wise, klok yell (v.), skrika
wish (noun), onskan yellow, gul
wish (v.), 6'nska yes, ja, jo
with, hos, meet yesterday, i gar

within, inom, innanfor yet, an, annu; anda

without, utan you, du, ni
 CONDENSED INDEX OF SUBJECTS.
The reference is to sections. In general only the first of successive sections
on the same topic is indicated.

Accentuation, 33. Date, expressions of, 341.

Accent-stress, simple words, 34 ; com- Declension, of nouns, 76 ; first, 77 ;

pounds, 35 ; foreign, 38. second, 80 ; third, 83 ; fourth, 105 ;

Accent, musical, 39. fifth, 118; irregularities, and

127
Address, see Pronouns of letter, 344. ; app. ; foreign, 127, g ; proper, 128 ;

Adjectives: declension, 109; indefi- v* adjectives, see adjectives ; of

nite, 110 ; use of indefinite declen- pronouns, see pronouns.

sion, 113 ; definite, 122 ;
use of, Demonstratives, 195 ; remarks on,
124 ; pronominal, see demonstra- 200 ; uses of, 201.
tive, interrogative, etc. ; compared, Dependent clauses, word order after,
303. 104, 2 ; omission of the auxiliary
Adverbs: form, 317, 364; position, in, 299.
179 compared, 318.
; Deponent verbs, 194.
Alphabet, 1. Double forms, in nouns, app.
Apostrophe, 130, a.

Articles, 62; definite, 68; postposi- Foreign words, pronunciation of, 18, 4,
note 21, 1 22, note, 23, note ac-
tive, 69, 70, 71, generic and ab-
79 ;
; ; ;

stract, 74 ; distributive, 338 ; syn- centuation of, 38 ; nouns, 127, g.

Future tenses: form, 143 use of
tax, app. ; prepositive, 73 use of, ;
;

126 indefinite, 63 ; syntax, 64 and

294 present used for future, 290
; ;
;

app. expresison of pure futurity, 296.

Auxiliaries: 96; tiara, 66,
hava, 65,
96 188
143 varda, Gender, 55.
; skola, ; bliva, ;

Genitive,132 uses 133 with

190 ; modal, see modal auxiliaries ;
; of, ;

omission 299.
nouns of measure, 134 ; objective,
of,
135.
Capital letters, 45.
remarks on Imperative, 144 substitutes, 147.
Cardinal numbers, 324 ;
;

325 formations from, 339. Imperfect, 291.

;

Impersonal passive, 187, 243.

Cases, 129 ; syntax of, 131.
262. Impersonal verbs, 241.
Causative, lata,
Indefinite pronouns and adjectives,
Comparison, adjective, 303 by auxil- ;
265 pronouns only, 265 pronouns
iary, 308 of equality, 312 ;
;
abso- ;
;

and adjectives, 270.

lute, 315 ; adverbs, 318.
Infinitive,300; to express purpose,
Compound verbs, 204.
116 165, 2 ; att omitted, 300 ; preposi-
Concord, gender, 56 ; adjectives, ;
tions with infinitive, 302.
sing, for plur. in verbs, 67, c.
Inseparable prefixes, 205.
Conjugation: 87, 97, 136, 143, 152,
Interjections, 381,
158, 180, 188.
Interrogatives, 214 remarks, 216.
Conjunctions, coordinating, 371
;
gen- ;

eral connectives, 372 ; adverbial Measure, nouns of, 134, 338.

conjunctions, 374 ; subordinating, Modal verbs, forms, 251 ; uses of,
377. 252 ; senses of, 255.
 302 INDEX.

Negatives, position, 179. reflexive, 150, intensified, 248, note;

Nominative case, 131, 130, c, 134. 'possessive, 172 ; demonstrative, 195 ;

Nouns, declension, 76 first, 77 sec- : ; interrogative, 214 ; relative, 219 ;

ond, 80 ; third, 83 fourth, 105 ; ; reciprocal, 250 ; indefinite, 265.

fifth, 118 irregularities, 127 and

; Proper nouns, 128.
app. gender, 55
; foreign, 127, g ; ; Pronunciation, 2 42.

compound, 35; of measure, 134, Punctuation, 50.

338 ; verbal, 230.
Number, singular of verbs for English Quantity, 2 ; long m and n, 3, note.

plural, 67, c.
lieciprocal, pronoun, 250 ; reciprocal
Numerals, cardinal, 324 325 ordinal, ; ;
sense of the passive, 186, a.
324, 331 formations from, 339.
;
Relatives, 219 ; remarks 222 ; omis-
Omission, auxiliary in dependent
of sion of, 224.
clauses, 299 of prepositive definite
;

article, 126, 2. Separable prefixes, 207.

Order of words, of verb (normal, in- Subjunctive, 158 ; uses of, 163 ;
wish.
164 purpose, 165 concession, 166
verted), 104, 1, 2; questions, 104,
; ; ;

167 (condition) unreal,

2 ; adverbs, 179 object with vari- ;
potential, ;

171.
able verb-compounds, 210 nagon- ;

ingenting, 268, 2. Supine, 91.

ting,
Superlative, see Comparison ; distrib-
Paradigms, see nouns, adjectives, etc. utive, 316 ; absolute, 315.
Participle, present, 226; past, 233: Syllabication, 51 ; compound words,
past participle and supine, 240. 54.
Passive, 180 in -s, 181 with auxili-
; ;

Tenses (forms), sec Paradigms;

aries fbliva, varda, vara) ; compar-
ison of passives in -s and with (uses), present, 290; imperfect,
291 293 294 in
bliva, agent with passive, 183
192 ;
;
; perfect, ; future, ;

unreal conditions, 171

substitute for, 184 apparent or ;
progressive-. ;

idiomatic mean- 93 ; 290, note ; 292, note ; emphat-

false passive, 185 ;

ic, 93.
ings, impersonal, 187.
186 ;

Past tense, 291. Time of day, 336; date, 335, 341.

Perfect tense, form, 94, 6 use, 293. ;

Umlaut, 14.
Personal, names, 128, 130, a ; pro-
nouns, 139. Verbs, weak, 88 ; strong, 89 ;
first

Possessives, 172
possessive ;
reflexive conjugation, 90 ; second
conjuga-
sin, 174; substitute for, 178. tion, 97 third ; conjugation, 136 ;
Prefixes, inseparable, 204 variable, ;
fourth conjugation, 152 ; irregular
207 ; position of object, 210 ; ac- verbs, 168 ; passive, 180 ;imperson-
cent, 211; for and fore, 211, 1. al, 241 ; reflexive, 245 ; modal, 251 :

Prepositions, 345 uses, 348 ; ;

351 ; number, 67, c ;
list of principal
357, 360. parts, strong and irregular verbs,
Present tense, 290. app.
Principal parts, of strong and ir-
Verbal nouns, 230.
regular verbs, app. and
Vowels, quantity, 2 ; hard soft,
Pronominal adjectives, see demonstra-
13 modification, 14.
;

tives, indefinite, etc.

Pronouns, personal, 139 ; in address, Weak verbs, 88.

67, a, b ; use of title instead, 142 ; Weight, nouns of, 134, 338.
SWEDISH NATIONAL
SONGS
 Dane liksom askan, broder.
Marcia. J. H. STUNZ.

Zgl.-J- j
Hi '^' " *
Da-ne lik sum as-kan, bro-der, hogt var fosterlandaka sang!
rt

U "
-*- -H TT
b p p
Pul-sen briuner, hjUrtat gloder; marsch framat annu en gang!

i. > ** ,

rte& +-4
afcfc H f

.-
8ang-en ad- la kans-lor fo -
der, hjar-tatanyckelhetersang.

gff
- " Di) i i

Sangen ad-la kanslor foder,

I I
g
L'STT
. .

T rp-T. B
"
L
.

Ma vi da i to -
ner

Ma
mm
rrTTTTTJvi da to
!,_,_!

- ner
-L

svii -
C

-
ra
-pa.

Ma vi da, i to -
uer
 sva ra tro-hets-e -
den hand i
hand;

,3==:toi4g
tro-hets-e -
den hand i
hand;
sva - -
ra tro-hets - e -
den hand i
hand;

~l F 1 1 f

it
t> t t 0"
v \

p
liv och blod for Sver-ges a -

ra, hell ! vart dy - ra fos - ter-

AiiMiJ. ^:\:\
^=t
r- f .r
^^ira^a^
P
L .
f*
r

/#f-H 4- r
 Dalkarlasang.
Marsch. 0. LlNDBLAD.

^fc-rriiizi^ rr
 dys -ter prakt, ocli ill - var bru -sa diir fran trakt till trakt.

-* --.-*- *-. -Jn --. -- -J-

j -*:_ "
-*- "
-t-
:
a~~; r 4-^L
!^r_rjt=^

^t^_f5ZR :^:

lEiiEH
Ett har - ligt land, ett bar -
ligt land, I go - de da - la-

"f f"f .r p > :r

T Ti

decrease.

X h _| H
 Mitt hemlands dal.
Andante. PFBIL.

mf
5ita
1. Var dof -
tar en blom - ma sa skon (sa skon),
2. Var tin -
nes en him - mel (sa bla),

var sjung - er en fa -
gel sa nojd nojd),
var stra - lar vftl so - len sa varm varm),

*
fc4
^ wm
y #11
 rit.

-j&f ft 1
 Du gaxnla, du fria.
Andante maestoso. Folkmelodi fran Norrland.
mf
f* -i-PU" fr-ft
3E* * J
1
'

i 3 f=
1. Du gam la, du fri a, du fjiill-ho-ga Nord,du
- -
tys ta, du
-

2. Du tro -nar pa min-nenf ran forn-sto ra-dar, da a - ratditt

i^t^fefe!

x 31 n_a NL
 Fjariln vingad syns pa Haga.
C. M. BELLMAN.

>
 Maestoso. F. PACIDS.

i>
&
'

:
p-
1.
Vartland,vartland,vartfos-ter-land,ljudhogt,ody-raord! Ej
2. Vi al-ska va-ra strom-mars brusoch va-ra backarssprang,den
3. Din blom-ning,sluten an knopp,skall mognaur sitttvang;ae,
i

/z dim. dim.

'

P P
lyftsenh(3jdmothimlensrand,ejsauksendal,ejskolJ8eustrand,mer
mor-ka sko-gens dyst ra sus, varstjarDenatt,vart8ommarljus, allt,
urvar karlek skall gaopp ditt ljns,din glans,din frojd,ditthopp,och

-r* fr^i
-7-
3& rt<.

als -
kad an var bygd i nord, an va-ra fit ders jord.
allt, vad harsom syn, som sang v&rt hjarta rort en gang,
hogre klinga skall en gang var fosterlandska sting.

r>

mer alskad an var bygd, an va-ra fii-ders jord.

vad bar som syn, vart hjarta rort en gang.
allt, allt,
och hogre klinga skall var fosterlandska sang.
J. L. Rl'XEBERG.
 Mandom, mod och morska man.
Allegretto. Folkmarsch fran Orsa i Dalarne.
Ill
r\
 Dalmarscti.

J = 100.
IVAR WlD^BN.
Hurtigt. M. M. AIT. af toQsattaren.

yrty/tr
 Lifligore. f mf mf

PM-^^
Hur latt
=f=
~f f^f^
det ar att vand-ra, I bro-der, med var-and-ra, nar

at
L. -0 -

m
ff
>r c
 a tempo.
A K
 Lifligore. f mf

m=f T
Hur latt del &r att vand-ra, I bro-der, med var-and-ra, niir

*
,-M
H z *

t ir

J
m
*
J
5
* |j.
L r
I'
*1 m
j
* fP^ H*/^
^s^

slan-tar-na i fie- kan sla takt mot byx-ans skinn! Hur

^ H
^^:

* it j.
-*- I *
kla -
ri-net-ten la -
ter, da spel-man vSn-der a -
termed

- - la - la -
la la la, tra-la-la, la, tra-la-la,

dim. -== n==

^^
e rit.
:i2:

^^ ^&r T

brudgumsskank at flickan och brollopslust i sinn!

>--

-
la -
la -
la, tra-la-la, la -
la la, tra-la-la,tra-la-la,

Dalmarsch 4. E. A. KARLFELDT.
 Svenska kungssangen.
OTTO LINDKLAD.
Maestoso, mf

Ur svens-ka h jar-tans djup en gang en samfalld och en

1 -.

/K r ^ m
Varmiands-visan.
 Langtan till landet.
Tempo di marcia.

f >
 a - zur -
skif - tan -
de, lig
-
ga ang -
ar -
na i

dans till klar -

nad sjo, tras-tens sang i fu - ru-

S ^f-Z ^ |
00000
r^
ff

33 t-l 4.: 2X j-MSft^?: :

i> I p
da gens la gor, och i lun den dan-sa kiil-lor-ne.
- -

sko -
gens lun-der, vat-teo-fa-gelnslekkringfjardocho.
"

T.^T "t i_:i_fJ~

:

tih"'>-p-
jL
f-f-

Langtan till landet 2. H. SATHERBERG.

Nackens polska.
^4ndan<e con moto. Folkmelodi.

$=

1. Djupt i ha -vet pa de-man-te-hal-len nac-ken vi - lar i

2. A -
girs dott-rar ho-nom sak-te-li - ga gung-a fram pa den

gro-nan sal, nat-tens tar - nor span-na mor-ka pal-len

Har-pansljud, de sa sor 11 -
-
kla -
ra sjo. ga
-
ge ga,
|> & --.
'
 PP
dt
i EE*E
6 - ver skog, 6 - ver berg och dal. Kval-len har-lig star i
so - ka fjar - ran en vag att do. Fast bans 6 - ga star at

> P ft

9id?=F=F-
-S Ki.

tt=4t :P=3=

rfl.

=
: t *:r
P P
svartan hog-tids-skrud, nar och fjarran.ej en sus-ning, ii
dunk-la him-me-len, ing-en stjar-na ba-dar nattens drottning an.

f
*^*=
5^5
tnnnT-
-
^
P P

^m
a tempo.
fcdt
*c.
3=
stor det lugn 6 - ver nejden rar, nar havets kung ur gyllne
Fre-ja smyckar sitt gyll-ne bar, ocb nac-ken sa sin sorg pa

f *
t^t 35 ^fe=|b=ig
___Jjw_J5 L_i.

y v

p
1
bor-gen gar, nar havets kung ur gyll-ne bor-gen gar.
bar-pan slar, och nac-ken sa sin sorg pa bar-pan slar.
b . -&-
-r**-
ft ft
J>
%
i
Nackens polska 2.
mr v-
A. A. AFZELIUS.
A 000 666 352